JP6503621B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings disposed below the liquid crystal display device, and a gaming ball that has not been won in the plurality of winning openings are discharged from the gaming area There is a gaming machine provided with an out port (Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-143268 A

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, there is a problem that it is impossible to increase the size of sufficiently liquid crystal display device.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of achieving an increase in size of a liquid crystal display device.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 flows without being won by the liquid crystal display device, the plurality of winning prize openings disposed below the liquid crystal display device, and the plurality of winning prize openings. An out port for discharging game balls from the game area, and a partition member for partitioning the game area, including a guide member, wherein the partition member is a part of a circular shape of the game area. That is, the area on the one side in the width direction below the liquid crystal display device is divided into a shape expanded outward, and the winning opening is disposed on the one side in the width direction of the gaming area One side winning opening and the other side winning opening disposed in the area on the other side in the width direction opposite to the width direction one side of the gaming area, and the other side winning opening is the gaming area Lower edge of the game area to a position where passage of the game ball is disabled between the lower edge of the game area Is disposed in contact with the lower edge of the proximity to or the game area, the one side winning opening is disposed upstream of the other side winning opening in the game area, the out port, the other The first out port disposed on one side in the width direction of the gaming area with respect to the side winning opening, and the second out port disposed on the other side in the width direction of the gaming area with respect to the other side winning opening And the first out port is disposed on the downstream side of the guide member, the guide member having a plate-like bottom surface, which is downstream of the one side winning opening, The game ball is disposed at a position upstream of the other side winning opening, and can be guided toward the other side winning opening toward the other side winning opening, and a plurality of guiding members are provided. configured game balls in guidable length, a game ball that has passed through the one widthwise side of the liquid crystal display device wherein the other side winning opening It is possible to guide.

Gaming machine of claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein, Ru with a substrate box.

According to claim 1 the gaming machine described in the can the size of the liquid crystal display device.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front schematic diagram of a game board. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation | movement unit which looked at the operation | movement unit which decomposed | disassembled the front. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation | movement unit which looked at the operation | movement unit which decomposed | disassembled the front. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation | movement unit which looked at the operation | movement unit which decomposed | disassembled the front. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a rotational operation unit. It is a rear view of a rotational operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rotational operation unit which looked at the front of the rotational operation unit which decomposed | disassembled. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rotational operation unit which looked at the front of the rotational operation unit which decomposed | disassembled. (A) is a front view of a case body, (b) is a front view of a fixing member. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates typically the support structure by the case body of 1st gearwheel, 2nd gearwheel, and 3rd gearwheel. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the compound operation unit which carried out the plain view of the compound operation unit which disassembled. It is an exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit in the state where a part of compound operation units was disassembled. It is a front perspective view of an opening and closing 1st gear, opening and closing 2nd gear, rotation 1st gear, and rotation 2nd gear. FIG. 14 is a partial enlarged front view of the combined operation unit, illustrating in time series the steps of assembling the opening and closing first gear, the opening and closing second gear, and the rotating first gear and rotating second gear to the first axis and the second axis. FIG. 14 is a partial enlarged front view of the combined operation unit, illustrating in time series the steps of assembling the opening and closing first gear, the opening and closing second gear, and the rotating first gear and rotating second gear to the first axis and the second axis. It is an exploded front view of a compound operation unit for explaining relative displacement state of the opening and closing second gear and slide rack member to the back arm body. It is a front view of the compound operation unit which illustrated opening and closing operation and rotation operation of an operation member in time series. It is a front schematic diagram of the compound operation unit which illustrates typically the meshing state of the opening and closing first gear and the opening and closing second gear, and the meshing state of the rotating first gear and the rotating second gear, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of the compound operation unit which illustrates typically the meshing state of the opening and closing first gear and the opening and closing second gear, and the meshing state of the rotating first gear and the rotating second gear, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of the compound operation unit which illustrates typically the meshing state of the opening and closing first gear and the opening and closing second gear, and the meshing state of the rotating first gear and the rotating second gear, respectively. It is a front view of the 1st joint operation unit and the 2nd joint operation unit in the state where the 1st engaging member and a pair of 2nd coupling members were arranged at a retreat position. It is a front view of the 1st joint operation unit and the 2nd joint operation unit in the state where the 1st engagement member and a pair of 2nd coupling members were arranged at the joint position. (A) is a front view of a 1st joint operation unit, (b) is a bottom view of the 1st joint operation unit in the arrow XXXb direction view of Fig.33 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st joint operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a 1st joint operation unit. It is a rear view of a drive part. (A) is a front perspective view of a slide mechanism part, (b) is a back perspective view of a slide mechanism part. It is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism part which carried out the plain view of the slide mechanism part which disassembled. It is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism part which looked at a slide mechanism part which disassembled back. (A) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit in a state in which the first coupling member is disposed in the retracted position, and (b) is a first coupling in a state in which the first coupling member is disposed in the retracted position It is a rear view of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit in a state in which the first coupling member is disposed in the coupling position, and (b) is a first coupling in a state in which the first coupling member is disposed in the coupling position It is a rear view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a 2nd joint operation unit. (A) is a front view of a 2nd joint operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a 2nd joint operation unit. It is a front view of a 2nd joint operation unit. It is a model figure which looked at the 1st combination operation unit and the 2nd combination operation unit in the state where the 1st combination member and a pair of 2nd combination members were arranged at the combination position. It is a front perspective view of an annular operation unit in the state where an annular formation member was arranged at a retreat position. It is a front perspective view of a ring operation unit in the state where a ring formation member was arranged at a binding position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the ring operation unit which looked at the front the disassembled ring operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the ring operation unit which looked at the back of the disassembled ring operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the link member, (b) is a rear perspective view of the link member, (c) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the link member in the portion Lc of FIG. 50 (a) (D) is a side view of the link member as viewed in the direction of the arrow Ld in FIG. 50 (a). It is a partial enlarged rear view of a torus operation unit. It is a back side schematic diagram of the ring operation unit which illustrates typically the ring operation unit by which a pair of ring formation member is arrange | positioned in the retracted position. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular ring operation unit in the LIII-LIII line of FIG. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the ring operation unit which illustrates typically the ring operation unit arrange | positioned in a position which a pair of ring formation member becomes the middle of a retracted position and a coupling position. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular ring operation unit in the LV-LV line of FIG. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the ring operation unit which illustrates typically the ring operation unit by which a pair of ring formation member is arrange | positioned in the coupling | bond position. FIG. 57 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular operation unit along the line LVII-LVII in FIG. 56. It is a front perspective view of a rocking operation unit in the state where the arm member was projected to the overhanging position. It is a front perspective view of rocking operation unit 800 in the state where arm member 820 was retracted to the retracted position. It is a front perspective view of a rocking operation unit in the state where an arm member was retracted to a retracted position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rocking movement unit which carried out the plain view of the rocking movement unit which was disassembled. (A) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit in a state where the arm member is disposed at the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the rocking operation unit in the portion LXIb of FIG. is there. (A) is a rear view of a rocking operation unit, (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the rocking operation unit in a portion LXIIb of FIG. 62 (a). (A) is a rear view of a rocking operation unit, (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the rocking operation unit in a portion LXIIIb of FIG. 63 (a). (A) is a rear view of a rocking operation unit, (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the rocking operation unit in a portion LXIVb of FIG. 64 (a). It is a top view in the assembled state of the middle case body in a 2nd embodiment, a back case body, and a front case body. FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate case body, the back case body, and the front case body along the line LXVI-LXVI in FIG. 65. (A) is a side view of a link member, (b) is a top view in the assembled state of an intermediate case body, a back case body, and a front case body. It is a rear perspective view of a raising and lowering base body. It is a back side schematic diagram of the ring operation unit which illustrates typically the ring operation unit by which a pair of ring formation member is arrange | positioned in the retracted position. FIG. 72 is a cross-sectional schematic view of the annular operation unit along the line LXX-LXX in FIG. 69. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the ring operation unit which illustrates typically the ring operation unit by which a pair of ring formation member is arrange | positioned in the coupling | bond position. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular ring operation unit in the LXXI-LXXI line | wire of FIG. (A) is a side view of the link member in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a top view in the assembly state of a middle case body, a back case body, and a front case body. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the ring operation unit in which a pair of ring forming members are arrange | positioned in a coupling | bond position. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the 1st joint operation unit in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit in a state in which the first coupling member is disposed in the retracted position, and (b) is a first coupling in a state in which the first coupling member is disposed in the retracted position It is a rear view of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit in a state in which the first coupling member is disposed in the coupling position, and (b) is a first coupling in a state in which the first coupling member is disposed in the coupling position It is a rear view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the 1st joint operation unit in a 5th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit in a state in which the first coupling member is disposed in the retracted position, and (b) is a first coupling in a state in which the first coupling member is disposed in the retracted position It is a rear view of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit in a state in which the first coupling member is disposed in the coupling position, and (b) is a first coupling in a state in which the first coupling member is disposed in the coupling position It is a rear view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the 1st joint operation unit in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit in a state in which the first coupling member is disposed in the retracted position, and (b) is a first coupling in a state in which the first coupling member is disposed in the retracted position It is a rear view of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit in a state in which the first coupling member is disposed in the coupling position, and (b) is a first coupling in a state in which the first coupling member is disposed in the coupling position It is a rear view of an operation unit. (A) to (c) are exploded perspective views of the combined operation unit in the seventh embodiment, (A) to (c) is a disassembled perspective view of the compound operation unit in 8th Embodiment. (A) to (c) is an exploded perspective view of the compound operation unit in a 9th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the 1st coupling member in a 10th embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of the 1st coupling member in the arrow LXXXVIIb direction view of Drawing 87 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the first connecting member taken along line LXXXVIIIa-LXXXVIIIa in FIG. 87 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first connecting member taken along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 87 (a) And (c) is a cross-sectional view of the first coupling member taken along line LXXXVIIIc-LXXXVIIIc in FIG. 88 (a). (A) is a partial enlarged front view of a 2nd joint operation unit, (b) is a top view of the 2nd joint member in arrow LXXXIXb direction view of Drawing 89 (a). FIG. 89 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second coupling member along line XCa-XCa in FIG. 89 (b), and FIG. 90 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second coupling member along line XCb-XCb in FIG. 90 (a) is there. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st coupling member in the state arrange | positioned in a coupling | bonding position, and a 2nd coupling member.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 35, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 61 and 62. The first opening 63, the second opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed on the lower left side of the game area (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 having a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 640 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  The probability change of the second symbol not only increases during a definite change or time, but also the time when the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is changed, and a longer time than normal It is set. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball reaches the second winning opening 640 compared to when the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy condition. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times a jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the motorized role thing 640a attached to the second winning a prize opening 640 during a definite change or during a short time, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric operation per hit A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640 a is released more than in the normal mode. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 640a is opened at a time and once when the electric symbol 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is open or the number of times the electric combination 640a is opened per hit does not occur during a certain change or during a short time, and the second symbol is hit Only the probability may be changed to be up relative to normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol A third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of through gate 67 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as display symbols (the second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through gate 67 It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized role 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 has a predetermined time It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning combination 640 a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the time saving.

  In addition, the second winning opening 640 during the definite change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the open probability and increasing the opening time and opening number of the motorized combination 640a per hit, which increases the hit probability during definite change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right of the game board can pass Is configured. When the ball passes through gate 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side in a front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the second winning opening switch being turned on. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 640 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 640 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of winning balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize may be three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second prize winning hole 640 has won may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role object 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role object 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times that the motorized role piece 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win to the second winning opening 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and during time saving.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 than in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have a motorized part like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where it is possible to win.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, there are many cases in which the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, and therefore, it is directed to the first prize opening 64 without the electric jack. Launch the ball so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and the winning of the first winning opening 64 gives a lot of opportunities for a big hit lottery and becomes a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim at things.

  On the other hand, the electric gate 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state by passing the ball through the through gate 67 during definite variation or time, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640. The ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display 80 toward the second winning hole 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the motor gate is opened by passing through the through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning in the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular first specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. Further, a second variable winning device 650 is disposed on the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, and in a substantially central portion thereof has a circular shape similar in size to the other winning openings 63, 64, and 640. A second specified winning hole 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the stop symbol of the big hit and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning openings 65a and 650a which are normally closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a, 650a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a, 650a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the first specified winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (for opening / closing driving forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate ( Not shown). The first specified winning combination opening 65 a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening and closing plate to the front lower side, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which the first specified winning opening 65a is easy to win, and the open state and normal time It operates so as to alternately repeat the state with the closed state of.

  Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 is an opening that is a guide path for guiding a ball to the second specified winning hole 650a and an opening on the opposite side of the second specified winning hole 650a of the guide path. 651, a driving part 650b for opening and closing the opening 651, and a small opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the driving part 650b in the left and right direction about the lower side of the opening 651 And have. The second specified winning opening 650a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the small opening solenoid is driven to tilt the drive part 650b to the right, and the ball temporarily forms an open state where the second specified winning opening 650a is likely to win, and the open state and normal It operates to repeat the state with the closed state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a, and the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are for a predetermined time when the LED corresponding to the large hit is lit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. When the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is opened, the large opening opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a, 650a during a predetermined time. A gaming state opened a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state. Further, the specific winning hole 65a, 650a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be disposed, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning hole 64, or Not limited to the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a seal paper stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71 and a second out port 72. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a is discharged from the ball out through the first out port 71 or the second out port 72. You will be guided to the road. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64, and the second out port 72 is disposed on the left side of the second specified winning port 650a. That is, the second out port 72 is disposed on the opposite side of the first out port 71 across the second specified winning port 650a.

  Therefore, it is a ball which flows down the game area, and the ball which reaches the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side (right side in FIG. 2) of the second specified winning opening 650a 61 or along the slope of the outer edge member 73, and is guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 71, while the lower end of the game area on the left side in front view than the second specified winning port 650a (inner rail 61 The ball reaching the) is dropped along the slope (curve) of the inner rail 61, and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second out port 72.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. Other devices 228 include drive motors 340, 430, 522, 640, 740, 830.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the layout (arrangement) of each component such as the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a and the out ports 71, 72 in the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic front view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 5, while showing each structure of a prize-winning opening 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a etc. typically, a part of game board 13 is partially expanded and shown in figure.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the inner rail 61 has a portion (portion to the right of the first out port 71) disposed on the lower right side linearly extended in a front view of the gaming area. The first outlet 71 is formed to be inclined upward and away from the first outlet 71.

  Between the tip on the lower right side of the inner rail 61 and the tip on the upper right side of the outer rail 62, an outer edge member 73 made of resin defining the outer edge of the game area with the rails 61 and 62 is disposed. Ru. The outer edge member 73 has an arc wall portion 73a formed by providing an arc-shaped wall surface extending the outer rail 62 on the inner surface side and a lower portion of the arc wall portion 73a and is vertically connected (vertical direction in FIG. 5) A vertical wall portion 73b formed by providing a wall surface extending linearly along the inner surface and a lower portion of the vertical wall portion 73b and extending linearly while being inclined downward toward the inner rail 61 It comprises the inclined wall portion 73c formed by providing the wall surface to be provided on the inner surface side.

  Thus, the game area defined by the inner rail 61, the outer rail 62, and the outer edge member 73 is a part of the substantially circular shape (the lower right part in FIG. 5) formed in a substantially rectangular shape and enlarged outward. It will be shaped. Specifically, the region defined by the linear portion of the inner rail 61 disposed on the right side of the first out port 71 and the inclined wall portion 73c and the vertical wall portion 73b of the outer edge member 73 is substantially rectangular Is formed.

  Thereby, as compared with the case where the game area is formed in a substantially circular shape in which the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 are extended, as a whole game area, a portion having a substantially rectangular area (lower right part in FIG. 5). The area can be expanded. Therefore, the enlarged area is used as a space for arranging the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, etc. Alternatively, it can be used as a space for forming a path for balls to flow down, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of each winning hole 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a or the flow path of balls can be increased. As a result, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered downward (the lower side in FIG. 5), and accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 can be increased in size.

  That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in series along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 5) below the third symbol display device 81. It was Therefore, the space required below the third symbol display device 81 is increased in the vertical direction, and the enlargement of the third symbol display device 81 is inhibited.

  On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, the enlarged portion (generally rectangular area, lower right portion in FIG. 5) of the game area forms the arrangement space such as the winning opening or the flow-down path of the ball. It can be used as space. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the second winning opening 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are disposed not directly under the first winning opening 64, but in the enlarged portion of the above-mentioned game area. Therefore, the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered downward by that amount, so that the third symbol display device 81 can be made larger.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 13 of the present embodiment, the second specified winning opening 650a is also not directly under the first winning opening 64 but one side in the width direction of the gaming area with respect to the first winning opening 64 (variable winning device The ball can not pass between the second specified winning opening 650a and the inner rail 61, which is offset to the opposite side 65, the left side in FIG. 5, and is in contact with the inner rail 61 (lower edge of the game area) Is placed at the position where Therefore, the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered downward by that amount, so that the third symbol display device 81 can be made larger.

  In this case, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, the paths for discharging the balls from the game area to the ball discharge path are provided at two places (the first out port 71 and the second out port 72). Further enlargement of the three-symbol display device 81 is made possible.

  That is, in order to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered, so it is necessary to lower the position of the winning opening accordingly. For example, when the position of the first winning opening 64 is lowered, a member for guiding the guide plate member 74 (a ball when hitting the right (a ball passing the right of the variable display unit 80) to the second specified winning hole 650a Also in the position of), it is necessary to lower the space for letting the ball flow down from the first winning opening 64, and as a result, it is also necessary to lower the position of the second specified winning opening 650a.

  However, if the position of the second specified winning opening 650a is lowered too low, it is not possible to secure a space for causing the ball to flow downward (between the inner rail 61) of the second specified winning opening 650a. That is, it is not possible to discharge the ball that has flown down without being won in the winning opening from the out port disposed below the first winning port 64. Therefore, there is a limit in lowering the position of the second specified winning opening 650a, which is a factor that can not be made large enough to the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the first out port 71, the second out port 72 sandwiches the second specified winning port 650a, the first out port 71 (I.e., the first out port 71 and the second out port 72 are respectively disposed on the right and left sides of the second specified winning port 650a), the ball flowing down the game area The ball reaching the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side (right side in FIG. 5) of the second specified winning hole 650a in front view (right side in FIG. 5) is inclined to the inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73 The balls can flow down and be discharged to the ball discharge path by the first out port 71, while the balls reaching the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area on the left side of the second specified winning port 650a in front view Flow along the slope (curve) Is allowed, it can be discharged from the second out-port 72 to the spherical discharge passage.

  As described above, by providing paths for discharging the balls from the game area to the ball discharge path at two places (the first out port 71 and the second out port 72), the lower portion of the second specified winning hole 650a (inner rail It is not necessary to secure a space for the balls to flow down between Therefore, the position of the second specified winning opening 650a can be further lowered downward (adjacent to the inner rail 61 or placed continuously), so that the position of the guide plate member 75 can be lowered downward accordingly. Since the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered, it is possible to further increase the size of the third symbol display device 81 accordingly.

  In the present embodiment, the second winning opening 640 and the first specific winning opening 65a are offset to the right of the board, and the second specific winning opening 650a is offset to the left of the board and approaches the inner rail 61. By being disposed (or brought into contact), effects by the rotational operation unit 300 can be performed more effectively.

  That is, when the player strikes the right, only the right side of the board on which the ball flows down is noted by the player, and in particular, for the ball for which the second winning hole 640 has not been won, It is rare for a player to pay attention to the flow. In this case, in the present embodiment, among the balls that have passed through the right of the variable display unit 80, the ball that has passed from the right to the left above the second winning opening 640 passes the upper side of the guide plate member 74, It is made to flow toward the 2nd specified winning a prize mouth 650a. Therefore, even when the second prize winning opening 640 is not awarded, an opportunity for winning in the second specified winning prize entry 650a occurs next, and from the expectation of winning in the second specified prize winning entry 650a, the second It is possible to make the player pay attention to the ball passing the upper side of the winning opening 640 from right to left. Thus, the line of sight of the player can be directed toward the center of the board below the variable display unit 80. As described later, in the present embodiment, the rotary operation unit 300 is disposed on the back side of the first winning opening 64, and the rotary operation unit 300 can be viewed through the game board 13 (through the game board 13). Therefore, when the ball for which the second prize winning opening 640 has not been won is made to flow toward the second specified winning prize opening 650a, the player is also made to visually recognize the effect by the rotary operation unit 300, and such rotary operation The effect of the unit 300 can be enhanced.

  As described above, in the game board 13, the base plate 60 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and the player is allowed to visually recognize the rotary operation unit 300 disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. Is made possible. Here, the rotation operation unit 300 is a device operated with a winning on the first winning opening 64 or a result of a lottery for winning, and on the back side of the gaming board 13 (the base plate 60), 1) It is disposed at a position corresponding to the winning opening 64.

  Therefore, for the player who looks at the ball flowing down toward the first winning opening 64, in particular, when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the rotating operation is performed behind the first winning opening 64. Since the effect by the unit 300 can be visually recognized, the effect accompanying the winning of the ball to the first winning opening 64 can be effectively performed. The detailed configuration of the rotational operation unit 300 will be described later.

  In this case, since the second winning opening 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are offset in the left-right direction (the width direction of the game area, rightward in FIG. 5) with respect to the first winning opening 64, The positions of the first winning opening 64 and the rotary operation unit 300 can be lowered downward (FIG. 5 lower side), so that the rotary operation unit 300 corresponds to the first winning opening 64 and the game board 13 Even in the case of disposing on the back side of (base plate 60), the upsizing of the third symbol display device 81 can be achieved.

  That is, when the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged in series in the vertical direction as in a conventional pachinko machine, the position corresponding to the first winning opening 64 The arrangement of the rotary operation unit 300 on the back side of the game board 13 (the base plate 60) in the first embodiment is a first operation because the rotary operation unit 300 interferes with the second winning opening 640 and the first variable winning device 65. The space required for the arrangement of the winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the first variable winning device 65 is increased in the vertical direction, which hinders the enlargement of the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 are in the left-right direction with respect to the first winning opening 64. Since it is arranged offset (in the width direction of the game area), the interference between the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 and the rotary operation unit 300 can be avoided, The position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered downward by a minute, and the third symbol display device 81 can be made larger.

  In particular, with regard to the first variable winning device 65, the offset amount can be sufficiently secured by being offset to the right side using the substantially rectangular enlarged area on the lower right side of the game area, and the second variable With regard to the winning device 650, by providing the second out port 72 in addition to the first out port 71, it is possible to lower the position downward without considering the space below for the balls to flow down. it can. This makes it possible to secure a wider space for disposing the rotational operation unit 300, thereby solving the contradictory problem of increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81 and increasing the size of the rotational operation unit 300. As a result, the rendering effect of both the rendering effect by the third symbol display device 81 and the rendering effect by the rotation operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

  Here, the rotation operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape that can rotate around the first winning opening 64. Thus, the entire periphery surrounding the first winning opening 64 can be made an area for effect. That is, the player can visually recognize the effect by the rotation operation unit 300 on the back side of the first winning opening 64. Therefore, when the effect is started in response to the winning of the first winning opening 64, the effect is performed in the area centered on the first winning opening 64 where the ball enters, thereby the first winning opening 64. It is possible to enhance the effects of the effects associated with the winnings.

  Also, when the player starts to win a ball in the first winning opening 64 triggered by the state of the rotary operation unit 300 (for example, the rotational position and the lighting state) becoming a predetermined state, The game ball can be made to enter toward the center of the target (the rotating operation unit 300 in the predetermined state) which the player is visually recognizing, and the effect of the effect by the rotating operation unit 300 can be enhanced. .

  Furthermore, as the rotary operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape in this way, the space around the rotary operation unit 300 can be effectively utilized, and the arrangement space for other winning openings etc. is made efficient. Can be secured. In particular, the installation space of the second variable winning device 650 can be secured efficiently. That is, since the first variable winning device 65 can be offset to the right with respect to the first winning opening 64 using the substantially rectangular enlarged area on the lower right side of the game area, the offset amount to the right is While it is relatively easy to secure, it is difficult for the second variable winning device 650 to secure a sufficient amount of offset to the left with respect to the first winning opening 64 because the inner rail 61 is curved in an arc shape. Become. In this case, since the rotary operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape, a space for disposing the second variable winning device 650 is provided between the inner rail 61 and the lower left side of the rotary operation unit 300. Can be secured.

  Further, since the rotary operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape centering on the first winning opening 64, the rotary operation unit 300 may be disposed substantially at the center in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 5) of the game area. it can. That is, the center of the rotational operation unit 300 can be arranged on an imaginary line where the distance between the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 and the inner rail 61 (the distance in the vertical direction in FIG. 5) is maximum. Therefore, since the limited space of the game area can be effectively utilized while the third symbol display device 81 is enlarged, the space for disposing the rotational operation unit 300 is secured more widely, and the rotational operation is performed. The enlargement of the unit 300 can also be performed efficiently.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the second winning opening 640 is not directly below the first winning opening 64, but in the width direction other side of the first winning opening 64 (on the side of the first variable winning device 65 , And the right side of FIG. 5). In this case, the second winning opening 640 is disposed such that the opening 641 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area (the first variable winning device 65 side, the right side in FIG. 5). As a result, it is unnecessary to provide a space above the second winning opening 640 for letting the ball flow down for winning to the second winning opening 640, and the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 for that amount. Can be lowered downwards. As a result, upsizing of the third symbol display device 81 can be achieved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the second specified winning opening 650 a is not directly below the first winning opening 64 but one side in the width direction of the gaming area with respect to the first winning opening 64 (first variable winning Opposite the device 65, it is arranged offset to the left in FIG. In this case, the second specified winning opening 650a is disposed with its opening 651 facing the other side in the width direction of the game area (the first variable winning device 65 side, the right side in FIG. 5). As a result, it is unnecessary to provide a space for letting the ball flow down for winning the second specified winning opening 650a above the second specified winning opening 650a, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 Position can be lowered. As a result, upsizing of the third symbol display device 81 can be achieved.

  That is, when the opening 641 of the second winning opening 640 and the opening 651 of the second specific winning opening 650a are disposed in a posture facing the upper side (the upper side in FIG. 5) of the game area, the space for letting the ball flow It is necessary to secure right above the openings 641 and 651, and accordingly, it is necessary to raise the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement of the third symbol display device 81 is inhibited. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, when the openings 641 and 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area, the space for flowing down the ball is obliquely above the openings 641 and 651 (FIG. 5 upper right side) The position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered downward accordingly. As a result, upsizing of the third symbol display device 81 can be achieved.

  As described above, when the openings 641 and 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area, the electric combination products 640 a and 650 b are not directly above the second winning opening 640 and the second specific winning opening 650 a but the second It can arrange | position to the side of the prize-winning opening 640 and the 2nd specific prize-winning opening 650a. That is, it is not necessary to secure the arrangement space of the electrically operated part 640a, 650b just above the second winning opening 640 and the second specified winning opening 650a, and the lower position of the third symbol display 81 is lowered accordingly Can be lowered to As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be further enlarged.

  Further, by facing the other side in the width direction of the game area, the openings 641 and 651 do not need to be provided with a pair of motorized parts 640a and 650b for opening and closing the openings 641 and 651, and only one side is provided. be able to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the cost of parts by miniaturizing the capacity required for the drive means (for example, a solenoid) for driving the motorized product 640a, 650b. At the same time, energy consumption can be reduced.

  Further, the opening 641 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area, so that it is possible to prevent the degree of difficulty in winning the second winning opening 640 from being excessively reduced. That is, in the present embodiment, since the lower edge position of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered, the arrangement space for the winning opening and the like is limited, and the arrangement positions of the second winning opening 640 and the through gate 67 The distance becomes narrower. Therefore, in comparison with a conventional pachinko machine in which the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged in series in the vertical direction, the degree of difficulty in entering the second winning opening 640 is There is a risk that the game performance may be impaired. Therefore, by forming the opening 641 so as to face the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to prevent the ball from winning from directly above the second winning opening 640, and the electric role object 640a is in the open state. The second winning opening 640 can be made to be able to win. As a result, it is possible to prevent the degree of difficulty of winning to the second winning opening 640 from being lowered, and to improve the playability.

  In addition, even if the distance from the opening 651 of the second specified winning opening 650a to the second specified winning opening 650a (dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 5) is increased by the opening 651 facing the width direction other side of the game area, It does not affect the distance between the third symbol display device 81 and the second specified winning opening 650a. Therefore, arranging the sensor apparatus 652 which detects winning of a ball to the 2nd specified winning opening 650a between opening 651 and the 2nd specified winning opening 650a, aiming at enlargement of the 3rd symbol display 81 Can. As a result, it is possible to speed up the detection speed that the ball has won in the second specified winning opening 650a, so it is possible to enhance the player's sense of excitement accompanying the winning.

  In addition to this, it is possible to prevent an over winning on the second specified winning hole 650a. That is, when the second specified winning opening 650a is configured to be closed when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in the second specified winning opening 650a being opened, the tenth one It is desirable that the driving part 650b be closed as soon as the ball wins. However, when the sensor device 652 is disposed behind the base plate 60, the distance from the opening 651 to the sensor device 652 is large.

  Therefore, the period from the tenth ball passing through the opening 651 to reaching the sensor device 652, that is, the period in which the drive part 650b is in the open state becomes longer, and the 11th and subsequent balls from the opening 651 A state in which the second specified winning opening 650a can be won is formed for a long time, and there is a possibility that the game may not be fair.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, the sensor device 652 for detecting the winning of the ball to the second specified winning opening 650a is between the opening 651 and the second specified winning opening 650a. Because the sensor device 652 detects a sphere that has passed through the opening 651, the time taken to detect the ball can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a ball after the 11th ball to be able to win from the opening 651, and to prevent over winning.

  Here, in the gaming board 13 of the present embodiment, the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a are arranged offset to the left and right (the other side and one side) of the gaming board 13, respectively By doing this, the player is made to make a left / right separation, which contributes to the improvement of the gameplay.

  That is, in the gaming board 13 of the present embodiment, it is easier to win the first specified winning opening 65a if it passes the right of the variable display unit 80, while the second specified winning opening 650a is the variable display It is an arrangement where it is easier to win if it passes the left side of the unit 80. Which specific winning opening is to be opened is determined by the stop symbol of the jackpot at that time, and the player strikes left and right in order to aim at the specific winning opening on the opening side.

  Since it is possible to set which specific winning opening is opened in the number of rounds for each stop symbol of the jackpot, only the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened each time. On the other hand, the first specified winning combination opening 65a and the second specified winning combination opening 650a may be alternately opened every number of times (round).

  Therefore, it is necessary for the player to check the game board 13 because it is necessary for the player to check which specific winning opening is to be opened in rounds and to aim at the specific winning opening to be opened. Not only the other side but also one side has the effect of making you pay attention. That is, it prevents the situation where the player pays attention only to one side or the other side of the game board 13, and creates a situation where the rotary operation unit 300 arranged behind the first winning opening 64 comes into view. Thus, the rotary operation unit 300 can be focused on, and the rendering effect thereof can be improved.

  Also, by making the judgment to make the right and the left be different for each number of rounds (round), it is possible to prevent the player from being bored, and by making the player make the right and the left, in the same posture. It is possible to alleviate the feeling of fatigue caused by playing a game.

  Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 13. First, the accommodation structure of each unit 300 to 800 in the rear case 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9.

  FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 7 to 9 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 in which the disassembled operation unit 200 is viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 8 illustrates the rocking operation unit 800, the annular operation unit 700, and the first combined operation unit 500 mounted on the back case 210, and FIG. 9 additionally to the mounting state illustrated in FIG. Furthermore, a state in which the second combined operation unit 600 and the combined operation unit 400 are attached to the back case 210 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 to 9, one side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 7) of the operation unit 200 is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A rear case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 211 a at the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The operation unit 200 includes the rotary operation unit 300, the combined operation unit 400, the first combined operation unit 500, the second combined operation unit 600, the annular operation unit 700, and the oscillating operation unit 800 in the inner space of the back case 210. It is housed and configured as one unit.

  Specifically, at a position where the first combined operation unit 500 is above the opening 211a, at a position where the annular operation unit 700 is below the opening 211a, the swing operation unit 800 is at the left and right of the opening 211a. , And the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 8).

  With respect to the state shown in FIG. 8, the second combined operation unit 600 is disposed on the front side of the annular operation unit 700 and the combined operation unit 500 is disposed on the front side of the swing operation unit 800 in a stacked state. And housed in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 9). With respect to the state shown in FIG. 9, the rotational operation unit 300 is disposed in a stacked state in which the front surface side of the second combined operation unit 600 is stacked, and is accommodated in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 6).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second combined operation unit 600) is disposed in a stacked state in which another operation unit (for example, the rotation operation unit 300) is overlapped on the front side. As a result, in front view, at least a part of a predetermined operation unit (for example, the front case body 612 of the second combined operation unit 600, see FIG. 42) can be shielded by another operation unit.

  In other words, when the game board 13 is formed of a light transmissive material, and the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13 can be viewed by the player, only the necessary part of the predetermined operation unit is Can be made visible to the player, and other parts can be shielded from the player by other operation units. As a result, it is not necessary to design a predetermined effect member shielded by another operation unit on the premise that the whole is viewed by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10 to FIG. 13, an outline of an operation aspect of each unit 300 to 800 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 10 to 13, FIGS. 6 to 9 will be referred to as appropriate.

  10 to 13 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. In FIG. 10, the state in which the ring forming member 790 of the ring operation unit 700 is disposed at the coupling position, and in FIG. 11, the state in which the arm member 820 of the rocking operation unit 800 is disposed at the projecting position. 12, the first engagement member 539 of the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined member 630 of the second combined operation unit 600 are arranged in the coupled position in FIG. The state where 492 is arranged at the overhanging position is illustrated respectively.

  The annular operation unit 700 includes a pair of annular forming members 790, and operates (displaces) the pair of annular forming members 790 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 8 and the coupled position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of ring forming members 790 are retracted to the back side of the rotary operation unit 300 while being distributed to the left and right, and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the coupled position shown in FIG. 10, the pair of annular forming members 790 are disposed at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the front surface of the third symbol display device 81) The annular forming member 790 forms an annular shape).

  The rocking operation unit 800 includes a pair of arm members 820 formed swingably (rotatable), and between the pair of arm members 820 shown in FIG. 8 between the retracted position shown in FIG. Operate (displace) with. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of arm members 820 are retracted to the back side of the combined operation unit 400, and are not visible to the player (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 11, the pair of arm members 820 project their tips into the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front surface of the third symbol display device 81).

  The first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 respectively include a first engagement member 539 and a pair of second coupling members 630, and the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are shown in the figure. Operation (displacement) is performed between the retracted position shown in 9 and the coupled position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 9, the first engagement member 539 is retracted to the back side of the combined operation unit 400, and the second coupling member 630 is retracted to the back side of the combined operation unit 400, each viewed by the player It is considered impossible (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the coupling position shown in FIG. 12, the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are disposed at the center of the opening 211 a of the back case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81) It is combined with each other.

  The combined operation unit 400 includes four members (operating members 491 and 492) formed so as to be able to swing (rotate), and the four members (operating members 491 and 492) are shown in the retracted position shown in FIG. And (displacement) between the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 9, the four members (operating members 491, 492) are retracted to the side of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the third symbol display device 81), and each pair is It is arranged in a posture aligned linearly along the up and down direction. On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 13, the four members (operating members 491, 492) have their tips extended out into the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81). , And in a posture extending linearly from the center of the opening 211a.

  The rotary operation unit 300 includes a rotary member 330 that is rotatably formed, and rotates the rotary member 330. As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the rotation member 330 of the rotation operation unit 300 is rotated at a fixed position, and the operation members 491 and 492 of the combined operation unit 400 are at the extended or retracted position. Since it is arranged at the forefront at any position, it is always visible to the player via the game board 13 (see FIG. 2).

  Each of the operation units 300 to 800 is formed to be independently operable, and as described above, is disposed in a superimposed (stacked) state, and therefore, among the operation units 300 to 800, It is possible to operate at the same time what is arranged by different layers of. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 10 to FIG. 13, not only the respective operation units 300 to 800 can be operated alone but also these operations can be combined, so that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  The rotational operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. FIG. 14 is a front perspective view of the rotary operation unit 300, and FIG. 15 is a rear view of the rotary operation unit 300.

  As described above, the rotary operation unit 300 is disposed at a position (overlapping position in front view) corresponding to the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2 or 5) on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60). It is an effect member to be installed, and the reception port 361 is opened at the center of the front, and the ball winning the first prize port 64 is received from the reception port 361 and guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) Do.

  On the front side of the rotary operation unit 300, a rotary member 330 in a front view annular shape and a decorative member 370 which is a resin member for decoration are disposed, and in a substantially central portion of the rotary member 330, an inlet 361 (Fixing member 360) is arranged. The rotating member 330 is rotatably formed of a light transmitting resin material, and transmits the lighting and blinking of the LED disposed on the back side to the front side, and at the same time, the first prize winning A predetermined effect is performed around the mouth 64 (see FIG. 2 or 5).

  16 and 17 are exploded front perspective views of the rotational operation unit 300 in which the rotational operation unit 300 disassembled is viewed from the front. In addition, in FIG. 16, the state which decomposed | disassembled only the rotation member 330 is shown in figure. Further, in FIG. 17, the illustration of the decorative member 370 is omitted, and a part of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 is partially cross-sectionally viewed.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the rotational operation unit 300 includes a case body 310 having a skeleton on the rearmost side, a decorative base 320 fixed to the case body 310, and a front face of the decorative base 320. And a plurality of gears (a first gear 351, a second gear 352 and a third gear 353) for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 340 to the rotating member 330, and A fixing member 360 for fixing the first gear 351 of the plurality of gears to the case body 310 and a decoration member 370 disposed around the case body 310 are mainly provided.

  The case body 310 has an electric decoration base attachment portion 311 formed in a substantially annular shape in a front view substantially corresponding to the electric decoration base 320, and a gear attachment portion formed receding to the back side with respect to the electric decoration base attachment portion 311 Main components are the mounting base 312 and the mounting base 313 extended outward from the outer edge of the gear mounting portion 312, which are integrally formed of a resin material.

  The electric decoration base 320 is fastened to the electric decoration base attachment portion 311 on the front side and the decoration member 370 is fixed on the outer circumference side by the fastening screws. The gear attachment portion 312 is formed by connecting three concave portions in a substantially circular shape in a front view substantially in a concave shape corresponding to the outer shapes of the first gear 351 to the third gear 353, respectively. The third gear 353 is housed (arranged) from the first to the third gear 353.

  An opening 311 a is formed on the inner peripheral side of the electric decoration base attachment portion 311 above the portion of the gear attachment portion 312 in which the first gear 351 is accommodated. By forming the opening 311a in the case body 310, the first gear 351 (fastening seat portion 351d) is rotated on the first gear 351 (fastening seat portion 351d) from the back side of the case body 310 via the opening 311a. Can be fastened and fixed. Therefore, it can avoid that a fastening screw is exposed to the front side of rotation member 330, and can aim at the improvement of the appearance.

  In the gear attachment portion 312, a passage port 314, a to-be-fastened portion 315, an insertion portion 316, and a guide convex portion 317 are respectively formed in a recess in which the first gear 351 is accommodated. The passage port 314 is a passage in communication with the receiving port 361 of the fixing member 360, and guides the ball flowing from the receiving port 361 of the fixing member 360 to the guide path 380 formed on the back side of the case body 310.

  In addition, the guide passage 380 is formed as a passage through which a ball can pass between the mounted member and the back surface of the case body 310 by mounting a member having a U-shaped cross section on the back surface of the case body 310. (See FIG. 15). The guide passage 380 is in communication with the passage port 314 at the back of the case body 310 and extends downward.

  An insertion hole is bored in the mounting base 313, and the rotation operation unit 300 performs the second coupling by fastening the fastening screw inserted in the insertion hole to the front case body 612 of the second coupling operation unit 600. It is fastened and fixed to the back case 210 via the operation unit 600 (see FIGS. 9 and 42).

  The to-be-fastened portion 315 is a portion to which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the fixing member 360 to the gear mounting portion 312 is fastened (a recessed portion in which a female screw is engraved on the inner periphery) A pair is formed at an asymmetric position (see FIG. 18). The insertion portion 315 is for inserting a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the gear attachment portion 312 (case body 310) to the front case body 612 (see FIGS. 9 and 42) of the second coupling operation unit 600 on the back side. A through hole is formed above the passage opening 314.

  The guide convex portion 317 is a rail-shaped portion for guiding (guiding) the rotation of the first gear 351 and is provided to protrude from the front of the gear attachment portion 312 as an annular convex portion in a front view. An annular guide recess 351e corresponding to the guide portion 317 is recessed on the back of the first gear 351 (see FIG. 19), and the guide protrusion 317 is fitted into the guide recess 351e. The rotational position of the first gear 351 with respect to the gear attachment portion 312 is defined.

  Here, the gear attachment portion 312 is disposed at a position (eccentric position) in which the passage opening 314 is shifted downward from the center in a circular area in a front view formed by being surrounded by the guide convex portion 317. The to-be-fastened portions 315 are disposed on the left and right sides of the passage opening 314, and the insertion portion 316 is disposed above the passage opening 314. Thereby, as described later, the rigidity of the case body 310 and the fixing member 360 can be ensured while efficiently securing a space for fastening and fixing in a limited space.

  In the gear attachment portion 312, a shaft portion 318 is provided so as to protrude from a recess in which the second gear 352 is housed. The shaft portion 318 is a shaft for supporting the second gear 352, and is inserted into a shaft hole 352a formed at the center of the second gear 352. In the present embodiment, it is possible to omit providing the second gear 352 with a retainer at the tip end of the shaft portion 318 inserted into the shaft hole 352 a of the second gear 352. Details will be described later.

  A drive motor 340 is disposed on the rear surface of the gear attachment portion 312 at a position corresponding to the recess in which the third gear 353 is accommodated. The drive motor 340 is disposed in a state in which the drive shaft 340a is projected to the front of the gear attachment portion 312 (within the recess in which the third gear 353 is accommodated), and the third gear 353 is fixed to the drive shaft 340a. Ru.

  The electric decoration base 320 is formed in an annular shape in a front view and has a substrate portion 321 on which a plurality of LEDs 321a are mounted, and is disposed in front of the substrate portion 321 and has a plurality of front surfaces of the substrate portion 321. And the division part 322 which divides into an area | region.

  In detail, the partition part 322 is provided with a predetermined distance between the two ribs 322a and 322b and the inner rib 322a and the outer rib 322b in a front view annular shape extended along the inner edge and the outer edge of the substrate part 321. A front view annular intermediate rib 322c formed concentrically and a plurality of radial ribs 322d radially extended outward from the center of each of the ribs 322a to 322c intersect in a grid shape Will be arranged. The plurality of radial ribs 322 d are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (at approximately 30 degrees intervals in the present embodiment).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a total of 24 areas of 12 pieces on the inner peripheral side and 12 pieces on the outer peripheral side are divided by the dividing portion 322 in the electric decorative base 320, and the divided areas are respectively divided One or two LEDs 321 a are disposed. Thereby, when making each LED 321a individually light or blink individually, the difference between light and dark can be increased between the region related to the lighting or blinking and the region not related to the region, and as a result, the rendering effect is enhanced. be able to.

  The rotary member 330 includes a rotary main body 331 having an annular opening in the center and a cylindrical outer wall 332 axially extending from the outer edge of the rotary main body 331, which are transparent to light. Are integrally formed from a flexible resin material. The inner diameter of the opening formed at the center of the rotating body 331 corresponds to the outer diameter of the fixing member 360, and in the assembled state, the fixing member 360 is accommodated in the opening of the rotating body 331 (see FIG. 14).

  To-be-fastened portions 333 are formed at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) on the back surface of the rotating main body 331. The to-be-fastened portion 333 is a portion (a recess in which an internal thread is engraved on the inner periphery) to which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the rotating body 331 (rotating member 330) to the first gear 351 is engaged. It is a position which becomes the same distance from the center of 331, respectively, and is arranged at a position where it is not equally spaced in the circumferential direction.

  A plurality of annular protrusions 331a to 331e which are formed in an annular shape in a front view and concentrically arranged on the front surface of the rotating main body 331, and radiate outward in the radial direction from the centers of the annular protrusions 331a to 331e A plurality of radiation protrusions 331f extending linearly are provided in a protruding manner. The plurality of radiation protrusions 331 f are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (at approximately 30 degrees intervals in the present embodiment). That is, in the present embodiment, the circumferential interval of the radiation protrusion 331 f is equal to the circumferential interval of the radiation rib 322 d of the electric decoration base 320.

  The rotating main body 331 is formed to have a uniform thickness (thickness dimension) throughout, and in a portion where the annular protruding portions 331a to 331e or the radiation protruding portion 331f are provided, the thickness is provided for the protruding portion ( The thickness dimension is made thicker (larger). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to transmit light in the portions where the respective protrusions 331 a to 331 f are provided in a protruding manner.

  In this case, in the assembled state of the rotational operation unit 300, the outer edge rib 322b of the partitioning member 322 is at the position corresponding to the annular projection 331e located at the outermost side in the radial direction (position overlapping in front view) Next, the intermediate rib 322c of the partitioning member 322 is disposed at a position located radially outward next to the annular projection 331d and the annular projection 331c at a corresponding position (overlapping position in front view) .

  As described above, in the rotation member 330, the regions corresponding to the regions divided by the division member 322 of the electric decoration base 320 are divided by the protrusions 331a to 331f, and thus the respective LEDs 321a of the electric decoration base 320 When lighting or blinking each individually, it is possible to increase the difference between light and dark between the area related to the lighting and blinking and the area not related to the lighting and as a result, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  In the rotation member 330, as described above, the division of the area is achieved by projecting the annular protrusions 331a to 331e and the radiation protrusion 331f from the front to increase the thickness dimension. As a result, for example, there is no need to print for partitioning the area in the front of the rotation member 330 or to arrange a separate member, and the entire rotation member 330 can be formed in a single color, thereby reducing product cost. Not only that, you can enhance the effect of the effect.

  The inner diameter of the outer wall portion 332 of the rotating member 330 is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the partitioning member 322 (outer edge rib 322 b) of the electric decoration base 320. It is set as the structure by which the division member 322 of the electrical decoration base 320 is internally fitted by the circumferential side. Thereby, it can suppress that the light of LED321a leaks from the outer peripheral side of the division member 322, and can perform irradiation of the light to a front side efficiently. In addition, when the rotating member 330 is fastened and fixed to the first gear 351, the partitioning member 322 is internally fitted to the outer wall portion 332, so that the inner fitting state allows the both to be centered. It can be rotated relative to each other. That is, only by relatively rotating the two, it is possible to align the respective to-be-fastened portions 333 of the rotary member 330 with the respective fastening seats 351 d (insertion holes) of the first gear 351 and adjust the radial position. Since it is not necessary to do it, the improvement of workability can be aimed at that much.

  The first gear 351 has an opening at the center and has an annular first main body 351a in which the fixing member 360 can be inserted in the opening, and teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a 351b, a first flange portion 351c projecting like a flange from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a at a position closer to the front side (the rotating member 330 side) of the first gear 351 than its teeth 351b, and its third flange portion A plurality of (three in the present embodiment) fastening seats 351 d protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351 a at a position closer to the front side (rotation member 330 side) of the first gear 351 than 351 c, and the first main body 351 a And a guide recess 351e (see FIG. 19) into which the guide convex portion 317 of the gear attachment portion 312 is inserted and which is fixed to the rear surface side of the gear attachment portion 312. In, rotatably held between its fixing member 360 and the gear attachment portion 312.

  The first gear 351 is formed by projecting the first flange portion 351c from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a, so the rigidity of the first gear 351 can be enhanced by the first flange portion 351c. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first flange portion 351c is provided continuously with the axial end surface of the tooth 351b, the rigidity of the tooth 351b can be enhanced. As a result, with the meshing state between the second gear 352 and the second gear 352 being appropriate, the transmission efficiency can be improved, and the durability of the teeth 351 b and 352 b can be improved. Further, as will be described later, the first flange portion 351c also serves to prevent the second gear 352 from coming off, so parts for preventing the second gear 352 can be omitted, and parts cost can be reduced.

  The fastening seat portion 351 d is a portion fastened and fixed to the to-be-fastened portion 333 of the rotating main body 331 (rotating member 330), and is disposed at a position corresponding to each to-be-fastened portion 333 of the rotating main body 331. That is, in each fastening seat portion 351d, an insertion hole for inserting a fastening screw to be fastened to the fastened portion 333 is bored, and the insertion holes are the same distance from the center of the first gear 351 respectively. It is a position, and is arrange | positioned by the position which becomes irregularly spaced in the circumferential direction. Therefore, since the first gear 351 and the rotating member 330 can be fastened and fixed only at the phase position of 1, when assembling the rotating member 330 to the first gear 351, the operator makes a mistake in the circumferential position thereof. Assembly can be avoided.

  In order to enable fastening and fixing of the first gear 351 and the rotating member 330 only at the phase position of 1, the insertion holes of the respective fastening seats 351 are necessarily at the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. It does not have to be arranged. The insertion holes of the respective fastening seats 351 may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction and at different positions from the center of the rotating body 331.

  However, as in the present embodiment, it is preferable to dispose the insertion holes of the fastening seats 351 at the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. That is, since the length dimensions (extension length) of the respective fastening seats 351 d can be made the same, when the first gear 351 is injection-molded from a resin material, the formability can be improved. is there.

  Here, in order to fasten and fix the fastening screw from the back side of the case body 310 to the to-be-fastened portion 333 of the rotating member 330 through the insertion hole of the fastening seat 351d, the opening 311a needs to be formed in the case body 310 There is. In this case, when the insertion holes of the fastening members 351 are arranged at different distances from the center of the first gear 351, the movement loci of the insertion holes are different, and the opening width of the opening 311a is increased accordingly Therefore, according to the present embodiment, since the movement loci of the respective insertion holes can be made the same, the width of the opening 311a can be minimized.

  The second gear 352 includes a second main body 352a having a circular shape in a front view, teeth 352b engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second main body 352a, and an axial hole 352c drilled at the center of the second main body 352a. In addition, the shaft portion 318 of the gear attachment portion 312 is inserted into the shaft hole 352c, so that the gear attachment portion 312 is rotatably held in a state of being meshed with the first gear 351.

  The third gear 353 has a third main body 353a circular in a front view, teeth 353b engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a, and a front side of the third gear 353 than the teeth 353b (a rotating member 330 And a third flange portion 353c projecting like a flange from the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a at the position where the drive motor 340 is fixed to the third main body 353a. It is held by the drive shaft 340 a of the drive motor 340 in a state of being meshed with the double gear 352.

  Therefore, when the drive motor 340 is rotationally driven and the third gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 352 and the second gear 352 is rotated, and the rotation of the second gear 352 is The first gear 351 is rotated by being transmitted to the first gear 351. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 340 is transmitted to the rotating member 330 fastened and fixed to the first gear 351 via the fastening seat 351 d and the fastened portion 333, and the rotating member 330 is rotated.

  As in the case of the first gear 351, the third gear 353 is formed by projecting the third flange portion 353c from the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a, and the third gear 353 is thus formed by the third flange portion 353c. Can increase the rigidity of the In particular, in the present embodiment, since the third flange portion 353c is provided continuously with the axial end face of the tooth 353b, the rigidity of the tooth 353b can be enhanced. As a result, with the meshing state between the second gear 352 and the second gear 352 being appropriate, the transmission efficiency can be improved, and the durability of the teeth 353 b and 352 b can be improved. Further, as described later, since the third flange portion 353c also serves to prevent the second gear 352 from coming off, parts for preventing the disconnection can be omitted to reduce the cost of parts.

  The fixing member 360 is a cylindrical member for fixing the first gear 351 to the gear attachment portion 312, and includes a receiving port 361 and an insertion portion 362. The reception port 361 is a passage communicated with the first winning opening 64 in a state of being attached to the game board 13, and guides the ball flowing from the first winning port 64 to the passage opening 314 of the gear attachment portion 312. The insertion portion 362 is a through hole for inserting a fastening screw for fastening or inserting the fixing member 360 into the to-be-fastened portion 315 or the insertion portion 316 of the gear attachment portion 312.

  18 (a) is a front view of the case body 310, and FIG. 18 (b) is a front view of the fixing member 360. 18 (a), a state in which the first gear 351, the second gear 352 and the third gear 353 are disposed on the case body 310 is shown, and one of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 is shown. The part is partially seen in cross section.

  As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the passage opening 314 formed in the gear attachment portion 312 of the case body 310 is located below the center of the first gear 351 as described above (FIG. a) The lower side is disposed offset (eccentrically). Therefore, in the annular region formed around the passage opening 314, the gear mounting portion 312 has an upper width dimension (vertical dimension in FIG. 18A) of the passage opening 314 compared to a lower width dimension. Be broadened.

  Similarly, for the fixing member 360 inserted into the inner peripheral side of the first gear 351 and fastened and fixed to the gear attachment portion 312, the receiving port 361 formed in the fixing member 360 is downward from the center of the fixing member 360 In FIG. 18 (b) (downside), they are disposed out of position (eccentrically). Therefore, in the annular region formed around the receiving port 361, the fixing member 360 has a wider width dimension above the receiving port 361 (vertical dimension in FIG. 18B) than that of the lower width dimension. Be done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the passage opening 314 and the reception opening 361 are displaced (decentered), and a wide (increased width) portion is formed in a part of the periphery (annular area) thereof. Since the insertion portions 316 and 362 are respectively disposed (pierced) in the widened portions, a large diameter hole can be drilled by effectively utilizing the limited space, and even in such a case, the case body 310 The rigidity of the fixing member 360 can be secured.

  That is, the insertion portions 316 and 362 are formed as holes through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the rotational operation unit 300 to the front case body 612 (see FIG. 9 or 42) of the second coupling operation unit 600 can be inserted. As it is a part and a large diameter fastening screw is inserted because the weight to be supported is increased, it needs to be formed as a relatively large diameter hole. By forming the enlarged portion, it is possible to efficiently secure a space for drilling a large diameter hole by using the portion. On the other hand, even when a hole of such a large diameter is drilled, the hole can be drilled in the partially widened region, so that the rigidity can be secured.

  FIG. 19 is a schematic view schematically showing a support structure of the first gear 351, the second gear 352 and the third gear 353 by the case body 310, corresponding to the arrow XIX direction view of FIG. In FIG. 19, the case body 310 is viewed in cross section, and a part of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 is viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first gear 351 is rotatably supported by the gear attachment portion 312 by the guide convex portion 317 of the gear attachment portion 312 being fitted into the guide recess 351 e provided on the back side. Ru. Further, the first gear 351 is restricted from falling off in the axial direction (upper side in FIG. 19) from the gear attachment portion 312 by the fixing member 360 fastened and fixed to the gear attachment portion 312. On the other hand, the third gear 353 is fixed to the drive shaft 340 a of the drive motor 340. In addition, as a fixing method, for example, a method by pressing or an adhesive is exemplified.

  The second gear 352 has its teeth 352 b formed by the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 by inserting the shaft portion 318 of the gear attachment portion 312 into the shaft hole 352 c drilled in the second main body 352 a. , 353b, it is rotatably supported by the gear mounting portion 312.

  In this case, as described above, the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 have the first flange 351c and the third flange protruding radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a and the third main body 353a. The portions 353 c are respectively formed, and the first flange portion 351 c and the third flange portion 353 c are extended to a position overlapping the end face in the axial direction of the second gear 352. Thereby, it is possible to restrict the second gear 352 from coming out of the shaft portion 318 of the gear attachment portion 312 in the axial direction (upper side in FIG. 19). As a result, since it is not necessary to dispose the retaining part at the tip of the shaft portion 318, the number of parts can be reduced and the part cost can be reduced. Further, at the time of assembly, the second gear 352 only needs to insert the shaft portion 318 of the gear attachment portion 312 into the shaft hole 352c, and the process of attaching the retaining parts can be omitted. It can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, since the first flange portion 351c of the first gear 351 and the third flange portion 353c of the third gear 353 abut on the second gear 352 at two different points, the second gear 352 is in the axial direction. Not only can it be restricted reliably that the second gear 352 can be rotated while being inclined with respect to the shaft portion 318. As a result, the meshing state between the teeth 352b of the second gear 352 and the teeth 351b and 353b of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 can be made appropriate to improve the transmission efficiency and the durability. In particular, since the two places in contact with the second gear 352 are set at positions where the phases are different by about 180 degrees, the above-described effect can be more remarkably exhibited. The two phases are preferably set in the range of about 160 degrees to about 180 degrees.

  Here, it is sufficient if the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 are projected to the peak side more than the valleys of the teeth 351b and the teeth 353b. This is because if it protrudes beyond the valleys of the teeth 351 b and the teeth 353, it can contact the end face on the crest side of the teeth 352 b of the second gear 352. Further, it is possible to reduce the weight and material cost by suppressing the material required for forming the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c. However, it is preferable that the first flange portion 351 c and the third flange portion 353 c extend further outward in the radial direction than the crests of the teeth 351 b and the teeth 353. This is because the inclination of the second gear 352 can be suppressed more reliably.

  Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 30.

  The composite operation unit 400 includes four members (operation members 491 and 492) as described above (see FIGS. 7 and 13), and operates (displaces) the respective members (operation members 491 and 492). It consists of 4 units. That is, in the front view of the rear case 210, the combined operation unit 400 includes two units aligned along the vertical direction on the left side of the opening 211a, and 2 aligned along the vertical direction on the right side of the opening 211a. It consists of two units. In this case, the structure (technical idea) for operating (displacement) each member (operating members 491, 492) is the same in each of the four units. Therefore, in the following, one unit of these four units (A unit disposed on the upper right side of the opening 211a, see FIGS. 7 and 13) will be described as a combined operation unit 400.

  FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of combined operation unit 400. As shown in FIG. 20, in the compound operation unit 400, operation members 491, 492 are disposed on the front side of the mounting base 410, and the operation members 491, 492 perform opening / closing operation and rotation operation in a combined manner (FIG. 20). 27). That is, the operation members 491 and 492 are opposed to each other in a posture in which the longitudinal directions of the operation members are parallel to each other, and an operation (opening and closing operation) for enlarging and reducing the opposing distance An operation of rotating around the center (rotational operation) is formed to be executable. In addition, on the front surface of the mounting base 410, a decoration member 411 formed as a decoration is disposed.

  In the present embodiment, two operation modes (opening and closing operation and rotation operation) of the operation members 491, 492 are formed so as to be executable by one drive motor 430. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide the drive motor 430 for the two types of operation modes, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. The detailed configuration of such a structure will be described with reference to FIG. 21 to FIG.

  FIG. 21 is an exploded front perspective view of the compound operation unit 400 in which the compound operation unit 400 disassembled is viewed in front. FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the combined operation unit 400 in a state where a part of the combined operation unit 400 is disassembled, and the configuration illustrated on the left side of FIG. The configuration is viewed from the back. In addition, in FIG.21 and FIG.22, while illustration of the decoration member 411 is abbreviate | omitted, illustration of the attachment base 410 is abbreviate | omitted in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the combined operation unit 400 includes a mounting base 410 disposed on the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), a holding case 420 attached to the mounting base 410, and a holding case 420 thereof. And a drive motor 430 for generating a driving force for rotationally driving the plurality of gears, and a rear arm whose proximal end is rotatably supported at the holding case 420 A slide rack member 481, a first pinion leg member 482 and a second pinion leg member 483 which are mounted between the body 471 and the front arm body 472 and the opposing surfaces of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472; Mainly, operating members 491, 492 connected to the tips of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are provided.

  The holding case 420 includes a back case body 421 attached to the mounting base 410 and a front case body 422 oppositely disposed on the front side of the back case body 421, and the back case body 421 and the front case body 422 A plurality of gears are rotatably supported and accommodated in an internal space formed between the facings.

  In the holding case 420, the drive motor 430 is disposed on the back side of the back case body 421, and between the opposing faces of the back case body 421 and the front case body 422, three rotating shafts (a reduction shaft 425; The 1st shaft 426 and the 2nd shaft 427) are constructed in parallel with the drive shaft of the drive motor 430, and a plurality of gears are rotatably supported on the 2nd shaft 427 from these reduction shafts 425. A pinion gear 431 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 430.

  The plurality of gears are rotatably supported by a reduction gear 441 supported by a reduction shaft 425, a first opening / closing gear 451 and a first rotation gear 461 supported by a first shaft 426, and an opening / closing supported by a second shaft 427. The second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are provided (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The reduction gear 441 includes a large diameter gear 441a and a small diameter gear 441b coaxially integrally formed with the large diameter gear 441a, and transmits it to the open / close first gear 451 while decelerating the rotation of the pinion gear 431. . Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the first gear 451, the second gear 452, the first gear 461, and the second gear 462 will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the open / close first gear 451, the open / close second gear 452, the rotating first gear 461, and the rotating second gear 462. FIG. The first opening / closing gear 451 is formed over the entire periphery of the main body 451a around the main body 451a, an insertion hole 451b formed through the main body 451a and through which the first shaft 426 is inserted, and the insertion hole 451b. The teeth 451c to be provided, a pair of connecting projections 451d which are projected from the axial end face (front face) of the main body 451a and sandwich the insertion hole 451b, and are formed through the main body 451a laterally of the insertion hole 451b And a positioning hole 451e located.

  The rotating first gear 461 is a gear disposed on the front side of the opening / closing first gear 451 and pivotally supported by the opening / closing first gear 451 on the first shaft 426 (see FIGS. 21 and 22). And an insertion hole 461b formed through the main body 461a and through which the first shaft 426 is inserted, a tooth 461c engraved on a part of the outer periphery of the main body 461a around the insertion hole 461b, and a main body 451a And a detection portion 461e which is formed to project radially outward from the outer periphery of the main portion 451a and is detected by an optical sensor.

  The main body 461a of the rotating first gear 461 is a cylindrical surface (hereinafter referred to as “following”) in which the outer peripheral surface of the region excluding the region where the teeth 461c are formed (ie, the teeth 461c are not formed) is centered on the axis of the insertion hole 461b. It is formed as "cylindrical surface 461a1". The outer diameter of the cylindrical surface 461a1 (the distance from the axis of the insertion hole 461b) is smaller than the outer diameter of the tip circle of the tooth 461c and larger than the outer diameter of the bottom circle of the tooth 461c. Thus, as described later, it is possible to achieve both the improvement of the rigidity of the main body portion 461a of the first rotating gear 461 and the improvement of the rigidity of the non-formed surface 462a1 forming portion of the second rotating gear 462.

  Further, a pair of connection projections 451 d of the open / close first gear 451 are formed so as to be able to be fitted inside, respectively, in the pair of connection holes 461 d of the rotation first gear 461. The rotational position (phase) of the first gear 461 can be positioned, and both can be connected and integrally rotated in the same phase.

  The opening / closing second gear 452 is formed on the main body 452a, an insertion hole 452b formed through the main body 452a and through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and a part of the outer periphery of the main body 452a around the insertion hole 452b. A tooth 452c to be provided, a connecting projection 452d projecting from an axial end face (front face) of the main body 452a, and a positioning hole 452e are formed through the main body 452a.

  The open / close second gear 452 is disposed with the back arm 471 sandwiched between the back case body 421 (that is, on the front side of the back arm 471). The insertion hole 452 b is rotatably supported by a cylindrical portion provided along the hole 471 a (see FIGS. 21 and 22). The connecting projection 452d of the opening and closing second gear 452 is connected to the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481, and the rotation of the opening and closing second gear 452 is transmitted to the slide rack member 481 via this connection (see FIG. 26).

  The second rotating gear 462 is formed in the main body portion 462a, an insertion hole 462b formed through the main body portion 462a and the second shaft 427 being inserted, and a part of the outer periphery of the main body portion 462a around the insertion hole 462b. Teeth 462c, a pair of connecting projections 462d projecting from an axial end face (front) of the main body 462a and having a hole penetrating therethrough, and a positioning hole 462e penetrating the main body 452a Equipped with

  The outer peripheral surface (hereinafter referred to as "non-forming surface 462a1") of the region of the main portion 462a of the rotating second gear 462 is provided continuously on both sides of the tooth 462c and the teeth are not formed is the insertion hole 462b side It is formed as a curved surface which is concaved towards it (i.e. has a center of curvature radially outward). Specifically, the curvature of the non-forming surface 462a1 is set to the same curvature as the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 or a slightly smaller curvature (ie, a slightly larger radius).

  Further, the second rotating gear 462 is disposed on the front side (in the axial direction) of the opening and closing second gear 452, but in a state independent of the opening and closing second gear 452 (that is, in a different phase) It is pivotally supported by the second shaft 427 in a relatively rotatable state. Further, the rotating second gear 462 fastens the fastening screw inserted in the hole of the connecting protrusion 462d to the connecting protrusion 472e (see FIG. 22) of the front arm body 472 so that the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e are mutually connected. The two are linked. Therefore, the rotating second gear 462 and the front arm body 472 (and the back arm body 471) can be integrally rotated in the same phase through such connection.

  As described above, since the connecting projection 472 e (see FIG. 22) of the front arm body 472 is fastened and fixed to the connecting projection 462 d of the second rotating gear 462, both are connected via the connecting projections 462 d and 472 e. The rotating second gear 462 and the front arm body 472 can be formed as an integral structure by connecting at a plurality of places (two places in this embodiment). As a result, the rigidity of the rotating second gear 462 can be enhanced using the rigidity of the front arm body 472.

  Here, as described later, the rotating second gear 462 receives a reaction force from the rotating first gear 461 when the non-formed surface 462a1 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (see FIG. 28 to 30), it is necessary to secure rigidity to resist the reaction force. In this case, for example, if the thickness of the rotating second gear 462 is increased, the weight is increased, and if a highly rigid material is employed, the material cost is increased.

  On the other hand, according to the second rotating gear 462 of the present embodiment, the rigidity of the front arm body 472 can be utilized (that is, by being integrated with the front arm body 472) to increase its rigidity. There is no need to increase the thickness of the rotating second gear 462 or to adopt a high rigidity material. Thus, the durability of the second rotating gear 462 can be improved while reducing the weight and cost of the second rotating gear 462.

  In particular, the second rotating gear 462 has a connecting projection 462d on the back side of the non-forming surface 462a1 (that is, a position where the connecting protrusion 462d faces the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 with the non-forming surface 462a1 in the assembled state, 28 to 30), when the non-formed surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 as described later, the first rotating first gear The rigidity of the portion receiving the reaction force from the cylindrical surface 461a1 of 461 can be effectively enhanced by using the rigidity of the front case body 472 or the like or a metal fastening screw. As a result, it is possible to further achieve both the weight reduction and cost reduction of the rotating second gear 462, and the improvement of the durability thereof.

  The gear ratio (gear ratio) of the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 is made the same as the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the first open / close gear 451 and the second open / close gear 452. Therefore, as described later, the rotation angle at which the rotation second gear 462 is rotated when the rotation first gear 461 is rotated by the unit rotation angle is the same as the unit rotation angle, and the opening / closing first gear 451 is rotated. The rotation second gear 462 is aligned with the rotation angle at which it is rotated.

  Referring back to FIG. 21 and FIG. In the assembled state, the large diameter gear 441a of the reduction gear 441 is engaged with the pinion gear 431 of the drive motor 430, and the open / close first gear 451 is engaged with the small diameter gear 441b of the reduction gear 441. The second gear 452 is engaged with the second gear 451, and the second gear 462 is engaged with the first gear 461 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). Therefore, when the drive motor 430 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to the open / close first gear 451 via the pinion gear 431 and the reduction gear 441, and the open / close first gear 451 is rotated.

  In this case, as described above, since the opening and closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are connected by the inner fitting of the connecting projection 451 d into the connecting hole 461 d, they can be integrally rotated in the same phase. Be done. That is, when the open / close first gear 451 is rotated, the rotate first gear 461 is also rotated by the rotation, the rotation of the open / close first gear 451 is to the open / close second gear 452, and the rotation of the rotate first gear 461 is rotated It is transmitted to the second gear 462, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, the opening and closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are independent of each other, and can be relatively rotated in different phases (see FIGS. 28 to 30). Therefore, the rotational driving force is transmitted to the opening and closing second gear 452 while the opening and closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430, and The two gear 462 can form a state in which the rotational driving force is interrupted. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the rotation operation of the operation members 491, 492 is stopped and the opening / closing operation is performed. The details of the structure and operation will be described later.

  In the back case body 421, positioning holes 421a and 421b are formed through the sides of the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427, respectively. Further, positioning holes 410a and 410b are formed through the mounting base 410 correspondingly to the positioning holes 421a and 421b. That is, when the back case body 421 is fastened and fixed to the mounting base 410, the positioning hole 410a communicates with the positioning hole 421a, and the positioning hole 410b communicates with the positioning hole 421b.

  In the present embodiment, a cylindrical jig is inserted through the positioning holes 421a, 421b and the positioning holes 451e, 452e, 462e of the gears 451, 452, 462, respectively, so that the gears 451, 452 for the back case body 421 are inserted. , 461, 462 and positioning the phase (rotational position) between the rotation first gear 461 and the opening / closing first gear 451, and the rotation second gear 462 and the opening / closing second gear 452 it can. The method of such positioning will be described later.

  The back arm body 471 is a member for transmitting the rotation of the second rotating gear 462 to the operating members 491, 492 together with the front arm body 472 and rotating the operating members 491, 492 (see FIG. 26). A shaft support hole 471a through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) insertion holes 471b through which fastening screws (not shown) are inserted, a first pinion leg member 482 and a second pinion A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) shaft portions 471c rotatably supporting the leg members 483 and a U-shaped cross section are linearly extended along the longitudinal direction of the back arm 471. And a positioning hole 471e which is formed through the side of the support hole 471a.

  A collar 427a disposed in the back case body 421 is inserted into the shaft support hole 471a, whereby the back arm body 471 is rotatable relative to the back case body 421 about the second shaft 427. Ru. In addition, a cylindrical portion in which the shaft support hole 471a is formed by the inner peripheral surface is inserted into the insertion hole 452b of the second opening and closing gear 452, and the second opening and closing gear 452 can be rotated by the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion. Supported by

  The positioning holes 471 e are formed at positions respectively corresponding to the positioning holes 462 of the rotating second gear 462 and the positioning holes 452 e of the opening / closing second gear 452. That is, as described later, when the front arm body 472 is coupled (fastened and fixed) to the back arm body 471 and the second rotating gear 462 is coupled (fastened and fixed) to the front arm body 472, the back arm body 471 is The phase (rotational position about the second shaft 427) of the positioning hole 471e of the second rotating gear 462 and the positioning hole 462e of the second rotating gear 462 are matched. On the other hand, while the insertion hole 452b of the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotatably pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion of the back arm 471, the opening / closing second gear 452 is a rear arm around the pivotally supported portion. When positioned relative to 471 and positioned at a predetermined rotational position, the positioning hole 452e of the open / close second gear 452 is relative to the positioning hole 471e of the back arm 471 and the positioning hole 462e of the second rotating gear 462 , Their phases (rotational positions about the second axis 427) are matched.

  The front arm body 472 can be fastened at its tip to a pivoting hole 472a through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and a fastening screw that is protruded toward the back arm body 471 and inserted into the insertion hole 471b of the back arm body 471 A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) raised fastening portions 472b, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) receiving recesses 472c which are recesses capable of receiving the tip of the shaft portion 471c, and a U-shaped cross section A guide groove 472d extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the front arm body 472 as a groove like groove and a connection protrusion 462d of the rotating second gear 462 which is disposed with the shaft support hole 472a interposed therebetween ( And a connecting projection 472 e to be fastened and fixed).

  A collar 422a disposed in the front case body 422 is inserted into the axial support hole 472a, whereby the front arm body 472 is rotatable relative to the front case body 422 about the second shaft 427. Ru. That is, since the front arm body 472 is connected to the rotating second gear 462 via the connecting projections 462 d and 472 e, the rotating second gear 462 receives the rotational driving force from the rotating first gear 461 and the second When rotated about the axis 427, the front arm body 472 (and the back arm body 471 connected to the front arm body 472) is rotated about the second axis 427 together with the rotating second gear 462.

  In the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 471 b of the back arm body 471 is fastened to the raised raised portion 472 of the front arm body 472, thereby the front and the front arm of the back arm body 471. The back of the body 472 is coupled in a posture facing each other. In this case, a gap (space) corresponding to the protruding height of the raised fastening portion 472b is formed between the opposing surfaces (front and back) of the two. Therefore, the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482, and the second pinion leg member 483 can be disposed displaceably by utilizing this gap.

  The slide rack member 481 transmits the rotation of the open / close second gear 452 to the operation members 491, 492 together with the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 to open / close the operation members 491, 492. It is a member (see FIG. 26 and FIG. 27) and is formed on an elongated main body portion 481a, a rack portion 481b formed as a rack gear on both left and right sides of the main body portion 481a, and one longitudinal end of the main body portion 481a A connecting groove 481c, and a guide convex portion 481d which protrudes from the front and back surfaces of the main body portion 481 so as to have a substantially rectangular cross section and linearly extends in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 481a.

  The connection groove 481c of the slide rack member 481 is a groove through which the connection projection 452d of the opening / closing second gear 452 is inserted, as described above, and has a groove width in which the connection projection 452d can slide. Extending in a straight line along a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the Further, in the assembled state, the slide rack member 481 has its guide convex portion 481 d inserted into the guide recessed grooves 471 d and 472 d of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. Therefore, the direction in which the slide rack member 481 can slide relative to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 is the extension direction of the guide recessed grooves 471 d and 472 d (that is, the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472). Direction) (see FIG. 26).

  The first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are provided with main body portions 482a and 483a, axial support holes 482b and 483b formed at one longitudinal end of the main body portions 482a and 483a, and the axial support holes 482b. , 483b and gear parts 482c, 483c formed as pinion gears, and connecting holes 482d, 483d formed through the other end in the longitudinal direction of the main body parts 482a, 483a, respectively, each pair being a slide rack member The gear portions 482 c and 483 c are disposed in mesh with the rack portion 481 b of the slide rack member 481 on both the left and right sides of 481.

  The shaft support holes 482 b and 483 b are holes through which the shaft portion 471 c of the back arm 471 is inserted and supported in an assembled state, whereby the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are The rear arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are rotatable around the bearing holes 482 b and 483 b (shaft portion 471 c). Therefore, by sliding the slide rack member 481 relative to the rear arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 can be engaged via the toothed engagement of the rack portion 481 b and the gear portions 482 c and 483 c. The pinion leg member 483 can be rotated.

  The operation members 491 and 492 are projected in a cylindrical shape from the back surface side thereof and formed in plurality so as to be insertable into the connection holes 482 d and 483 d of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 (four in the present embodiment) ), And includes the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a. The protruding tips of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are formed to be able to fasten fastening screws. Therefore, the protruding tips of the bulking fastening portions 491a and 492a are inserted into the connection holes 482d and 483d, and the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 are fastened by fastening fastening screws to the protruding tips from the side opposite to the inserting direction. The operation members 491 and 492 are connected to the pinion leg member 483.

  In addition, a rib-like site | part is protrudingly formed and formed in the outer peripheral surface except the front-end | tip of the volume raising fastening parts 491a and 492a, The end surface of the rib-like site | part is 1st pinion leg member 482 and 2nd pinion It abuts on the front of the leg member 483. As a result, the operation members 491 and 492 can be disposed at positions raised from the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 by the protruding height of the raised fastening portions 491 a and 492 a. Therefore, even in the structure in which the front arm body 472 is disposed between the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 and the operation members 491, 492, such interference with the front arm body 472 occurs. It is possible to perform the opening and closing operation of the operation members 491, 492 without doing so.

  An urging spring 484 consisting of a coil spring is disposed between the pair of first pinion leg members 482 in a state of being elastically deformed in tension, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 484 can be The first pinion leg members 482 are configured to act in a direction approaching each other. Thus, when the operating members 491 and 492 are closed in the opening and closing operation, the operating members 491 and 492 are brought into close contact with each other using the biasing force of the biasing spring 484 to form a gap. It can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, a method of positioning the open / close first gear 451, the open / close second gear 452, the rotating first gear 461, and the rotating second gear 462 will be described. In addition, in description of this positioning method, FIGS. 21-23 is suitably referred.

  FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 explain the process of assembling the open / close first gear 451 and the open / close second gear 452, the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 on the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 in time series. FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged front view of a combined operation unit 400. In FIG. 24 (a), the state in which the reduction gear 441 is assembled to the reduction gear 425 is further opened and closed on the first shaft 426 with respect to the state illustrated in FIG. 24 (a) in FIG. The state in which the first gear 451 is assembled is further assembled to the second shaft 427 with respect to the state illustrated in FIG. 24 (b) in FIG. In FIG. 25 (b), the state in which the first rotating gear 461 is assembled to the first shaft 426 is further illustrated in FIG. 25 (b).

  Here, as described above, the compound operation unit 400 sequentially transmits the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 to the open / close first gear 451 and the open / close second gear 452 via the reduction gear 441 so that the open / close second The slide rack member 481 is displaced by the rotation of the gear 452, and the operation members 491, 492 are opened and closed, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 is transmitted via the reduction gear 441 to the first rotation gear 461 and the second rotation gear 462. By sequentially transmitting the power to the second arm 461 and the second arm 462, the back arm 471 and the front arm 472 are rotated by the rotation of the second gear 462, and the operation members 491, 492 are rotated.

  Therefore, in order to properly perform the opening and closing operation and the rotation operation of the operating members 491, 492 (that is, to avoid the occurrence of the interference between the members and the shift of the movement range), the second gear 452 for the first gear 451 is used. The rotational position (phase, meshing position) of the first gear 461 and the rotational position of the second rotational gear 462 with respect to the first rotational gear 461 are respectively positioned at predetermined rotational positions, and the gears 451 to 462 are holding cases. It needs to be assembled to 420 respectively.

  However, in the conventional game machine, when the rotational position (phase, meshing position) of the other gear with respect to one gear is thus positioned, the operator rotates both the gears in order to assemble the two gears. Since it was necessary to adjust the position by visual observation and assemble it, the operation is complicated, the operation efficiency is not only poor, and there is a possibility that an assembly failure may occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, relative rotational positions (phase, meshing position) of the opening and closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 with respect to the opening and closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461, and The positioning structure (position) for positioning the mounting position (phase) of the gears 451, 452, 461, 462 to the back case body 421 is provided, and when the gears 451 to 462 are assembled to the holding case 420 by using this positioning structure, It is possible to avoid the occurrence of assembly failure while improving the workability.

  Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 24A, the reduction gear 441 is assembled to the reduction shaft 425, and is engaged with the pinion gear 431. As described above, since the positioning holes 421a and 421b of the back case body 421 are in communication with the positioning holes 410a and 410b (see FIG. 21) of the mounting base 410, the positioning holes 410a from the back side of the mounting base 410. , 410b are inserted respectively, and the jig is made to project from the positioning holes 421a, 421b to the front side of the back case body 421. The jig is formed as a cylindrical body with a circular cross section having an outer diameter equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the positioning hole 410a and the like.

  Next, the first gear 451 is assembled (axially supported) on the first shaft 426 while inserting the jig protruding from the positioning hole 421 a of the back case body 421 into the positioning hole 451 e of the first gear 451. As a result, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), the open / close first gear 451 can be meshed with the reduction gear 441 and the attachment position (phase) of the open / close first gear 451 to the back case body 421 can be positioned. .

  Next, the second gear 452 and the second gear 462 are opened while maintaining the state where the back case body 421 is positioned (the jig is inserted in the positioning hole 451 e of the first gear 451). It is assembled to the 2nd shaft 427.

  The open / close second gear 452 and the rotation second gear 462 are operated in a state integrated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. That is, in the opening / closing second gear 452, the insertion hole 452 of the cylindrical portion of the back arm 471 is pivotally supported, and for the rotating second gear 462, the connecting projection 462 d is the connecting projection 472 e of the front arm 472. The second gear 452 and the second gear 462 are interposed between the back arm 471 and the front arm 472 facing each other. Further, the jig inserted into the positioning hole 421 b of the back case 421 is protruded from the surface of the back case 421 to a height position which can be inserted into the positioning hole 462 e of the rotating second gear 462.

  In this case, the assembling of the opening and closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 to the second shaft 427 includes positioning of the jig projecting from the positioning hole 421b of the back case body 421, positioning hole 471e of the back arm 471, opening and closing the second The opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotation second gear 462 are assembled (axially supported) on the second shaft 427 while sequentially inserting the positioning hole 452 e of the two gear 452 and the positioning hole 462 e of the rotation second gear 462. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 25A, the open / close second gear 452 is engaged with the open / close first gear 451, and the rotational position (phase, meshing position) of the open / close second gear 452 with respect to the open / close first gear 451 Can be positioned, and the mounting position (phase) of the open / close second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 to the back case body 421 can be positioned.

  Finally, while opening and closing the rear case body 421 (a state in which the jig is inserted into at least the positioning holes 471 e of the rear arm body 471), the opening and closing operation is supported by the first shaft 426 The rotating first gear 461 is assembled (axially supported) on the first shaft 426 while inserting the connecting projection 451 d of the first gear 451 into the connecting hole 461 d of the rotating first gear 461. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25B, the first rotating gear 461 is engaged with the second rotating gear 462 and the mounting position (phase) of the second rotating gear 462 with respect to the back case body 421 is determined. Can.

  After the first rotating gear 461 is attached to (is axially supported by) the first shaft 426, the jig is removed from the back side of the back case body 421. Thereby, the assembly (pivot support) of the gears 451 to 462 to the back case body 421 (the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427) is completed.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, a jig is erected in parallel to the side of the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 of the back case body 421, and each gear is inserted through the positioning hole 451e etc. Assembling 451 to 462 in order to the first shaft 426, the second shaft 427, etc. (rotationally supporting) positions the rotational position (phase, meshing position) of each gear 451 to 462 with reference to the back case body 421. can do. That is, since the jig can be inserted at the same time as inserting the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 into the gears 451 to 462, the assembling operation and the positioning operation can be performed simultaneously, thereby improving the workability. Can be

  In particular, since the positioning hole 452e of the open / close second gear 452 is formed as a through hole for the open / close second gear 452 and the rotate second gear 462, the second shaft of the open / close second gear 452 and the rotate second gear 462 is Assembling (pivoting) to 427 can be performed simultaneously. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the positioning hole 471 e of the back arm body 471 is formed as a through hole, a state in which the open / close second gear 452 and the rotation second gear 462 are integrated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 Can be assembled (axially supported) to the second shaft 427. Therefore, there is no need to position and assemble the arm bodies 471 and 472 and the gears 452 and 462, respectively, and the positioning operation can be completed by one assembling operation, and the workability can be improved.

Further, in this case, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated jig for each of the opening and closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462, the back arm 471, and the front arm 472, and a common jig is used. Product cost can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore,
If the opening and closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 need to be relatively rotatable independently of each other, if the jig is pulled out to the back side of the back case body 421, the opening and closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear The 462 can be independently rotatable. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a rotation shaft for each of the opening and closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462, and the opening and closing second gear 452 and the rotation second gear 462 are used as a common rotation axis (second shaft 427). Since this can be supported, product cost can be reduced from this point as well.

  On the other hand, the opening and closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 need to be connected to each other and integrally rotatable in the same phase. In this case, the opening and closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are inserted into (inserted in) the pair of connecting projections 451 d of the opening and closing first gear 451 through the pair of connecting holes 461 d of the rotating first gear 461. The two gears 451 and 461 are connected to each other to simultaneously enable positioning of the rotational position (phase) and integral rotation in the same phase. That is, the positioning of the rotational position (phase) of both gears 451 and 461 and the connection of both gears 451 and 461 for integral rotation can be used both for connecting projection 451 d and communication hole 461 d, so that the rotation can be performed. There is no need to separately provide a through hole for positioning (that is, inserting a jig) and a connecting structure for integral rotation. As a result, the shapes of both the gears 451 and 461 can be simplified to improve the manufacturing yield. Further, since the number of the through holes formed through the first rotating gear 461 (the main body portion 461a) can be reduced, rigidity can be secured by that amount and durability can be improved.

  In particular, a pair of communication holes 461 d are formed as through holes in the first rotating gear 461, and a pair of connection projections 451 d of the opening and closing first gear 451 are inserted through the pair of communication holes 461 d (internal fitting Because of the fitting structure, the rigidity of the rotating first gear 461 (main portion 461a) can be improved.

  Here, according to the positioning structure of the present embodiment, as described above, the jig is protruded from the front of the back case body 421, and while the rotational position is positioned using this jig, the gears 451 to 462 are sequentially arranged. When the first shaft 426, the second shaft 427, etc. are assembled (axially supported), the jig can be removed from the back surface of the back case body 421 after the assembly of all the gears 451 to 462 is completed. That is, when assembling each gear 451-462, while maintaining the state where a jig was inserted in positioning holes 451e-462e of gears 451-462 already assembled among each gear 451-462, each is maintained The remaining gears 451 to 461 of the gears 451 to 462 can be assembled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the worker from inadvertently rotating the gears 451 to 461, which have already been assembled, during work, so that it is possible to improve the workability, and at the same time the reliability of the positioned rotational position. It is possible to improve the quality.

  In the present embodiment, the open / close first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are coaxially disposed on the first shaft 426, and the open / close second gear 452 and the rotation second gear 462 are coaxially disposed on the second shaft 427, respectively. Therefore, backlash between the open / close first gear 451 and the open / close second gear 452, and backlash between the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 can be generated in the same direction. . Thereby, as described later, when performing the opening / closing operation and the rotation operation of the operation members 491, 492 (see FIG. 27 to FIG. 30), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the deviation in the effect timing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the opening / closing operation of the operation members 491, 492 will be described. 26 (a) to 26 (c) are exploded front views of the combined operation unit 400 for illustrating the relative displacement of the second gear 452 and the slide rack member 481 relative to the rear arm 471. A state in which the operation members 491, 492 and the front arm body 472 are removed is illustrated. 26 (a) corresponds to FIG. 26 (b), the second gear 452 opens and closes counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and FIG. 26 (c) corresponds to FIG. 26 (b). The second gear 452 corresponds to the clockwise (clockwise) rotation.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), the cylindrical portion (see FIGS. 21 and 22) of the back case body 271 is inserted through the insertion hole 452b of the open / close second gear 452 Thus, the open / close second gear 452 is rotatable relative to the back case 271 about the second shaft 427.

  As described above, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 is reversely biased in the direction in which the two are brought close to each other by the biasing force of the biasing spring 484 (see FIG. 22) installed between them. A shaft support hole 482 b is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 471 c of the arm body 471. That is, by receiving the biasing force of the biasing spring 484, the first pinion leg member 482 positioned on the right side of FIG. 26 (b) of the pair of first pinion leg members 482 rotates counterclockwise around the shaft portion 471c. While being rotated counterclockwise, the first pinion leg member 482 positioned on the left side in FIG. 26B is rotated clockwise (clockwise) around the shaft portion 471c. Accordingly, the slide rack member 481 receives the guide recesses 471d and 472d of both arm bodies 471 and 472 by the biasing force of the biasing spring 484 acting through the rotation of the pair of first pinion leg members 482 (FIGS. 21 and 22). 26) is slid downward (in the direction away from the opening and closing second gear 452, the lower side in FIG. 26B).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), when the open / close second gear 452 is not rotated against the urging force of the urging spring 484, the connection projection 452d of the open / close second gear 452 slides The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the direction of slide displacement (up and down direction in FIG. 26B) is drawn by the rack member 481 downward (FIG. 26B lower side) as the distance L1. . Further, in the pair of first pinion leg members 482, the distance between their connection holes 482d is a distance W1.

  When, for example, the open / close second gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm 471 from the state shown in FIG. By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481, the movement of the connecting projection 452d moves the slide rack member 481 against the biasing force of the biasing spring 484 to the upper side (the upper side in FIG. 26A). Slide to displace.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 26A, when the open / close second gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotational position, the connection groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 26A). The distance between them is shortened to the distance L2 (L2 <L1), and the slide rack member 481 is slidingly displaced upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2. Along with the upward slide displacement of the slide rack member 481, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are rotated in the direction away from each other, and the distance between the connection holes 482d is enlarged to be the distance W2 (W1 <W2).

  The pair of second pinion leg members 483 is similar to the pair of first pinion leg members 482, and in the state shown in FIG. 26 (a), when the slide rack member 481 is displaced upward, the distance between the connection holes 483d is maximized. ) Is placed.

  When the open / close second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) around the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm 471 from the state shown in FIG. 26 (a), the state shown in FIG. 26 (b) Will be returned to When the open / close second gear 452 is further rotated clockwise (clockwise) around the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm 471 from the state shown in FIG. 26B, the connecting projection 452 d slides By sliding in the connection groove 481c of the rack member 481, the movement of the connection projection 452d slides the slide rack member 481 upward (FIG. 26 (c) upper side) against the urging force of the urging spring 484. Displace. Thereby, as in the case shown in FIG. 26 (a), when the open / close second gear 452 is rotated to the predetermined rotational position, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the direction of the slide displacement (FIG. 26 (c) The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the vertical direction is shortened to the distance L2 (L2 <L1), and the slide rack member 481 is slidingly displaced upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2. Ru. Along with the upward slide displacement of the slide rack member 481, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 (and the second pinion leg members 483) are rotated in the direction away from each other, and between the connection holes 482d. The interval is expanded to be an interval W2 (W1 <W2).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30, the rotation operation and the opening / closing operation of the operation members 491, 492 by the combined operation unit 400 will be described.

  FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (d) are front views of the combined operation unit 400 showing the opening / closing operation and the rotating operation of the operation members 491, 492 in time series. In FIG. 27A, the operating members 491 and 492 are disposed at the rising position U and closed in the state in which the operating members 491 and 492 are disposed at the rising position U and opened. In FIG. 27 (c), the operating members 491, 492 are disposed at the lowered position D and closed, and in FIG. 27 (d), the operating members 491, 492 are disposed at the lowered position D and The opened state is illustrated respectively.

  FIGS. 28 to 30 schematically show the meshing state of the open / close first gear 451 and the open / close second gear 452, and the meshing state of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of 400. FIG. 28 (a) is in the state of FIG. 27 (a), FIG. 28 (b) and FIG. 29 (a) are in the state of FIG. 27 (b), and FIG. 29 (b) is in FIG. 27 (c) and 30 (a) correspond to the state shown in FIG. 27 (c), and FIG. 30 (b) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 27 (d). Do. The same state is illustrated in FIGS. 28 (b) and 29 (a) and FIGS. 29 (c) and 30 (a).

  Here, in FIG. 28 to FIG. 30, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. Further, in FIG. 28 to FIG. 30, one connecting protrusion 451 d of the pair of connecting protrusions 451 d of the opening / closing first gear 451 and one connecting hole of the pair of connecting holes 461 d of the rotating first gear 461 The connection projections 451d and the connection holes 461d, which are hatched, are illustrated with 461 d and hatched, respectively, as a reference of rotation angles θ0 to θ4 described later. That is, the opening and closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 462 are inserted (internally fitted) in the connecting hole 461 d in which the hatched connecting projection 451 d is hatched, and they are arranged at the same rotational position.

  Further, in FIGS. 28 to 30, the rotation of the open / close first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 in the state where the operation members 491, 492 are disposed at the raised position U and opened (the state shown in FIG. 27A). The rotational position of the open / close first gear 451 and the rotational first gear 461 in the state where the position is the rotation angle θ0 and the operation members 491, 492 are disposed at the raised position U and closed (the state shown in FIG. 27B). Opening and closing first gear in a state where the rotation angle θ1 and the operation members 491 and 492 are disposed between the raised position U and the lowered position D and closed (the state between FIG. 27 (b) and FIG. 27 (c)) The open / close first gear 451 in a state where the rotational position of the first gear 461 and the first rotary gear 461 is the rotation angle θ2 and the operation members 491, 492 are disposed at the lowered position D and closed (state shown in FIG. 27C). The first open / close first gear 451 and the open / close first gear 461 in the state where the rotation position of the first rotation gear 461 is the rotation angle θ3 and the operation members 491, 492 are disposed at the lowered position D and released (state shown in FIG. The rotational position of the first gear 461 is defined as a rotational angle θ4.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 28 (a), when the rotational position of the open / close first gear 451 and the rotational first gear 461 is at the rotational angle θ0, the operating members 491, 492 are in the raised position U. It is placed and opened. That is, the open / close second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 about the second shaft 427 to a predetermined rotational position, and the connecting groove 481 c and the second shaft 427 By reducing the distance between them to the distance L2, the slide rack member 481 is in a state of sliding displacement upward (in a direction approaching the second shaft 427) (state shown in FIG. 26C).

  In this case, the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 abut the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the main body 461a of the first rotating gear 461 with the non-formed surface 462a1 of the main body 462a of the second rotating gear 462 . As described above, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 (body portion 461a) is formed as a cylindrical surface centering on the first shaft 426, and the second rotating gear 462 (body portion 462a) is not formed. The surface 462a1 is a curved surface which is recessed toward the second shaft 427 insertion hole 462b (that is, has a center of curvature on the first shaft 426 side), and has the same curvature or a slight curvature as the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461. It is formed as a curved surface of small curvature (ie slightly larger radius).

  Therefore, the second shaft 427 of the rotating second gear 462 (that is, the rear arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 fixed to the rotating second gear 462) by the abutment of the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1. It is considered impossible to rotate around the That is, as the stopper means for restricting the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 around the second shaft 427 (that is, holding the operating members 491, 492 in the raised position U) as the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1. It can be made to function.

  Here, in the conventional game machine, the operation member provided rotatably and the drive motor for applying the rotation drive force to the operation member are provided, and the operation member is rotated by a predetermined amount by the rotation drive force of the drive motor. There is something to rotate in the range. In this case, for example, when the end of the rotation range of the operation member is at the rising position and gravity is applied to the operation member disposed at the end of the rotation range, the operation member rotates (falls) by the action of gravity. It is necessary not to. However, in the conventional game machine, the rotation (falling) of the operation member is restricted by opposing the driving force of the drive motor to the gravity (the weight of the operation member) (ie, the operation member is held at the end of the rotation range Because of the structure), the energy consumption required for holding the operating member is large.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the operation members 491 and 492 are disposed at the end (rising position U) of the rotation range, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotation gear 461 (main portion 461a) and the second rotation By contacting the non-forming surface 462a1 of the gear 462 (main body portion 462a), the rotation operation of the operation members 491, 492 (rotational movement of the second rotating gear 462) can be restricted. That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the operation members 491 and 492 are disposed at the end of the rotation range (raising position U), the operation members 491 and 492 and the drive motor 430 are separated. The operating members 491 and 492 can be moved to the rising position U by utilizing the contact of the cylindrical surface 461 a1 and the non-forming surface 462 a1 where the operating members 491 and 492 can not be held at the rising position U by using the rotational driving force. Can be held. As a result, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption necessary for holding the operating members 491, 492.

  In this case, when the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (body portion 461a) and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (body portion 462a) abut each other (ie, the operating member 491, At the raised position U (and the lowered position D described later) 492, the rotation of the second rotating gear 462 in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise) about the second shaft 427 can be restricted. Since the second rotation gear 462 rotates about the second shaft 427 only in one direction (i.e., the direction in which the operation members 491 and 492 are lowered toward the lowered position D by the action of gravity). Only when the end of the movement range (the rising position U (and the falling position D described later) reaches the end of the movement range, the vibration of the operation members 491, 492 converge End of movement range The operation member 491, 492 can be positioned quickly. Furthermore, since the operating members 491 and 492 can be held in a stable state at the end of the movement range, the operating members 491 and 492 that should be in the stopped state at the raised position U (and the lowered position D described later) It is possible to suppress vibration or positional deviation due to an external force generated by the player striking or shaking the gaming machine.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (body portion 462a) is in contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (body portion 461a) (ie, the operating member 491). , 492 are curved in a circular arc around the rotation axis (first shaft 426) of the rotating first gear 461 at the rising position U (and the lowering position D described later)), The cylindrical surface 461 a 1 of the rotating first gear 461 is curved in the form of an arc having the same diameter or a slightly larger diameter.

  As a result, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 can be made to abut smoothly on the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, and both can be made to easily abut on surface contact. As a result, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formation surface 462a1 are brought into contact smoothly, and the operation members 491, 492 reach the end of the movement range (the raised position U (and the lowered position D described later)) The impact during the process can be relaxed, and the contact pressure between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 can be reduced to improve the durability of the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462.

  Here, as described above, the rigidity of the rotating second gear 462 is enhanced by using the rigidity of the front arm body 472 (that is, by being integrated with the front arm body 472). Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the thickness of the second rotating gear 462 or to adopt a high rigidity material, and as a result, while achieving weight reduction and cost reduction of the second rotating gear 462, the durability of the second rotating gear 462 is improved. Improvements are being made.

  In particular, as described above, the rotating second gear 462 is a position at which the connecting projection 462d faces the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 with the back surface side of the non-forming surface 462a1 (ie, sandwiching the non-forming surface 462a1). ), So that the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 abuts on the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 at the raised position U (and the lowered position D described later). The rigidity of the portion receiving the reaction force from the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first gear 461 can be effectively enhanced. As a result, it is possible to further achieve both the weight reduction and cost reduction of the rotating second gear 462, and the improvement of the durability thereof.

  Furthermore, the connecting projection 462d of the rotating second gear 462 is disposed at a position facing the rotation shaft (first shaft 426) of the rotating first gear 461 with the non-forming surface 462a1 therebetween. That is, the non-forming surface 462a1 is disposed on a straight line connecting the connecting protrusion 462d and the first shaft 426. When bringing the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 at the raised position U (and the lowered position D described later), the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 Since the reaction force received from the valve is operated along a straight line connecting the connecting projection 462d and the first shaft 426, the second gear rotating at a position facing the rotation axis (first shaft 426) of the first rotating gear 461 By arranging the connecting projection 462 d of 462, the front arm body 472 can be used to further exert the effect of enhancing the rigidity of the portion receiving the reaction force from the rotating first gear 461 (the cylindrical surface 461 a 1). In addition, since a metal fastening screw is inserted through the rolling projection 462d, the rigidity can be enhanced also in that point.

  When the open / close first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ1 from the states shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 28 (a), the rotation is performed. Since the first gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 slip between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462, the first rotating gear The rotational driving force is not transmitted from the shaft 461 to the rotating second gear 462, and the rotating second gear 462 (and the back arm 471 and the front arm 472) is not rotated. Thus, the operation members 491 and 492 can be held at the raised position U without performing the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 (that is, in the state in which the rotation operation is stopped).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical surface 461a1 is formed in the first rotating gear 461, and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 is opposed to the cylindrical surface 461a1, the above-described blocking state (rotation Since the structure in which the rotational driving force is not transmitted from the first gear 461 to the second rotating gear 462 is formed, the rigidity of the first rotating gear 462 can be improved.

  That is, even when the teeth 461c are formed over the entire circumference of the first rotating gear 461 (the area corresponding to the cylindrical surface 461a1), the non-forming surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 is formed on the tip of the teeth 461c. By facing (sliding) face to face, it is possible to form the above-mentioned blocking state. However, in this case, the rigidity of the main body portion 461a of the first rotating gear 461 is reduced because the teeth 461c are formed (concave). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical surface 451a1 is formed in the region facing the non-forming surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 (the teeth 451c are not formed), and accordingly, the main portion 461a of the first rotating gear 461 Improvement of the rigidity of the

  When the teeth 461c are formed over the entire circumference of the first rotating gear 461 (the area corresponding to the cylindrical surface 461a1), the non-formed surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 is the same as that of the teeth 461c of the first rotating gear 461. It is necessary to be retracted to the second shaft 427 side with respect to the tooth tip surface. As a result, the amount of receding in the non-forming surface 462a1 forming portion of the rotating second gear 462 becomes large, which causes a decrease in the rigidity thereof.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the cylindrical surface 461a1 is formed on the first rotating gear 461 and, as described above, the cylindrical surface 451a1 is between the tooth tip surface and the tooth bottom surface of the tooth 451c. Thus, the amount of retraction of the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 can be reduced. Thereby, the protrusion amount of the non-formation surface 462a1 formation part of the rotation 2nd gear 462 is secured (it suppresses that the amount of retreats becomes large), and in the rotation 2nd gear 462, the rigidity of the non-formation surface 462a1 formation part Can be improved.

  In particular, as described above, the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is formed as a curved surface which is recessed toward the second shaft 427 (that is, having the center of curvature on the first shaft 426), and The cylindrical surface of the rotating first gear 461 is formed so as to project toward the front (the side of the rotating first gear 461) (that is, a shape in which the distance from the second shaft 427 becomes larger) It is possible to further increase the rigidity by increasing the amount of protrusion of the non-formed surface 462a1 forming portion of the rotating second gear 462, while making it possible to slide with respect to 461a1 (formation of the blocking state).

  Since the teeth 451 c and 452 c of the opening and closing first gear 451 and the opening and closing second gear 452 are engaged with each other, the opening and closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are engaged with each other. Are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotational angle θ0 to the rotational angle θ1, the rotation of the open / close first gear 451 is transmitted to the open / close second gear 452, and the open / close second gear 452 is the back arm body 471 and It is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) around the second axis 427 with respect to the front arm body 472.

  As a result, the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 is increased to the distance L1, and the slide rack member 481 is slid downward (in a direction away from the second shaft 427) (see FIG. 26B). ). As a result, as shown in FIG. 27B and FIG. 28B and FIG. 29A, the operating members 491 and 492 that have been opened can be in the closed state. That is, the open / close operation can be performed to close the open operating members 491, 492 while holding the operating members 491, 492 at the raised position U.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 (b), 28 (b) and 29 (a), the open / close first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are rotated to the rotation angle θ1, and the operating members 491, 492 are raised. In the closed state, the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 reaches the end of the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the teeth 461c of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 The 462 c are brought into a state immediately before the engagement.

  Therefore, from the states shown in FIGS. 27B, 28B, and 29A, the first gear 451 and the first gear 461 are integrated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ1 to the rotation angle θ3. When the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 are rotated, the teeth 461 c and 462 c of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 are engaged with each other, whereby the rotating first gear is rotated. The rotation of 461 is transmitted to the rotation second gear 462, and the rotation second gear 462 is rotated clockwise about the second shaft 427 integrally with the back arm 471 and the front arm 472. . As a result, as shown in FIG. 29B, it is possible to perform a rotation operation from the raised position U of the operation members 491, 492 to the lowered position D.

  On the other hand, as described above, the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 is made the same as the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 Therefore, when the opening and closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ1 to the rotation angle θ3, the opening and closing second gear 452 and the rotation second gear 462 are also the same. It is integrally rotated in phase. That is, the open / close second gear 452 is not rotated relative to the back arm 471 and the front arm 472, and as shown in FIG. 29 (b), these rotated second gear 462, the back arm 471 and The front arm body 472 is integrally rotated about the second axis 427 in the same phase. That is, the opening and closing operation of the operation members 491, 492 can be stopped (the operation members 491, 492 can be held in the closed state).

  Thus, when the open / close first gear 451 and the rotatable first gear 461 are further rotated from the rotation angle θ2, the rotary member is held in the closed state, and the rotation operation is executed to open / close the first open / close first When the gear 451 and the first rotation gear 461 reach the rotation angle θ3, as shown in FIGS. 27 (c) and 29 (c), the operating members 491, 492 arranged at the ascending position U are lowered. Can be placed.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 (c), 29 (c) and 30 (a), when the open / close first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are rotated to the rotation angle θ3, the operating members 491, 492 are It is placed in the lowered position D and is in a closed state. In this case, the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 are disengaged from each other's teeth 461 c and 462 c, and the cylindrical surface 461 a 1 of the main body 461 a of the rotating first gear 461 is rotated by the rotating second gear 462. The non-forming surface 462a1 of the main body portion 462a of the

  That is, the mutual engagement between the teeth 461 c and 462 c of the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 is released (imposed to be unengaged), the first rotating gear 461 to the second rotating gear 462. The transmission of the rotational driving force to the transmission can be interrupted (by forming the shutoff state), and the rotation of the second rotating gear 462 (that is, the rotational movement of the operation members 491, 492) can be stopped.

  Here, in the conventional game machine, the operation member is stopped by providing a sensor device for detecting the rotational position of the gear that transmits the rotational drive force of the drive motor to the operational member, and the sensor device moves the gear to a predetermined rotational position. When it is detected that the motor is rotated, or when the drive amount (number of revolutions and steps) of the drive motor is detected (counted) and the drive amount reaches a predetermined amount, the respective operating members move It was determined that the end of the range was reached, and the drive of the drive motor was stopped. In this case, the drive motor may not be stopped even though the operating member has reached the end of the movement range, for example, due to the detection failure of the rotational position or the drive amount due to the influence of electrical noise. obtain. Therefore, in the conventional game machine, the stopper is provided at the end of the movement range of the moving member, and the movement of the operating member is restricted by the stopper when the drive motor is not properly stopped. However, in the structure in which the movement of the operating member is restricted by the stopper as described above, not only the operating member and the stopper may be damaged when the operating member collides with the stopper, but also the load on the drive motor is excessive. As a result, the drive motor may be damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the operation members 491, 492 reach the end (downward position D) of the movement range, the meshing of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 is performed. When released (not meshable), the transmission of the rotational drive force from the drive motor 430 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) to the operation members 491, 492 (the second rotating gear 462) can be cut off. As a result, even when the rotational drive force of the drive motor 430 continues to be generated, the operation members 491 and 492 can be stopped.

  As a result, damage due to a collision between the operation members 491, 492 and other members can be avoided. Also, even if the actuating members 491 and 492 collide with other members, the actuating members 491 and 492 are separated from the drive motor 430 (ie, the teeth of the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462). Since the drive motor 430 is in an idle state, it is possible to prevent an excessive load from acting on the drive motor 430. As described later, the same applies to the case where the operation members 491 and 492 are rotated from the lowered position D toward the raised position U and reach the raised position U.

  As described above, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 are formed as curved surfaces having shapes corresponding to each other. Therefore, the second shaft 427 of the rotating second gear 462 (that is, the rear arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 fixed to the rotating second gear 462) by the abutment of the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1. It is considered impossible to rotate around the That is, the stopper means which makes it possible to regulate the rotation of the second rotating gear 462 about the second shaft 427 (that is, hold the operating members 491, 492 in the lowered position D) the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1. It can function as

  From the states shown in FIGS. 27 (c), 29 (c) and 30 (a), the open / close first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally in phase from the rotation angle θ3 to the rotation angle θ4. When rotated, the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 slide between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 Therefore, the rotational driving force is not transmitted from the rotating first gear 461 to the rotating second gear 462, and the rotating second gear 462 (and the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472) is not rotated. Thus, the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 can be stopped without stopping the rotation operation (that is, the operation members 491 and 492 can be held at the lowered position D).

  On the other hand, since the teeth 451c and 452c of the open / close first gear 451 and the open / close second gear 452 are engaged with each other, the open / close first gear 451 and the open / close second gear 452 are rotated. When the gear 461 is integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ3 to the rotation angle θ4, the rotation of the opening / closing first gear 451 is transmitted to the opening / closing second gear 452, and the opening / closing second gear 452 is a back arm 471 and the front arm body 472 are rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) around the second axis 427.

  As a result, the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 is shortened to the distance L2, and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward (in the direction approaching the second shaft 427) (see FIG. 26C). ). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27 (d) and 30 (b), the closed operation members 491, 492 can be brought into the open state. That is, while holding the operating members 491, 492 at the lowered position D, the opening and closing operation can be performed to open the closed operating members 491, 492.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 (d) and 30 (b), after the operation members 491, 492 are disposed at the lowered position D and are in the open state, the drive motor 430 (FIGS. (See above) by rotating the first gear 451 and the first gear 461 integrally in the same phase from the rotation angle θ4 to the rotation angle θ0 as described above. The operations (opening and closing operation and rotation operation) can be performed in the reverse order.

  That is, from the state of the rotation angle θ4 shown in FIGS. 27 (d) and 30 (b), the open / close first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase to the rotation angle θ3. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27C, 29C and 30A, the sliding between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is performed. Clockwise (clockwise) of the open / close second gear 452 while stopping the rotational movement of the operating members 491, 492 (that is, holding the operating members 491, 492 in the lowered position D) using (sliding) ), The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 can be increased to the distance L1, and the operating members 491, 492 that were open can be in the closed state. That is, while holding the operating members 491, 492 in the lowered position D, the opening and closing operation can be performed to close the operating members 491, 492 that are open.

  Next, from the state of the rotation angle θ3 shown in FIGS. 27C, 29C, and 30A, the opening and closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrated in the same phase through the rotation angle θ2. Rotation to the rotation angle θ1. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27B and 29A, the rotating second gear 462 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) integrally with the rear arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 to move the operating member 491, 492 is rotated from the lowered position D to the raised position U, and the open / close second gear 452 is not rotated relative to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 can be integrally rotated about the second axis 427 in the same phase. That is, while holding the operation members 491 and 492 in the closed state, the rotation operation can be performed to arrange the operation members 491 and 492 arranged at the lowered position D at the raised position U.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, only the opening / closing operation of the operating members 491, 492 is performed first when starting the rotational operation of moving the operating members 491, 492 from the lowered position D to the raised position U. After that, the rotation operation of the operation members 491, 492 is performed. That is, after forming a cut-off state for blocking transmission of the rotational drive force of the drive motor 430 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) to the rotational second gear 462, the rotational drive force of the drive motor 430 is rotated to the second rotational gear. Since the transmission state to be transmitted to 462 is formed, the rotational driving force required for the drive motor 430 can be suppressed to start the rotational operation of the operation members 491, 492. As a result, the drive motor 430 can be miniaturized. be able to.

  That is, when starting the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 in the stopped state (that is, the raised position U or the lowered position D), the stationary object is moved. It is necessary to apply a force that exceeds the generated inertial force to the operating members 491, 492 that are applied, and the rotational driving force required for the drive motor 430 is increased. In particular, the rotational movement of the operation members 491 and 992 is performed not only to the operation members 491 and 492, but also to a mechanism part that performs opening and closing operations of the operation members 491 and 492 (for example, the slide rack member 481 and each pinion leg member 482 Etc.) and the respective arm bodies 471, 472 etc. that hold the mechanical part, etc., it is necessary to move the whole, and the inertia force at the time of starting the rotation operation becomes large. In addition, when rotating the operating members 491 and 492 in the lowered position D toward the raised position D, it is necessary to resist the weight (the action of gravity) of the operating members 491 and 492 in addition to the inertial force. . Therefore, the drive motor 430 is upsized.

  On the other hand, after the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 is started, the function of inertia acts to maintain the motion state of the operation members 491 and 492. The driving force is smaller than the rotational driving force required to start the rotational operation of the operation members 491, 492. In other words, after the movement of the operation members 491 and 492 is started, it can be said that the drive motor 430 having an unnecessarily large maximum output is being used.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, first, the rotational driving force is utilized by using the slip (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 The drive motor 430 can be rotationally driven in a state in which the rotation second gear 462 is not transmitted (shutdown state, a state during transition from FIG. 30 (b) to FIG. 30 (a)). The driving state can have momentum (inertial force on the side of the first rotating gear 461). Thereafter, the rotation first gear 461 is engaged with the rotation second gear 462 (ie, the transmission state is formed) (see the state of transition from FIG. 29 (c) to FIG. 29 (b)), In a state where the rotational drive of the drive motor 430 is given momentum, the rotational operation of the operation members 491, 492 can be started. Thereby, even if the drive motor 430 is miniaturized, the movement of the operation members 491, 492 can be started. In other words, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the drive motor 430 having an unnecessarily large maximum output is used after the rotation operation of the operation members 491, 492 is started.

  In particular, in the blocking state, the opening and closing operation of the operating members 491, 492 is performed, but in the opening and closing operation, only the operating members 491, 492 are objects to be moved (moved or displaced) by the driving force of the drive motor 430. As in the case of the rotational operation, it is not necessary to move the whole including the mechanical parts and the respective arm bodies 471, 472 and the like in addition to the operation members 491, 492. Therefore, the load of the drive motor 430 is small, and sufficient momentum (inertia force on the first rotating gear 461 side) can be given to the driving state.

  The cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 are formed on both sides of the teeth 461c and 462c, and at two positions, the rising position U and the lowering position D, the cylinder A state (cutoff state) in which the non-formation surface 462a is in contact with the surface 461a1 can be formed. Therefore, not only when movement of the operating members 491, 492 in the lowered position D to the rising position U is started, but also when movement of the operating members 491, 492 in the raised position U is started to the lowered position D. Also, momentum (inertia force) can be given to the drive state of the drive motor 430.

  From the state of the rotation angle θ1 shown in FIGS. 27B, 28B and 29A, the open / close first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase to the rotation angle θ0. . Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 27A and 28A, the slip (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 is used. The rotation of the operating member 491, 492 is stopped (that is, the operating member 491, 492 is held at the raised position U), and the second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise). The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 can be reduced to the distance L2 to make the closed operation members 491, 492 open. That is, it is possible to open and close the closed operating members 491 and 492 by executing the opening / closing operation while holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the raised position U.

  As described above, according to the combined operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rear arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) that are rotated (rotated) about the second shaft 427, and those back surfaces Operating members 491 and 492 (second moving members) disposed on the arm 471 and the front arm 472 and opened and closed (opening and closing) in directions approaching and separated from each other; While the rotation of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) is stopped while performing the opening / closing operation) (see FIGS. 28 and 30), the operating members 491, 492 (second moving member) The combined operation of rotating the back arm 471 and the front arm 472 (first moving member) (see FIG. 29) can be executed by one drive motor 430 while stopping the opening / closing operation of .

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when the moving operation of the first moving member and the second moving member is performed by one drive motor, a state where the drive motor generates a driving force and a state where the generation of the driving force is stopped Since the operation mode of the first moving member and the second moving member is switched by forming two driving states, both the first moving member and the second moving member move together or both stop. Only the operation mode of can be formed, and it was not possible to stop the other while moving one of the first moving member or the second moving member. Therefore, in order to move one of the first moving member or the second moving member and stop the other, the driving motor for moving the first moving member and the driving motor for moving the second moving member It was necessary to provide each separately, that is, to provide a total of two drive motors.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, one of the operation members 491, 492 (second moving member) or the back arm 471 and the front arm 472 (first moving member) is operated while the other is operated. Since the operation mode for stopping can be achieved by the drive motor 430 of 1, it is possible to reduce the number of required drive motors 430 while increasing the rendering effect by the movement and stop of the operation members 491, 492 and accordingly reduce the product cost. Can be

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 45, the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined operation unit 600 will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state where the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. FIG. 21 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state in which the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are disposed in the coupling position. Note that the arrangement positions (opposing intervals) of the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined operation unit 600 illustrated in FIGS. 31 and 32 are in a state in which both units 500 and 600 are accommodated in the back case 210. It corresponds to the arrangement position (opposing distance).

  As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the first coupling operation unit 500 includes a first engagement member 539 formed to be vertically movable up and down via a slide mechanism, and the second coupling operation unit 600 is a link. A second coupling operation unit 600 is disposed below the first coupling operation unit 500 at a predetermined interval, and includes a pair of second coupling members 630 formed to be swingable to the left and right through a mechanism. The third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the back side (the back side of the sheet of FIG. 31 and FIG. 32) of the space located between the facing of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600. It will be set up.

  The first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 are shown in FIG. 31 in the retracted position shown in FIG. 31 or in FIG. 32 by raising and lowering and swinging the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630, respectively. Place in the joining position. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 31, the first engagement member 539 is raised, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are separated to the left and right by the inclination of the link mechanism, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) The front side is opened (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the coupled position shown in FIG. 32, the first engagement member 539 is lowered, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought close to each other by the raising of the link mechanism. Two coupling members 630 are disposed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 and coupled to each other (see FIG. 12).

  In this case, according to the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600, the first engagement member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630 arranged adjacent to each other on the left and right sides. The lower surfaces 539 e of the one engagement member 539 abut on the respective upper surfaces 630 a of the pair of second coupling members 630, thereby exerting a force on the pair of second coupling members 630 in a direction of bringing the two approach each other. Thus, not only the lower surface 539e of the first engagement member 539 can be brought into intimate contact with the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, but the opposing surfaces of the pair of second coupling members 630 adjacent to each other are also intimately attached. It can be done. As a result, these coupling members 539 and 630 can be coupled while suppressing formation of a gap between each other. Therefore, the improvement of the rendering effect by combining a plurality of members can be aimed at.

  First, the first combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 41.

  Fig.33 (a) is a front view of the 1st joint operation unit 500, FIG.33 (b) is a bottom view of the 1st joint operation unit 500 in the arrow XXXb direction view of FIG. 33 (a). FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the first coupling operation unit 500, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first coupling operation unit 500. As shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 35, illustration of the raising member 550 and the decoration part 560 is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the first combining operation unit 500 includes a substrate member 510, a drive unit 520 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 and generating a driving force, and the drive unit 520. The slide mechanism 530, which is slide-displaced (lifted) in the vertical direction in response to the drive force generated by the drive unit, and transmits the drive force of the drive unit 520 to the slide mechanism unit 530. First link member 541 disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510, and a second link member disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510 in a posture that is symmetrical to the first link member 541. 542, a pair of bulking members 550 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 across the slide mechanism 530 and a decoration disposed on the front side of the pair of bulking members 550 560, a biasing spring 571 that applies a biasing force to the second link member 542 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 mainly comprises a.

  In addition, the raising member 550 is formed in a box shape whose rear surface side is opened, and the driving unit 520 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 can be accommodated in the internal space of the raising member 550. Thereby, as described later, even when the drive unit 520 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510, the dead space formed on the front side of the substrate member 510 and on the side of the slide mechanism 530 is made effective. This can be utilized, and the miniaturization of the first combined operation unit 500 can be achieved particularly in the front-rear direction (FIG. 33 (b) vertical direction).

  The substrate member 510 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in a front view, and is a rack portion arranged along a pair of guide grooves 511 and one of the pair of guide grooves 511. 512, connection grooves 513 and 514 formed on the left and right with a pair of guide grooves 511, a pivot hole 515 formed on the side of the connection groove 513, and front and back sides of the substrate member 510, respectively. And a support shaft 516 which is provided in a protruding manner.

  The guide groove 511 allows the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism 530 to be inserted from the front side to the back side of the substrate member 510 and allows the insertion shaft 531c and the link members 541 and 542 to be connected on the back side of the substrate member 510. A pair of groove-like openings are formed to extend linearly along the vertical direction while keeping the pair parallel to each other at substantially the center in the width direction of the substrate member 510. The groove width of the guide groove 511 is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 531 c of the slide mechanism 530, and the insertion shaft 531 c can be moved only along the extending direction of the guide groove 511. That is, the slide mechanism portion 530 can be moved (lifted) up and down along the extending direction of the guide groove 511 by the insertion shaft 531 c being guided by the guide groove 511.

  The rack portion 512 is a portion formed as a rack gear in which a plurality of teeth 512 a are engraved in a plane along the extending direction of the guide groove 511, and is fixed to the front side of the substrate member 510. In a state where the slide mechanism 520 is assembled to the substrate member 510, the pinion gear 537 (see FIG. 38) of the slide mechanism 530 is meshed with the teeth 512a of the rack 512. Therefore, when the slide mechanism 530 is moved (lifted) along the extending direction of the guide groove 511, the pinion gear 537 is rotationally driven with the movement of the slide mechanism 530.

  The connection groove 513 is a groove shape for inserting the connection shaft 526 of the drive part 520 from the front side to the back side of the substrate member 510 and connecting the connection shaft 526 and the first link member 541 on the back surface side of the substrate member 510. , And is curved and extended in a circular arc shape which is convex toward the guide groove 511. In detail, the connection groove 513 is formed in a shape in which a part of an annular shape centering on the axial center of the axial support hole 515 is cut away. The connecting groove 513 is set to have a groove width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the connecting shaft 526 of the drive portion 520, and the connecting shaft 526 can be moved only along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513.

  The shaft support hole 515 is an opening for inserting a support shaft 527 for supporting the base end side of the first link member 541, and is disposed on the opposite side of the guide groove 511 across the connection groove 513. As described later, the support shaft 527 is fixed to the case body 521 of the drive unit 520, and the drive unit 520 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510, so that the tip of the support shaft 527 is a support hole. It is projected to the back side of the substrate member 510 via 515. The first link member 541 has its proximal end axially supported by a support shaft 527 that is projected through the support hole 515, and is rotated about the support shaft 527.

  The connection groove 514 is formed by inserting the locking claw 542b of the second link member 542 from the back side to the front side of the substrate member 510 and forming the end of the biasing spring 542 on the locking claw 542b on the front side of the substrate member 510 It is a groove-shaped opening for forming a groove, and is curved and extended in a circular arc shape which is convex toward the guide groove 511. That is, the connection groove 514 is formed as an opening of a size that allows the movement of the locking claw 542 b when the second link member 542 is rotated about the support shaft 516.

  The support shaft 516 is a shaft for supporting the second link member 542 and the biasing spring 571, and as described above, is protruded from the front side and the back side of the substrate member 510, respectively. The support shaft 516 is disposed at a position that is line-symmetrical to the axial support hole 515 with an imaginary straight line passing between the pair of guide grooves 511 as a line of symmetry. The second link member 542 has a base end side (axial support hole 542 a) pivotally supported by a support shaft 516 provided on the back side of the substrate member 510, and is rotated about the support shaft 516. Further, the biasing spring 571 is held by a support shaft 516 provided on the front side of the substrate member 510 in a protruding manner.

  The biasing spring 571 is formed as a torsion coil spring, and the coil portion is held (guided) by the support shaft 516, and one arm portion of the pair of arm portions is engaged with the second link member 542. The other arm is locked to the locking claw 517 of the substrate member 510 by locking to the locking claw 542 b. The biasing spring 571 is disposed in a state in which the pair of arms is elastically deformed in the direction in which the arm portions approach each other, and the elastic recovery force pushes up the locking claw 542 b of the second link member 542 (see FIG. 34 and the upper side of FIG. 35). That is, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 acts in the direction of holding the second link member 542 in the posture shown in FIG. 35 (the posture in which the tip end side is positioned on the upper end side of the guide groove 511).

  The driving unit 520 is a unit for generating a driving force for slidingly moving (lifting) the slide mechanism unit 530 in the vertical direction, and is a front side of the substrate member 510 and to the side of the slide mechanism unit 530. It is arranged. Here, the drive unit 520 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 36 is a rear view of the drive unit 520. FIG. In FIG. 36, the positions of the connection groove 513 and the shaft support hole 515 of the substrate member 510 in a state where the drive unit 520 is assembled to the substrate member 510 are schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the drive unit 520 is a case body 521 and a drive motor 522 disposed on the front side of the case body 521 and causing the drive shaft to protrude to the back side of the case body 521 (FIGS. 35), a pinion gear 523 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 522, and a rotational shaft 524a rotatably engaged with the pinion gear 523 and rotatably supported by a rotation shaft 524a projecting from the back of the case body 521 A crank gear 524, a connecting rod 525 rotatably supported at one end on the crank gear 524 via a rotary shaft 525a, a connecting shaft 526 projecting from the other end of the connecting rod 525, and a case body 521 And a support shaft 527 protruding from the back of the main body. The drive shaft of the drive motor 522, the rotation shafts 524a and 525a, the connecting shaft 526, and the support shaft 527 are disposed in parallel with each other.

  A rotating shaft 525a rotatably supporting one end of the connecting rod 525 to the crank gear 524 is disposed at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft 524a of the crank gear 524, and a connection protruding from the other end of the connecting rod 525 As described above, the shaft 526 is inserted into the connection groove 513 of the substrate member 510 and can be moved only along the extending direction of the connection groove 513. Therefore, the crank gear 524, the rotating shaft 525a and the connecting rod 525 constitute a crank mechanism that converts the rotational movement of the crank gear 524 into the reciprocating movement of the connecting shaft 526 via the connecting rod 525.

  That is, when the pinion gear 523 is rotated by the rotational drive of the drive motor 522 and the crank gear 524 is rotated in one direction (for example, the arrow A1 direction) by the rotation, the connecting shaft 526 extends in the extending direction of the connecting groove 513. When the drive motor 522 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction while the crank gear 524 is rotated in the other direction (the direction of arrow A2), the movement direction of the connecting shaft 526 is reversed. The connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the other direction (arrow B2 direction) along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513.

  In the state where the drive unit 520 (case body 521) is assembled on the front side of the substrate member 510, as described above, the connecting shaft 526 and the support shaft 527 are respectively connected to the connecting groove 513 and the support hole 515 of the substrate member 510. The tip end of the connecting shaft 526 and the tip end of the support shaft 527 are respectively projected to the back side of the substrate member 510 (see FIGS. 34 and 35).

  In this case, the connecting shaft 526 is rotatably connected to the longitudinal direction intermediate portion (connection hole 541b) of the first link member 541, and the support shaft 527 is rotatably connected to the base end portion (axial support hole 541a) of the first link member 541. (See FIG. 35), the connection shaft 526 is displaced along the connection groove 513 by the rotational drive of the drive motor 522 (in the direction of arrow B1 or in the direction of arrow B2) to support the first link member 541 as a support shaft. It can be rotated around 527.

  Referring back to FIG. 33 to FIG. The first link member 541 is a member for connecting the connecting shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 and the insertion shaft 531 c of the slide mechanism unit 530 to transmit the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism unit 530. It is formed in a scale plate shape. The first link member 541 is formed with a pivot hole 541a at the base end, a connection hole 541b at the middle in the longitudinal direction, and a slide hole 541c at the tip opposite to the base end.

  The shaft support hole 541a and the connection hole 541b are formed as circular through holes in a front view, and the shaft support shaft 527 and the connection shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 are rotatably inserted. On the other hand, the slide hole 541 c is formed as a through hole in the form of a long hole in a longitudinal view along the long axis direction of the first link member 541, and can slide along the long hole shape (long axis direction) The insertion shaft 531 c of the slide mechanism 530 is inserted.

  Therefore, when the first link member 541 is rotated about the support hole 541a in the direction to raise the slide hole 541c (in the direction of arrow B1, see FIG. 36), the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism 530 is the substrate member 510 The direction in which the first link member 541 lowers the slide hole 541c with the support hole 541a as the center while being displaced upward along the guide groove 511 and the slide mechanism 530 is raised (arrow B2 direction, see FIG. 36) Then, the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism 530 is displaced downward along the guide groove 511 of the base member 510, and the slide mechanism 530 is lowered (see FIGS. 40 and 41).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the connecting rod 525 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510, and the first link member 541 is disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510. The connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 are provided. Since they are connected (connected) to each other through the connection groove 513 of the substrate member 510, the transmission path of the driving force formed by the connection rod 525 and the first link member 541 (ie, connection with the rotation shaft 524a of the crank gear 524). Length dimension of a portion connecting the shaft 526 (connecting rod 525), and a portion connecting the connecting shaft 526 and the insertion shaft 531c (a portion from the connecting hole 541b to the sliding hole 541c of the first link member 541) ) Will be longer. Therefore, when the driving force of the drive motor 522 is transmitted, the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 may be deformed, and the driving force may not be stably transmitted to the slide mechanism 530 (insertion shaft 531c).

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the base end side (axial support hole 541a) is rotatably supported by the support shaft 527 on the back surface of the substrate member 510 in the first link member 541, the support thereof Using the rigidity of the case body 521 of the drive unit 520 to which the shaft 527 is fixed and the substrate member 510 to which the case body 521 is fastened and fixed, the overall rigidity of the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 is enhanced. Can. As a result, when the driving force of the drive motor 522 is transmitted, deformation of the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 is suppressed, and the driving force is stably transmitted to the slide mechanism 530 (insertion shaft 531c). can do.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first link member 541 (shaft support hole 541a) of the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 is rotatably supported on the substrate member 510, the connecting rod 525 is used as the substrate member 510. As compared with the case of rotatably supporting at the same time, it is possible to shorten the transmission path of the driving force from the portion supported by the base plate member 510 to the slide mechanism 530 (insertion shaft 531c). The transmission to the slide mechanism 530 (insertion shaft 531c) can be further stabilized.

  The second link member 542 is a member for connecting the biasing spring 571 and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism 530 to transmit the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 to the slide mechanism 530, and is a long plate Formed in the shape of Similar to the first link member 541, in the second link member 542, a pivoting hole 542 a and a sliding hole 542 c are formed at the proximal end and the distal end, respectively. The support shaft 516 of the substrate member 510 is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 542a, and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism 530 is inserted into the slide hole 542c. In addition, a locking claw 542 b is formed at a longitudinally intermediate portion of the second link member 542. As described above, the locking claw 542 b is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 via the connection groove 514, and locks the arm of the biasing spring 571.

  Therefore, since the second link member 542 holds the slide mechanism 530 in left-right symmetry with the first link member 541, the slide displacement of the slide mechanism 530 can be stably performed. Further, in the slide mechanism portion 530, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 acts in the rising direction (the direction of raising the tip end of the second link member 542 (the sliding hole 542c)) via the second link member 542. Therefore, when raising the slide mechanism 530, the driving force of the drive unit 520 can be assisted. Thereby, the enlargement of the drive motor 522 can be suppressed.

  A retaining ring E, which is formed as an E-ring, is attached to the support shafts 527 and 516 inserted into the shaft support holes 541a and 542a of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542. In the insertion shafts 531c inserted into the slide holes 541c and 542c of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542, seat surfaces having a diameter larger than the groove width of the slide holes 541c and 542c A fastening screw having a head or a washer is fastened (see FIG. 35).

  Here, with respect to the first link member 541, the attachment of the retaining ring E as a retaining member or the fastening of the fastening screw is omitted with respect to the connection shaft 526 inserted into the connection hole 541 b of the first link member 541. That is, by attaching two of the three shafts (the support shaft 527 and the insertion shaft 531c) to the retention prevention, the retention for the remaining one (the coupling shaft 526) can be omitted. The number of parts required for retaining can be reduced. In particular, two shafts on the proximal end side and the distal end side of the first link member 541 which is long are prevented from coming off, and the shaft from a position intermediate between the proximal end and the distal side is prevented from coming off The first link member 451 can be stably rotated while suppressing the shaft (connection shaft 526) whose omission of the retaining is omitted from coming out of the connection hole 541b.

  As described above, the slide mechanism 530 is a mechanism that slides (moves up and down) in the vertical direction along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and lowers the first engagement member 539 to a predetermined position. , And coupled to the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 (see FIG. 32). Here, the slide mechanism 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. FIG.

  FIG. 37 (a) is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism 530, and FIG. 37 (b) is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism 530. FIG. 38 is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism 530 in a front view of the slide mechanism 530 disassembled, and FIG. 39 is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism 530 in a rear view of the slide mechanism 530 in a disassembled state. is there.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the slide mechanism 530 includes an A layer base plate 531, a B layer base plate 532 and a B layer decorative body 533, a C layer base plate 534 and a C layer decorative body 535, (1) A pinion gear 537, a second pinion gear 538, and a first coupling member 539. The driving force transmitted from the drive unit 520 via the first link member 541 slides the first coupling member 539 up and down ( Raise and lower).

  According to the slide mechanism 530 of this embodiment, two sets of double rack and pinion structures are interposed between the A layer base plate 531 and the first coupling member 539, and the first link member 541 to the A layer base are provided. The driving force received by the plate 531 is transmitted to the first coupling member 539 via the two sets of double rack and pinion structures to accelerate the slide displacement (raising and lowering) of the first coupling member 539. Configured to be

  The A layer base plate 531 has a main body portion 531a formed in a rectangular plate shape long in a front view, and a guide groove 531b which is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 531a. A plurality of (6 in total in the present embodiment) insertion shafts 531c protruding from the back of the main body 531a and juxtaposed on the left and right across the guide groove 531b, and protruding toward the front of the main body 531a And a support shaft 531d rotatably supporting the first pinion gear 537.

  The A layer base plate 531 inserts a plurality of insertion shafts 531c into the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 510, and the collar C having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide grooves 511 at the tip of the inserted insertion shafts 531c. Is fixed to the substrate member 510 so as to be slidably displaceable (elevated) on the substrate member 510 (see FIG. 35). In this case, the first pinion gear 537 pivotally supported by the support shaft 531 d is meshed with the rack portion 512 of the substrate member 510.

  In the present embodiment, two insertion shafts 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are inserted into the slide holes 541c and 542c of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 as described above. Tighten the fastening screw at the tip of the top as a retainer.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are respectively located on the upper side (upper side in FIG. 39) than the middle in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 39) of the A layer base plate 531. Therefore, as described later, when the slide mechanism unit 530 is inclined forward by the weight of itself on the front side of the substrate member 510, the forwardly inclined posture is set to the collar C, the first link member 541 and the first link member 541 The two link members 542 can be effectively regulated, and as a result, the slide mechanism 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be slide displaced (lifted) in a stable state.

  The B layer base plate 532 has a main body portion 532a formed in a rectangular plate shape long in a front view, a plurality of insertion holes 532b formed through the main body portion 532a, and a plurality of protruding portions from the back surface of the main body portion 532a. And a rack portion 532d having a plurality of teeth engraved as a rack gear along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 532a.

  The B layer base plate 532 inserts a plurality of insertion shafts 532c into the guide grooves 531b of the A layer base plate 531, and fastens fastening screws to the distal ends of the inserted insertion shafts 532c as removal stoppers. It is held by the A layer base plate 531 so as to be capable of sliding displacement (raising and lowering).

  In this case, the rack portion 532d disposed on the side surface of the B layer base plate 532 (body portion 532a) is meshed with the first pinion gear 537 pivotally supported by the A layer base plate 531 (support shaft 531d). That is, the first pinion gear 537 is meshed with both the rack portion 512 of the substrate member 510 and the rack portion 532 d of the B layer base plate 532 to form a first set of double rack and pinion structure. Therefore, when the A layer base plate 531 is slide-displaced (lifted) with respect to the substrate member 510, the B layer base plate 532 is attached to the A layer base plate 531 via the first set of double rack and pinion structures. Slide displacement (lifting). That is, the B layer base plate 532 is slide-displaced (lifted) with respect to the substrate member 510 in a state in which the speed is increased more than that of the A layer base plate 531.

  The B-layer decorative body 533 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is viewed by the player from the front side, is fixed to the B-layer base plate 532, and is slide displacement (lifting) integrally with the B-layer base plate 532 Be done. Specifically, the B-layer decorative body 533 includes a plurality of insertion shafts 533a protruding from the back surface, and fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 532b of the B-layer base plate 532 are fastened to the insertion shafts 533a. As a result, it is fixed to the front side of the B layer base plate 532.

  The plurality of insertion shafts 533a of the B layer decorative body 533 are fixed to the B layer base plate 532 after being inserted into the guide grooves 539b of the first coupling member 539 and the guide grooves 534 b of the C layer base plate 534. . In this case, one insertion shaft 532a of the plurality of insertion shafts 532a of the B-layer decorative body 533 rotatably supports the second pinion gear 538. Therefore, when the B layer decorative body 533 and the B layer base plate 532 are slide-displaced (lifted) with respect to the A-layer base plate 531, the second pinion gear 538 is also slide-displaced with respect to the A-layer base plate 531 (lifted ).

  The C layer base plate 534 has a main portion 534a formed in a rectangular plate shape elongated in a front view, and a guide groove 534b which is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main portion 534a. A plurality of insertion holes 534c formed through the main body 534a, and a rack 534d in which a plurality of teeth are engraved as a rack gear along the guide groove 534b on the front side of the main body 532a.

  The C layer decorative body 535 is a member for forming a decorative portion visually recognized by the player from the front side, is fixed to the C layer base plate 534, and is slide displacement (lifting) integrally with the C layer base plate 534. Be done. In detail, the C layer decorative body 535 includes a plurality of insertion shafts 535a protruding from the back surface thereof, and fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 534c of the C layer base plate 534 are fastened to the insertion shafts 535a. Thus, it is fixed to the front side of the C layer base plate 534.

  The first coupling member 539 is a member for forming a decorative portion visually recognized by the player from the front side, and in contact with the pair of second coupling members 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 to form a coupling state 32 (see FIG. 32), a main body portion 539a formed in a rectangular plate shape long in a front view, and a guide groove 539b which is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 539a A decorative portion 539c continuously provided below the main body portion 534a, and a rack portion 539d in which a plurality of teeth are engraved as a rack gear along the guide groove 539b on the back surface side of the main body portion 532a.

  The lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (the decorative portion 539c) is formed by combining two flat surfaces that are inclined downward toward the center. That is, the first coupling member 539 (decorative portion 539c) is formed in an inverted V shape in which the center projects in the downward direction (the downward direction in FIG. 38) in a front view shape (see FIGS. 40 and 41). ). The lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (the decorative portion 539c) is in contact with the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 in the coupling position as described above (see FIG. 32).

  Further, in the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539, a concave portion 539e1 having a rectangular shape in a front view horizontal shape is recessed at the center. A convex portion 630a1 protruding from the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 is accommodated (concave / convex fitting) in the concave portion 539e1 at the coupling position. By this concavo-convex fitting, relative displacement (longitudinal direction and left-right direction) of the pair of second coupling members 630 with respect to the first coupling member 539 can be restricted at the coupling position.

  In the C layer base plate 534 and the first coupling member 539, a plurality of insertion shafts 533a of the B layer decorative body 533 are respectively inserted into the guide grooves 534b and 539b of the C layer base plate 534 and the first coupling member 539. And the B layer decorative body 533 and the B layer base plate 532 are held so as to be capable of sliding displacement (raising and lowering).

  In this case, a rack portion 534d in which the second pinion gear 538 pivotally supported by the insertion shaft 533a of the B-layer decorative body 533 is disposed on the front side of the C-layer base plate 534 (main portion 534a); A rack 539d disposed on the back side of the main body 539a is meshed with the rack 539d to form a second set of double rack and pinion structures. Therefore, when the B layer base plate 532 (and the B layer decoration 533) is slide-displaced (lifted up and down) with respect to the A layer base plate 531, the first coupling member is engaged via the second set of double rack and pinion mechanisms. 539 is slid relative to the B layer base plate 532 (and the B layer decoration 533). That is, the first coupling member 539 is slide-displaced (lifted) with respect to the substrate member 510 in a state in which the speed is increased relative to that of the B-layer base plate 532.

  Referring back to FIG. 33 to FIG. As described above, in the first coupling member 500, the slide mechanism 530 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510, and a plurality (the present embodiment) is projected from the back surface of the slide mechanism 530 (A layer base plate 531). In the embodiment, six insertion shafts 531c are inserted into the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 510, respectively, and a part (four) of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c inserted therein are collars C. The remaining (two) insertion shafts 531 c are connected to the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 (see FIG. 35) while being attached as a retainer.

  Here, also in the conventional game machine, the moving member (corresponding to the slide mechanism 530) is provided with a plurality of insertion shafts (corresponding to the insertion shaft 531c), and the plurality of insertion shafts correspond to the substrate member (substrate member 510). It is known that the moving member is slide-displaced along the guide groove by the driving force of the drive means (corresponding to the drive unit 520).

  In this case, in order to stably perform the slide displacement of the moving member, it is preferable to increase the number of insertion shafts to be inserted into the guide groove. On the other hand, when the number of insertion shafts is increased, the number of parts (corresponding to the collar C) for holding the insertion shafts (preventing removal from the guide groove) also increases, and the cost increases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a method of reducing the cost while making it possible to stabilize the slide displacement of the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first link member 541 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism 530 (A layer base plate 531) is disposed on the front side where the slide mechanism 530 is disposed. The first link member 541 is disposed on the back surface side of the substrate member 510 opposite to the first one, and the first link member 541 is attached to the insertion shaft 531c of one of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c projected from the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510. Since the connection is performed, one collar C of the plurality of collars C for stopping the removal of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c from the guide groove 511 can be used as the first link member 541. As a result, the number of the insertion shafts 531c is secured, and stabilization of the slide displacement of the slide mechanism 530 (A layer base plate 531) is achieved, and a component of a part (color C) for holding the insertion shafts 531c The cost can be reduced by reducing the number of points.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the second link member 542 and the guide groove 511 with respect to the first link member 541 are provided on the back side of the substrate member 510 opposite to the front side where the slide mechanism 530 is disposed. Since the second link member 542 is connected to one of the insertion shafts 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c protruding from the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, the first link member Not only can an effect (stabilization of slide displacement of the slide mechanism 530) be achieved by making the support reaction force received by the slide mechanism 530 from the 541 and the second link member 542 symmetrical, among the plurality of collars C The second link member 542 can also be used as the first color C, so that the number of insertion shafts 531c can be secured. While enabling stabilization of the sliding displacement of over scan plate 531), to reduce the number of parts (color C) for holding the insertion axis 531c, can be further achieved that a reduction in cost.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by arranging the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 on the back side of the substrate member 510, the slide displacement is stabilized and the cost is reduced. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 520 includes the crank mechanism (crank gear 524, connecting rod 525 and connecting shaft 526) and the connecting groove 513 is formed in the substrate member 510 so that the connecting groove 513 is interposed. By connecting the connecting shaft 526 to the first link member 541, the drive unit 520 can be disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510. Thus, the components of the first coupling operation unit 500 can be concentrated on the front side of the substrate member 510, so that the arrangement of each component can be efficiently performed by effectively utilizing the limited space. As a result, the first coupling operation unit 500 can be miniaturized.

  In particular, in the first combined operation unit 500, since the decorative portion 560 is disposed on the front side of the slide mechanism 530, the slide mechanism 530 and the decorative portion 560 are in the front-rear direction (FIG. 33 (b) vertical direction) And the dimensions in the front and back direction increase accordingly. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, since the drive unit 520 can be disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510, the drive unit 520 is on the front side of the substrate member 510. It can be disposed in a dead space formed on the side of the slide mechanism 530. That is, two elements of relatively large dimensions of the slide mechanism portion 530 and the drive portion 520 can be juxtaposed in the left-right direction. As a result, the dead space in the limited space can be effectively used to miniaturize the first combined operation unit 500, particularly in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 33B).

  Furthermore, in this case, according to the present embodiment, the first link member 541 is formed in a flat plate shape, and the first link member 541 is centered on the support shaft 527 on the back surface side of the substrate member 510. Since the structure is rotated, the space for the movement of the first link member 541 can be planar. That is, the space for movement of the first link member 541 can be secured by the planar space on the back side of the substrate member 510, and it is necessary to secure it as a large space in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B). There is no Accordingly, also from this point, the first coupling operation unit 500 can be miniaturized particularly in the front-rear direction.

  The same applies to the second link member 542, and by using the connection groove 514, the biasing spring 571 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 to effectively utilize the above-mentioned dead space. The space for movement of the second link member 542 can also be planar, and as a result, the first coupling operation unit 500 can be miniaturized particularly in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 33B). it can.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41, the operation of the first combined operation unit 500 will be described. 34 to 39 will be referred to as appropriate in this description.

  FIG. 40 (a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 40 (b) is a layout of the first coupling member 539 at the retracted position. FIG. 18 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 500 in the closed state. FIG. 41 (a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 in a state in which the first coupling member 539 is disposed at the coupling position, and FIG. 41 (b) is a layout of the first coupling member 539 at the coupling position. FIG. 18 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 500 in the closed state. 40 and 41, illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate the understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), when the first coupling member 539 is in the retracted position, rotation of the crank gear 524 in the direction of arrow A1 causes the connecting rod 525 in the drive unit 520. Connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of arrow B1 (see FIG. 36), and the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 raise the slide holes 541c and 542c centering on the pivot holes 541a and 542a. It is disposed in a posture rotated in the direction (upward in FIG. 40 (b)). Therefore, the A layer base plate 531 (FIGS. 38 and 39) of the slide mechanism 530 is disposed on the upper end side (upper side in FIG. 40B) of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and the first coupling member 539 is lifted. A state (with the retracted position placed) is formed.

  In this case, as described above, the urging force of the urging spring 571 is applied to the second link member 542. The biasing force of the biasing spring 571 is such that the posture of the second link member 542 is rotated in the direction shown in FIG. 40B (that is, the sliding hole 542c is raised about the pivot hole 542a). Acts in the direction of holding it). Therefore, the first coupling member 539 can be stably held at the retracted position shown in FIG. 40 (a). In particular, an external force (for example, an external force generated by a player hitting or swinging a gaming machine) is applied to the first coupling member 539 that should be in the stopped state at the retracted position, and the first coupling member 539 is vertically moved. Even when vibration is generated, the vibration of the first coupling member 539 in the vertical direction can be rapidly converged using the biasing force of the biasing spring 571.

  When the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of arrow B2 through the connecting rod 525 by the rotation of the crank gear 524 in the direction of arrow A2 in the drive unit 520 from the states shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b). (Refer to FIG. 36) The first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are rotated in the direction to lower the sliding holes 541 c, 542 c about the pivot holes 541 a, 542 a (downward in FIG. 40 (b)). . As a result, the A layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism 530 is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms are operated (FIG. 38 and FIG. 39), the first coupling member 539 is lowered.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), in the direction in which the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 lower the sliding holes 541c, 542c centering on the support holes 541a, 542a. The first connecting member is further rotated, and the A layer base plate 531 (insertion shaft 531c) of the slide mechanism 530 is disposed on the lower end side (the lower side in FIG. 41B) of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510. A state in which 539 is lowered (the coupling position is placed) is formed.

  41A and 41B, the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of arrow B1 via the connecting rod 525 by the rotation of the crank gear 524 in the direction of arrow A1 in the drive unit 520 from the state shown in FIGS. Thus (see FIG. 36), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 move the slide holes 541c and 542c upward with respect to the pivot holes 541a and 542a (upward in FIG. 41B). It is rotated. As a result, the A layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism 530 is raised along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms are operated (FIG. 38 and FIG. 39), the first coupling member 539 is lifted. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), the first coupling member 539 is disposed (returned) to the retracted position.

  According to the present embodiment, since the slide mechanism 530 is configured to slide and displace the first coupling member 539 in the vertical direction via the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms, the sliding displacement of the first coupling member 539 is It can be speeded up. On the other hand, when raising the first coupling member 539 from the coupling position shown in FIG. 41 (a) to the retracted position of FIG. 40 (a), not only the first coupling member 539 but also the slide mechanism 530 Since each of the component members also needs to be lifted against the action of gravity, the load on the drive motor 522 (see FIGS. 34 and 35) increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 indicates the posture of the second link member 542 in the posture shown in FIG. The sliding hole 542 c is operated in the direction of holding it in the posture rotated in the direction to raise it. Therefore, when raising the first coupling member 539 from the coupled position shown in FIG. 41A to the retracted position shown in FIG. 40A against the action of gravity, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 is assisted. Since it can be used as a force, the drive power required for the drive motor 522 of the drive unit 520 can be reduced accordingly, and the capacity can be miniaturized.

  Here, the substrate member 510 is disposed in a posture in which the extending direction of the guide groove 511 is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIGS. 40 and 41). In detail, the lower end side of the guide groove 511 is projected to the front side (front side, front side in FIG. 40A) of the substrate member 510 (the upper end side of the guide groove 511 is the back side of the substrate member 510 40 (a) (backward side in FIG. 40 (a))). Thus, the slide mechanism 530 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 is inclined forward so as to fall in a direction away from the front of the base member 510 (forward side) by its own weight. Since the load on the collar C can be reduced accordingly, the durability can be improved.

  However, since the slide mechanism 530 is configured by superposing the respective elements (for example, the A layer base plate 531, the B layer base plate 532, the C layer base plate 534, etc.) When the inclination is made too large, the elements of the slide mechanism 530 tend to be in close contact with each other, and the sliding resistance at the time of the slide displacement becomes large. Therefore, the above-mentioned inclination can not be made large enough, so the collar C is subjected to a relatively large load.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the substrate member 510 is interposed between the slide mechanism 530 and the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 connected (connected) to the insertion shaft 531 c of the slide mechanism 530. Therefore, the forward tilting posture of the slide mechanism 530 can be regulated not only by the collar C but also by the first link member 541 and the second link member 542. As a result, the load on the collar C can be suppressed, and the durability thereof can be improved, and the slide mechanism portion 530 can be slide displaced (lifted) in a stable state.

  In particular, as described above, the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are respectively positioned above the longitudinal center of the A layer base plate 531 (see FIG. 39). Therefore, when the slide mechanism 530 is in a forwardly inclined posture toward the front on the front side of the substrate member 510 due to its own weight, the forwardly inclined posture is determined by the collar C, the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 As a result, the slide mechanism 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be slide-displaced (lifted) in a stable state.

  Next, the second combined operation unit 600 disposed below the first combined operation unit 500 (see FIGS. 31 and 32) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 42 is a front perspective view of the second coupling operation unit 600. FIG. FIG. 43 (a) is a front view of the second coupling operation unit 600, and FIG. 43 (b) is a rear view of the second coupling operation unit 600. In FIG. 43 (a), the illustration of the front case body 612 is omitted. FIGS. 42 and 43 illustrate a state in which the pair of second coupling members 630 is retracted to the retraction position.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the second coupling operation unit 600 is rotatably supported at its base end on the back case body 611 and the front case body 612, and the back case body 611 and the front case body 612, respectively. Link means (inner link member 621 and outer link member 622), a second coupling member 630 rotatably supported at the distal end side of the inner link member 621 and outer link member 622, and an inner link member 621. And a drive motor 640 for generating a driving force for displacing the outer link member 622, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 640 to the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 (pinion gear 651 and transmission gear And 652).

  In the present embodiment, a pair of the link means, the second coupling member 630, the drive motor 640, and the transmission means is disposed on the left and right sides of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 respectively. . In this case, a set disposed on the left side of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 and a set disposed on the right side are the width direction of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 (FIG. 43 (a) left and right Direction) Since the configuration is substantially the same except for a point formed substantially symmetrically with respect to an imaginary line passing through the center and a point that the shape of the decorative portion is different, the same reference numerals are given and described.

  The back case body 611 and the front case body 612 are members respectively formed in a plate shape from a resin material, and are fastened and fixed to face each other with a predetermined distance therebetween, and link means (internal space) The inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) and the transmission means (pinion gear 651 and transmission gear 652) are accommodated.

  The back case body 611 is formed with a pair of guide grooves 611 a curved in an arc shape. The guide groove 611a is curved in an arc around a base end shaft 621a described later (that is, it is formed in a shape obtained by cutting a part of an annular shape around the base end shaft 621a), and the inner link member 621 is formed. A collar 621 d rotatably supported at the back of the housing is internally fitted. The groove width of the guide groove 611a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the collar 621d. Therefore, as described later, when the inner link member 621 is rotated about the proximal end shaft 621a, the collar 621d is guided along the extending direction of the guide groove 611a, so that the inner link member 621 ( And the rotation of the outer link member 622) can be stabilized. As a result, the positional accuracy of the second coupling member 630 at the coupling position can be enhanced.

  The inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 have their proximal ends rotatably supported by the rear case body 611 and the front case body 612 via the base end shafts 621a and 622a, while the tip end side thereof is the tip shaft 621b, It is rotatably supported by the second coupling member 630 via 622b.

  In this case, in the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622, the distance between the proximal shaft 621a and the proximal shaft 622a is equal to the distance between the distal shaft 621b and the distal shaft 622b, and the proximal shaft 621a The distance between the distal end shaft 621b and the distance between the proximal end shaft 622a and the distal end shaft 622b are equalized to form a parallel link mechanism. Therefore, when the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 are rotated about the proximal end shafts 621a and 622a, the second coupling member 630 is parallel without having a rotation center (that is, illustrated in FIG. 43A). (With keeping the posture)

  The second coupling member 630 is a member that forms a decorative portion visually recognized by the player from the front side and is coupled to the first coupling member 539 in the coupling position (see FIG. 32), and the lower surface of the first coupling member 539 An upper surface 630a to be abutted against 539e and an opposing surface 630b to be abutted against each other when the other second coupling member 630 is adjacent to each other are formed.

  In the front view of the second coupling member 630 shown in FIG. 43, the upper surface 630a is formed as a flat surface which inclines downward toward the opposing surface 630b, and the opposing surface 630b is formed as a flat surface parallel to the vertical direction Be done. Therefore, when the opposing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630 abut each other in the coupling position, the front view shape on the upper surface 630a side of the pair of second coupling members 630 has a V shape in which the center is recessed. It is formed in a shape (see FIG. 44 (b)). As described above, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (the decorative portion 539c) is in contact with the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 as described above (see FIG. 32).

  Further, on the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, convex portions 630a1 each having a rectangular shape in a front view horizontally long shape are provided so as to protrude on the opposing surface 630b side. The convex portion 630a1 is accommodated (concave and convexly fitted) in a concave portion 539e1 which is concavely provided on the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 at the coupling position. By the concavo-convex fitting, as described above, the relative displacement (the front-rear direction and the left-right direction) of the pair of second coupling members 630 with respect to the first coupling member 539 can be regulated at the coupling position. Here, the thickness dimension of the convex portion 630a1 is made smaller toward the tip of the protrusion. Therefore, when the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 are coupled (abutted) to the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539, the convex portions 630a1 can be easily inserted (internally fitted) into the concave portions 539e1. it can.

  A gear portion 621 c is integrally formed on the proximal end side of the inner link member 621. The gear portion 621c is a portion formed in a fan shape that protrudes radially outward around the base end shaft 621a, and a plurality of teeth are cut on the outer peripheral surface of the fan shape. A transmission gear 652, which will be described later, is meshed with the gear portion 621c.

  The drive motor 640 is disposed on the back side of the back case body 611, and a pinion gear 651 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 640 which is projected to the front side of the back case body 611. The transmission gear 652 is engaged with the pinion gear 651, and the gear portion 621 c of the inner link member 621 is engaged with the transmission gear 652 as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the operation of the second combined operation unit 600 will be described. In this description, FIG. 43 (a) will be referred to as appropriate.

  FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b) are front views of the 2nd joint operation unit 600, and illustration of front case body 612 is omitted. In FIG. 44 (a), the pair of second coupling members 630 is disposed at the coupling position in FIG. 44 (b). The respective states are illustrated respectively.

  In the retracted position shown in FIG. 43 (a), the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) are respectively tilted in the direction away from each other, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are separated left and right. When the left and right drive motors 640 are respectively rotationally driven from the state (retracted position) shown in FIG. 43A and the pinion gear 651 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted via the transmission gear 652 to the gear portion 621c of the inner link member 621. The gear portion 621c is rotated about the base end shaft 621a. As a result, the left and right inner link members 621 are respectively rotated about the proximal end shaft 621a, and as shown in FIG. 44 (a), the left and right link mechanisms (inner link member 621 and outer link member 622) approach each other. Stand up in the direction.

  When the left and right drive motors 640 are further rotationally driven from the state shown in FIG. 44 (a), the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) approach each other as shown in FIG. Further, the pair of second coupling members 630 are disposed at the coupling position. That is, the pair of second coupling members 630 are laterally adjacent to each other, and the opposing surfaces 630b are in contact with each other. On the other hand, from the state shown in FIG. 44 (b), when the drive motor 640 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction to that described above, the direction in which the left and right link mechanisms (inner link member 621 and outer link member 622) separate from each other As shown in FIG. 43 (a), the pair of second coupling members 630 is retracted to the retracted position.

  Referring back to FIGS. 31 and 32, the combined operation of the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined operation unit 600 will be described. In this description, FIG. 45 is referred to as appropriate. FIG. 45 is a model view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 as viewed from the front in a state in which the first coupling member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged in the coupling position.

  As described above, the coupling of the first coupling member 539 of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 is performed from the state (retracted position) shown in FIG. The members 630 are arranged close to each other by raising the link mechanism and arranged adjacent to each other on the left and right, and the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630 arranged adjacent to the right and left as shown in FIG. The lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, as shown in FIG.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 45, in the first combining operation unit 500 and the second combining operation unit 600, the inclination angle of the lower surface 539e of the first combining member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second combining member 630 with respect to the horizontal plane is θ It is assumed. Therefore, when the first coupling member 539 is lowered (slide displacement) along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 45), the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 acts on the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630. Force F in the vertical direction is a force component Fv (= F × cos θ) in a direction perpendicular to the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a, and a force component Fp (= F × sin θ) in a direction parallel to the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a. It can be disassembled. Here, the force F is approximated as a concentrated load acting on the center in the width direction of the upper surface 630 a of the second coupling member 630.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the angle θ with respect to the horizontal surface of the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a is set to be smaller than the angle α with respect to the vertical direction of the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the acting direction of the force component Fv is extended starting from the center in the width direction of the upper surface 630a, the extension line is inside the proximal shaft 622a of the outer link member 622 (the inner link member 621 Is formed so as to pass through the proximal end shaft 621a).

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 45, in the coupling position, the pair of second coupling members 630 are disposed adjacent to each other in the left and right direction, and a direction substantially perpendicular to the adjacent direction of the pair of second coupling members 630 (vertical 45, the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the second coupling member 630, and the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630. Thus, a force can be generated in the direction in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought close to each other in the adjacent direction. As a result, not only the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 can be coupled, but also the opposing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630 can be coupled together. The effect of combining the first coupling member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630) can be secured.

  That is, even in the conventional gaming machine, the pair of members is provided movably, and the pair of members is retracted to different retraction positions, and moved from the different retraction positions to be disposed at the coupling position. There exist some which couple the members of (For example, refer Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-115300). In this case, when the coupling is not properly performed, for example, a gap is formed between the pair of members at the coupling position, the rendering effect by coupling the pair of members is lost. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the pair of members is symmetrical, it is relatively easy to couple the pair of members face to face, but three or more members are properly That is, it has been difficult to combine them while suppressing the generation of gaps.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 abuts on the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 at the coupling position, the pair of Since a force can be formed in the direction to make the second coupling members 630 approach each other in the adjacent direction, a gap is generated between the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630. As well as suppressing the occurrence of gaps between the opposing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630, these respective members can be coupled to one another. That is, three or more members can be properly coupled, and the effect of the combination can be secured.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 45, the pair of second coupling members 630 have a front view shape (FIGS. 32 and 45) on the upper surface 630a side (upper side in FIGS. 32 and 45). The first connecting member 539 is a front view on the lower surface 539e side (the lower side in FIGS. 32 and 45) while the shape shown in the drawing is a concave shape in which the center is recessed downward (FIGS. 32 and 45 lower). The shape (the shape illustrated in FIGS. 32 and 45) is a protruding shape whose center protrudes downward (the lower side in FIGS. 32 and 45) corresponding to the shape of the pair of second coupling members 630.

  Therefore, as described above, at the reference position, the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630, and the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is at the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630. When in contact with each other, the first coupling member 539 is inserted between the pair of second coupling members 630 due to the concave shape and the projecting shape, and the first coupling member 539 is the pair of second coupling members 630. In a direction away from each other (that is, a mode in which a gap is formed between the opposing surfaces 630b) is recalled to the player.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 abuts on each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 in the coupling position, whereby the pair of second coupling members The pair of second coupling members 630 can be coupled while suppressing generation of a gap between the opposing surfaces 630b by forming a force in the direction of bringing the 630 into close proximity with each other. As a result, it is possible to operate in a mode different from the player's expectation, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57, the annular operation unit 700 will be described.

  FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the annular operation unit 700 in a state in which the ring forming member 790 is disposed in the retracted position, and FIG. 47 is a ring in a state in which the ring forming member 790 is disposed in the coupling position. FIG. 16 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 700.

  As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the annular operation unit 700 includes a pair of annular forming members 790 that are moved up and down and rotated through the link member 770, and as described above, the opening 211a (the third symbol display It is disposed on the back case 210 at a position below the device 81 (see FIG. 2) and on the back side of the rotational operation unit 300 (see FIGS. 6 to 9). The ring operation unit 700 raises and lowers the pair of ring forming members 790 while rotating and places them in the retracted position shown in FIG. 46 or the coupled position shown in FIG.

  At the retracted position shown in FIG. 46, the pair of ring forming members 790 are lowered while being separated left and right, and the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is opened (FIG. 6) reference). On the other hand, at the coupling position shown in FIG. 47, the pair of ring forming members 790 are rotated upward in a direction approaching each other, and are raised upward, and the pair of ring forming members 790 are coupled to each other. An annular shape is formed on the front side of 81 (see FIG. 10).

  In this case, according to the ring operation unit 700, when the pair of ring forming members 790 are lifted upward and arranged in the bonding position, the ring forming members 790 are mechanically moved to the bonding position (raised position). Thus, the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to hold the pair of ring forming members 790 in the coupled position can be reduced.

  FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the annular operation unit 700 in a front view of the disassembled annular operation unit 700, and FIG. 49 is a decomposition of the annular operation unit 700 in a rear view of the disassembled annular operation unit 700. It is a rear perspective view.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the annular operation unit 700 includes an intermediate case body 710, a back case body 720 disposed on the back side of the middle case body 710, and an opposite side of the back case 720. A front case body 730 disposed on the front side of the intermediate case body 710, a drive motor 740 disposed in the intermediate case 710 and generating a rotational drive force, and transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive motor 740 Gear group (first gear 751 to sixth gear 756), a rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 761 and a pair of racks 762) for converting rotational motion transmitted through the gear group into linear motion, and A pair of link members 770 whose proximal ends are rotatably supported at a pair of racks 762 in the rack and pinion mechanism, and the pair of link members 770 An elevating base member 780 whose tip is axially supported, proximal to the elevating base member 780 is formed mainly includes a pair of annular member 790 which is rotatably supported.

  The middle case body 710 rotatably and slidably holds the gear group and the rack and pinion mechanism between the middle case body 710 and the rear case body 720 disposed on the rear side, and the front case body disposed on the front side It is a member which holds the proximal end of the link member 770 so as to be slidably displaceable between it and 730, and a main body 711 formed in a flat rectangular shape with a rectangular shape in a front view and an insertion groove 712 where the opening of the main body 711 is formed. And a projecting portion 713 projecting upward from the upper edge of the main body 711.

  The insertion grooves 712 respectively insert the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 disposed on the front side of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711), and the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 inserted therein. A groove-shaped opening for inserting each of the insertion holes 762 c of the pair of racks 762 on the back side of the main body 711 is linearly extended along the longitudinal direction of the main body 711. The width of the insertion groove 712 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770.

  The overhanging portion 713 is a portion that abuts on the back surface of the link member 770 to suppress the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction (for example, the vertical direction in FIG. 56). Is formed in a substantially triangular shape in a front view, which is extended in an upward direction from the overhanging tip toward the upper edge of the main body 711 (the width becomes wide), and the front surface 713 a of the main body 711 is It is formed to be flush (smoothly connected without any step and parallel to each other).

  Therefore, as described later, when the link member 770 is rotated (displaced) toward the upright state, the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 abuts on the back surface of the link member 770 (FIG. 47 and FIG. 56). See also) When the link member 770 is in the upright state, the link member 770 can be sandwiched between the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 and the column portion 732 of the case body 730 (see FIG. 47). . Thus, the link member 770 can be in contact with the link member 770 in the erected state where the posture of the link member 770 tends to be particularly unstable and in the vicinity thereof, so that the swaying of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed.

  The edge of the overhanging portion 713 is curved in an arc shape in a front view. Therefore, the area of the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 that can be abutted to the back surface of the link member 770 can be enlarged as the link member 770 is erected (that is, as the posture becomes unstable easily), While swaying of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed, the area in which the overhanging portion 713 is viewed from the front can be further reduced to suppress the loss of the appearance.

  In addition, a head 713b formed at the end in the projecting direction (the upper side in FIGS. 48 and 49) of the overhanging portion 713 projects to the front (forward), and the head 713b is a front case body 730 described later. It is connected to the top of the column 732. Therefore, as described later, when the pair of link members 770 are erected upright, the head portion 713b of the overhanging portion 713 is interposed between the pair of link members 770 facing each other.

  The rear case body 720 is a member that rotatably and slidably holds the gear group and the rack and pinion mechanism with the intermediate case body 710, and has a main body portion 721 formed in a flat rectangular shape in a front view horizontally long shape; An insertion groove 722 formed in the main body 721 and a front end guide groove 723 and a rear end guide groove 724 parallelly arranged parallel to the insertion groove 722 and a gear group (second gear 752 to sixth gear 756) And a plurality of shafts 725 rotatably supporting the pinion gears 761 respectively.

  The insertion groove 722 is the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770 which protrudes from the rear surface of the rack 762 (that is, the insertion shaft 772 inserted into the insertion hole 762 c of the rack 762 through the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 710). It is a groove-shaped opening for receiving, and linearly extends along the longitudinal direction of the main body 721. That is, the insertion groove 722 is formed at a position overlapping the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 710 in a front view in the assembled state. The width of the insertion groove 722 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770.

  The front end guide groove 723 and the rear end guide groove 724 are groove-shaped openings for inserting the front end guide piece 762 a and the rear end guide shaft 762 b of the rack 762 and regulating the moving direction thereof. It is juxtaposed in parallel with the insertion groove 722 with a predetermined interval therebetween. The width of the leading end guide groove 723 is set to be smaller than the groove width of the trailing end guide groove 724, and the trailing end guide shaft 762b of the rack 762 can not be inserted into the leading end guide groove 723. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the assembling failure when assembling the rack 762 to the rear case body 720, and it is possible to improve the workability of the assembling operation.

  The front case body 730 is a member that holds the pair of link members 770 in a slidable manner between the front case body 710 and the middle case body 710, and has a main body portion 731 formed in a flat rectangular shape in a front view horizontal rectangle And a columnar column 732 extending along the vertical direction.

  The back surface 731a of the main body 731 is formed as a flat surface parallel to the front surface 711a of the main body 711 and the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 in the intermediate case body 710, and the link member 770 is inclined as described later. When it is rotated (displaced) between the standing state, the back surface 731a of the main body 731 and the front surface 711a of the main body 711 and the front surface 713a of the overhang portion 713 are Let it abut. Thus, the link member 770 can be rotated (displaced) between the inclined state and the upright state while effectively suppressing the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction (for example, the vertical direction in FIG. 54). it can.

  The column portion 732 is a portion for holding the guide rod 733 inside and sandwiching the link member 770 with the overhang portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710, and the front surface (the left front side in FIG. It is formed in a box shape. The guide rod 733 is a member for guiding the lifting and lowering of the lifting and lowering base body 780, is formed as a rod-like body having a circular cross section from a metal material, and has an axial center thereof along the vertical direction. It is held. In this manner, the pillar portion 732 is formed in a box shape whose front is opened, and the guiding rod 733 is accommodated inside the pillar portion 732 to arrange the guiding rod 733 using a dead space. As a result, the ring operation unit 700 as a whole can be miniaturized.

  The guide rod 733 is inserted into the guided portion 784 of the elevating base body 780, as will be described later, so that the moving direction of the elevating base body 780 is vertical direction via the guided portion 784 (the guide rod 733 Guide in the axial direction). In this case, the guide rod 733 is disposed forward (front side) of the tooth surface of the rack 762 and rearward (rear side) of the elevating base body 780 (main body 781), as will be described later. It is possible to achieve both of exerting the effect by offset-arranging the elevation base body 780 on the front side with respect to the rack 762 and ensuring the smooth elevation operation of the elevation base body 780.

  The drive motor 740 is disposed on the front side of the intermediate case body 710, and causes the drive shaft to protrude to the back side of the intermediate case body 710 (main body 711). A first gear 751 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 740, and the second gear 752 to the sixth gear 756 are respectively supported by the plurality of shafts 725 of the rear case body 720 on the first gear 751. And the pinion gear 761 axially supported by the shaft 725 of the rear case body 720 are engaged with the sixth gear 756.

  As described above, the rack and pinion mechanism includes the pinion gear 761 and the pair of racks 762. The pinion gear 761 is rotatably supported by the shaft 725 of the rear case body 720, and the pinion gear 761 is sandwiched between the pair. Racks 762 are disposed to face each other with their tooth faces facing each other.

  The rack 762 has a leading end guide piece 762a and a trailing end guide shaft 762b protruding from one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction, and an insertion hole 762c is formed through the side of the trailing end guide shaft 762b. . The front end guide piece 762 a is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped protrusion, and the rear end guide shaft 762 b is formed as a shaft having a circular cross section. As described above, the leading end guide piece 762 a and the trailing end guide shaft 762 b are inserted into the leading end guide groove 723 and the trailing end guide groove 724 of the rear case body 720, thereby causing slide displacement (linear movement) of the rack 762. The direction is restricted in the extending direction of the two guide grooves 723 and 724.

  The pair of link members 770 are members for constituting a link mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted via the rack and pinion mechanism to the lifting and lowering base body 780 and the ring forming member 790, and in the longitudinal direction One side (proximal end) is connected to the rack 762 and the other longitudinal side (distal end) is connected to the elevation base body 780 and the ring forming member 790. Here, the detailed configuration of the link member 770 will be described with reference to FIG.

  50 (a) is a front perspective view of the link member 770, FIG. 50 (b) is a rear perspective view of the link member 770, and FIG. 50 (c) is a portion Lc of FIG. 50 (a). FIG. 50 (d) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the link member 770, and FIG. 50 (d) is a side view of the link member 770 in the direction of the arrow Ld in FIG. 50 (a).

  The link member 770 has an elongated plate-like main body 771, an insertion shaft 772 projecting from the back of the main body 771 on one side (proximal end) of the main body 771, and the insertion shaft 772 A protruding wall 773 protruding from the front of the main body 771 on the other side (front end) of the main body 771 on the opposite side, and a gear wheel disposed at the protruding tip of the protruding wall 773 And 774.

  As described above, the insertion shaft 772 is a shaft having a circular cross section that is inserted into the insertion hole 762 c of the rack 762 through the insertion shaft 712 of the intermediate case body 710. The projecting wall portion 773 is a portion for offsetting the disposition position of the gear portion 774 to the front (front) side of the main body portion 771, and protrudes from the front surface of the main body portion 771 at a projecting height h. The gear portion 774 has a shaft support hole 774a penetratingly formed at the center and a plurality of teeth 774b engraved on the outer periphery centering on the shaft support hole 774, and the shaft support hole 774a 782 is inserted (axially supported) and engaged with the gear portion 792 (tooth 792b) of the ring forming member 790 via the tooth 774b.

  In the present embodiment, the gear portion 774 (teeth 774b) is formed as a spur gear in which the direction of the teeth is parallel to the axial direction, and the teeth 774b of the gear portion 774 extend over the entire wall surface of the projecting wall portion 774. Will be set. Therefore, even when the gear portion 774 is displaced relative to the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 to be meshed by the deflection or twist of the link member 770 (main body portion 771) (FIGS. 49), the teeth 774b extended and engraved on the wall surface of the projecting wall portion 774 can be meshed with the gear portion 792 (the teeth 792b) of the ring forming member 790. It is possible to suppress disengagement between the portion 774 and the gear portion 792. In addition, even when the relative displacement due to the above-mentioned deflection or twist occurs and the gear portions 774 and 792 are relatively displaced in the axial direction, the teeth are extended and cut in the wall surface of the projecting wall portion 774 Since a meshing area between the gear portion 774 (teeth 774b) and the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) can be secured by 774b, uneven wear of each of the teeth 774b and 772b can be suppressed to improve its durability. Can be

  Here, for example, if the main body portion 771 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (radially outward) of the gear portion 774, it is easy to secure the area of the seating surface at the axial end surface of the gear portion 774. However, in the present embodiment, since the projecting wall portion 773 is connected to the rear surface (axial end surface) of the gear portion 774, the axial end surface of the gear portion 774 can be secured by the projecting wall portion 773. Seat area is reduced.

  In this case, in the projecting wall portion 773, the wall surface (the wall surface on the axial center side of the shaft support hole 774 a) of the gear support portion 774 is extended by the teeth 774 b of the gear portion 774. The shaft of the gear portion 774 is formed even if the projecting wall portion 773 is connected to the rear surface (axial end surface) of the gear portion 774 because it is formed as a concave curved surface curved in an arc shape with the axis as the center. The area of the seat surface can be secured on the end face in the direction, and the diameter of the collar C (see FIG. 49) disposed on the end face in the axial direction of the gear portion 774 can be increased accordingly. Furthermore, in the case of integrally forming the link member 770 (the main body 771, the protruding wall 773, and the gear 774) from a resin material, the protruding wall 773 is opposite to the wall on which the teeth 774b are formed. By forming the wall surface as a concave surface, the overall thickness including the main body 771 and the gear portion 774 as well as the protruding wall 773 can be made uniform, and the formability thereof can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the teeth 774b are formed on the projecting wall 773 over the entire surface (that is, up to the connecting portion with the front of the main body 771), the area where the teeth 774b are formed is sufficient. It is possible to prevent the disengagement of the ring forming member 790 with the gear portion 792 (see FIGS. 48 and 49) more reliably. Further, as described above, when the link member 770 (the main body portion 771, the projecting wall portion 773 and the gear portion 774) is integrally formed of a resin material, the teeth 774b extend only partway of the projecting wall portion 773 If not, the thickness of the projecting wall 773 can be made uniform over the whole, and the formability can be further improved.

  As described above, the link member 770 has the projecting wall 773 projecting from the front of the main body 771 at the projecting height h, and the gear 774 is disposed at the projecting end of the projecting wall 773. As it is provided, the gear portion 774 can be separated from the main body 771 by the height h of the projection wall 773. That is, in the assembled state, the installation position of the lift base body 780 can be separated (offset) from the rack 762 to the front (forward) by the height h of the projection wall 773 (FIG. 55). And FIG. 57). The effect of this offset will be described later.

  Referring back to FIGS. 48 and 49, description will be made. The elevating base body 780 is a member vertically moved up and down between the retracted position and the coupling position by the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted through the link member 770, and the main body 780 and the back surface of the main body 780 And a pair of shafts 782 for supporting the gear portion 774 (shaft support hole 774a) of the link member 770 and a gear portion 792 for the ring forming member 790 arranged below the pair of shafts 782 (shaft support Guided in the vertical direction by a pair of shafts 783 for pivotally supporting the holes 792a, and the pillars 732 (guide rods 733) of the front case body 730 disposed on the back of the main body 781 below the pair of shafts 783 And a cover body 785 disposed on the back surface of the main body 781.

  A plurality of insertion holes through which the guide rods 733 can be inserted are formed in the guided portion 784, and the guide rods 733 are inserted through the insertion holes, so that the moving direction of the elevating base body 780 is the axial direction of the guide rods 733 It is regulated only in the direction along

  The cover body 785 is a member disposed facing the end face in the axial direction of the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 (see FIG. 51). A portion 785a and an extending portion 785b extending downward from the lower edge of the head in a band shape and narrower than the head 785a, which are integrally formed of a thin metal plate . As described later, when relative displacement occurs in the gear portions 774 and 792, the cover 785 (the head 785a and the extending portion 785b) is in contact with the axial end surface of the gear portions 774 and 792. Thus, the relative displacement can be suppressed, and the meshing state of the gear portions 774 and the meshing state of the gears 774 can be properly maintained.

  The gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 are inserted into the shaft support holes 774a and 792a of the respective gear portions 774 and 792, respectively. By fastening and fixing a fastening screw while interposing a collar C having a diameter larger than the shaft support holes 774a and 792a at the tip of the shafts 782 and 783, the shaft 782 is held rotatably supported by the shafts 782 and 783. Ru.

  The pair of ring forming members 790 are members that are rotationally driven by the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted through the link member 770 and to form an annular shape at the coupling position, and have a substantially annular shape. A main body portion 791 formed in a shape divided into two and a gear portion 792 disposed on one circumferential side (proximal end) of the main body portion 791 are mainly provided. The gear portion 792 is a portion axially supported by the elevating base body 780 and meshed with the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and has an axially supported hole 792a formed in the center and the axially supported hole 792a. And a plurality of teeth 792b engraved on the outer periphery.

  A magnet (not shown) is embedded on the other side (tip) of the main body 791 opposite to the side on which the gear portion 792 is disposed, forming an annular shape at the coupling position. When doing this (see FIG. 47), the tips of the ring forming member 790 can be brought into close contact using the magnetic force of the magnet. As a result, it is possible to reliably form an annular shape by the pair of annular forming members 790.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a connection state of the link member 770, the elevating base body 780, and the ring forming member 790 will be described. FIG. 51 is a partially enlarged rear view of the annular operation unit 700. As shown in FIG. FIG. 51 shows a state in which the elevating base body 780 is disposed between the retracted position and the coupling position, and corresponds to the state of FIG. 54 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the lift base 780, the tips (gear portions 774) of a pair of link members 770 are pivotally supported by a pair of shafts 782 (see FIG. 49), and a pair of shafts 783 (see FIG. The base ends (the gear portions 792) of the pair of ring forming members 790 are respectively supported by a shaft 49), and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 are engaged.

  Therefore, as described later, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 is transmitted to the pair of link members 770 via the rack and pinion mechanism, and the pair of link members 770 form the gear portion 774 (shaft 782, see FIG. 49). The ring forming member 790 is rotated with respect to the elevating base body 780 as a center, and the rotation is transmitted to the ring forming member 790 through the meshing of the gear portions 774 and 792, so that the ring forming member 790 It rotates with respect to the gear part raising / lowering base body 780 centering on 783 (refer FIG. 49). At the same time, the lifting base body 780 is lifted and lowered with respect to each case body 710, 720 and 730 by raising or tilting the pair of link members 770 with respect to each case body 710, 720 and 730 (FIG. 52). See Figure 57).

  Here, the elevating base body 780 is connected to the tip end of the link member 770 formed in a long plate shape, and the raising / lowering operation is performed with respect to each case body 710, 720, 730 through the link member 770. At times, due to the deflection or twisting of the link member 770 (main body 771), vibration or shaking in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 51) of the lift base 780 tends to occur. In addition, since the ring forming member 790 itself is formed in the shape of a long plate and the tip opposite to the base end connected to the elevating base body 780 is a free end, It is easy to generate vibration and shaking with respect to the elevation base body 780. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the magnet is embedded at the tip of the ring forming member 790, the weight of the tip is increased, and accordingly, the ring forming member 790 is more likely to generate vibration and vibration.

  Such vibration or sway in the front-rear direction of the lift base body 780 causes relative displacement between the link member 770 and the lift base body 780. That is, the relative displacement between the gear portion 774 integrally formed on the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 is caused. Similarly, vibration or vibration of the ring forming member 790 with respect to the elevating base body 780 causes relative displacement between the gear portion 792 integrally formed on the ring forming member 790 and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770. . Therefore, the meshing state of the gear portions 774 and 792 becomes unstable, and the rotational movement of the ring forming member 790 and the lifting and lowering operation of the lifting and lowering base body 780 are not properly performed due to the transmission failure of the driving force. , 792 wear is promoted, leading to a decrease in durability.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cover body 785 is disposed on the rear surface of the lifting and lowering base body 780, and the cover body 785 is an axial end face of the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790. Place them face to face. As a result, due to the deflection or twisting of the link member 770 (the main body 771), the elevating base body 780 and the ring forming member 790 generate vibration and vibration, and relative displacement between the gear portions 774 and 790 is generated. The relative displacement between the gear portions 774 and 792 is suppressed by bringing the cover 785 (the head portion 785a and the extending portion 785b) into contact with the axial end surfaces of the gear portions 774 and 790, and the gear engagement is achieved. The state can be maintained properly. As a result, the transmission failure of the driving force can be suppressed, and the rotation operation of the ring forming member 790 and the elevation operation of the elevation base 780 can be properly performed, and the wear of the gear portions 774 and 792 is suppressed. Durability can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the head portion 785a of the cover body 785 is disposed above the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and the extension portion 785b of the cover body 785 is of the link member 770. It is disposed between the gear portions 774 and between the gear portions 792 of the ring forming member 790. Therefore, on the opposite side of the main body 771 of the link member 770 and the main body 791 of the ring forming member 790 across the shaft 782 and the shaft 783 (see FIG. 49) among the axial end surfaces of the gear portions 774 and 792 The head portion 785a and the extending portion 785b of the cover body 785 are brought into contact with the axial end face, and the relative displacement of the gear portions 774 and 792 can be effectively restricted.

  For example, when the link member 770 is in the upright state or in the near upright state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 51), the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) is held with respect to the main body 771 of the link member 770. Since the head portion 785a of the cover member 785 is disposed on the opposite side, the displacement of the gear portion 774 due to the deflection or twisting of the main body portion 771 of the link member 770 is effectively made by the head portion 785a of the cover body 785. It can regulate. Similarly, for example, when the link member 770 is in a tilted state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 52) or in a nearly tilted state, the shaft 782 with respect to the main body 771 of the link member 770 (see FIG. 49) Since the extending portion 785b of the cover member 785 is disposed on the opposite side across the), displacement of the gear portion 774 due to the bending or twisting of the main body portion 771 of the link member 770 can be It can be effectively regulated by 785b.

  On the other hand, with respect to the ring forming member 790, regardless of the rotational position (that is, whether the link member 770 is in the standing state or the tilting state), the left and right of the gear portion 792 (left and right in FIG. 51) Since the main body 791 of the ring forming member 790 is disposed, the extension of the cover member 785 is provided on the opposite side of the main body 792 of the ring forming member 790 across the shaft 783 (see FIG. 49). 785b can be disposed, and the displacement of the gear portion 792 due to the deflection or twisting of the main body 791 of the ring forming member 790 can be effectively restricted by the extending portion 785b of the cover 785.

  In the present embodiment, the gear portions 774 of the pair of link members 770 are not only meshed with the gear portions 792 of the ring forming member 790 located below them, but the gear portions 774 adjacent to each other are Is also engaged. Similarly, each gear portion 792 of the pair of ring forming members 790 is not only meshed with each gear portion 774 of the link member 770 located above it, but the gear portions 792 adjacent to each other are also meshed with each other. Be done.

  Thereby, the synchronization accuracy of the rotation operation of the pair of ring forming members 790 can be improved. That is, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 is transmitted to the pair of link members 770 via the rack and pinion mechanism, and further transmitted from the pair of link members 770 to the pair of annular forming members 790 (see FIG. 48 and FIG. 49). In this case, the pair of racks 762 of the rack and pinion mechanism are independent of each other with respect to the pinion gear 761. Therefore, when the pair of rack members 770 and the pair of annular forming members 790 are also independent of each other, the amount of phase shift (for example, the amount of backlash or dimensional tolerance) of the rack 762 with respect to the pinion gear 761 is the pair of racks 762 In addition, the amount of phase shift of the link member 770 with respect to the rack 762 (for example, the amount of rattling of the insertion shaft 772 with respect to the insertion hole 762c) differs between the pair of link members 770. The phase shift amount of 790 (for example, the amount of rattling of the shafts 782 and 783 with respect to the bearing holes 774a and 792a or the amount of rattling of the teeth 792 with respect to the teeth 774b) differs in the pair of ring forming members 790. Phase shifts occur in the rotational movement of the pair of annular ring forming members 790. Synchronization accuracy is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the gear portions 774 of the pair of link members 770 are meshed with each other, and the gear portions 792 of the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are meshed with each other. Even if it occurs in the transmission path of the ring, it does not cause this phase shift to appear in the rotational movement of the ring forming member 790 (that is, it can absorb the phase shift at the most downstream of the drive force transmission path). As a result, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy in the rotation operation of the ring forming member 790.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52 to FIG. 57, the operation of the annular operation unit 700 will be described. 46 to 51 will be referred to as appropriate in this description.

  FIG. 52 is a schematic rear view of the annular operation unit 700 schematically showing the annular operation unit 700 in which the pair of annular forming members 790 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular ring operation unit 700 in LIII line. FIG. 54 is a schematic rear view of the annular operation unit 700 schematically showing the annular operation unit 700 disposed at a position where the pair of annular forming members 790 is intermediate between the retracted position and the coupling position. 55 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular operation unit 700 along the line LV-LV in FIG. FIG. 56 is a schematic rear view of the annular operation unit 700 schematically showing the annular operation unit 700 in which the pair of annular forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular ring operation unit 700 in LVII line.

  52 to 57, the outer shell structure including the middle case body 510, the back case body 520, and the front case body 530, the drive motor 740, and the gear group The illustration of the drive structure including the first gear 751 to the sixth gear 756 or the cover body 785 is omitted. However, in FIG. 52, FIG. 54 and FIG. 56, the position of the upper edge in the main body portion 711 and the overhang portion 713 (front surfaces 711a and 713a) of the middle case body 710 and the main body portion 731 of the front case body 730 (back surface 731a The position of the upper edge in) is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in the state in which the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged at the retracted position, the pair of racks 762 are expanded in the direction away from each other, and their tip sides (tip guide pieces 762a The tooth surface of the side is meshed with the pinion gear 761. Therefore, the pair of link members 770 whose base end side (insertion shaft 772) is pivotally supported on the rear end side (insertion hole 762c) of the pair of racks 762 are in an inclined state. A lift base body 780 supported at the front end side (gear portion 774) is disposed at the lowermost position. Further, the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are developed in the direction away from each other (distributed to the left and right).

  When the drive motor 540 is driven from this state (a state where the pair of ring forming members 790 is disposed at the retracted position) and the rotational driving force is transmitted to the pinion gear 761 via the gear group (FIGS. 48 and 49) 52) When the pinion gear 761 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 52 and the rotation length of the pinion gear 761 causes the pair of racks 762 to shorten their deployed length (the rear end side insertion holes 762c are close to each other) Motion in the direction of As a result, the pair of link members 770 are gradually raised by being displaced toward the center (that is, in the directions approaching each other) toward the center (the insertion shaft 772).

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, relative rotation of the pair of link members 770 with respect to the elevation base body 780 is formed, and the rotation thereof is through the gear portions 774 and 792 to form a pair of ring forming members By being transmitted to 790, the pair of ring forming members 790 are rotated relative to the lift base body 780, and the tips of the pair of ring members 790 are brought close to each other. At the same time, the rising movement of the pair of link members 770 forms a relative displacement of the lifting and lowering base body 790 with respect to the rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 761 and the rack 762), and the lifting and lowering base 790 is lifted.

  As described above, in the ring operation unit 700, the elevating base body 780 is pivotally supported at the tips of the pair of link members 770 whose proximal ends are pivotally supported by the rack and pinion mechanism, and the pair of link members 770 are erected or tilted. The gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 whose base end is axially supported by the lift base body 780 is meshed with the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 while the lift base body 780 can be lifted and lowered. The relative rotation of the link member 770 with respect to the elevation base body 780 allows the ring forming member 790 to be rotatable.

  That is, the means for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 740 to the elevation base 790 (means for raising and lowering) and the means for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 740 to the ring forming member 790 (means for rotating) are separately provided. The link member 770 can be used in common, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Further, the rotational movement of the ring forming member 790 and the linear movement in the vertical direction can be performed in parallel, that is, while the ring is not formed at a fixed position, the position is changed in the vertical direction. Since ring rings are formed in order, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 are engaged, and the link member 770 is engaged via the engagement of the gears 774 and 792. Rotation is transmitted to the ring forming member 790. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, when the standing of the pair of link members 770 is advanced, the barycentric position becomes high. The deflection or twisting of the member 770 (main body 771) causes vibration or sway in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 54, horizontal direction in FIG. 55) of the lift base body 780 (and the pair of ring forming members 790). It becomes easy to do (the amount of displacement in the front and back direction increases).

  The deflection or twisting of the link member 770 (body portion 771) or the ring forming member 790 (body portion 791) or the vibration or sway in the front-rear direction is integrally formed on the link member 770 and the ring forming member 790. By affecting the gear portions 774 and 792 and relatively displacing the gear portions 774 and 792, there is a risk that the gear portions 774792 may disengage. Even if disengagement of the gear portions 774 and 792 can be avoided, the toothed state (toothed area) becomes unstable, and the contact pressure is concentrated on a part of the tooth surface, so that the tooth 774b , 792b, which may reduce the durability.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the teeth 774b are extended and engraved on the wall surface of the projecting wall 773 connecting the main body 771 and the gear 774 to the link member 770 (see FIG. 50). Even when the relative displacement of the gear portions 774 and 792 described above occurs, the gear portions 774 and 792 can easily maintain the meshing of the gear portions 774 and 792 due to the extension of 774 b. As a result, not only the disengagement of the teeth can be suppressed, but also the toothed state can be stabilized, uneven wear of the teeth 774b and 792b can be suppressed, and the durability can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the pair of ring forming members 790 are disposed at a position intermediate between the retracted position and the coupling position (specifically, the rack 762 relative to the pinion gear 761). When the rack is disposed at an intermediate position in the relative movable range) and the rising angle of the pair of link members 770 reaches a predetermined angle, the teeth 774b of the gear portion 774 and the teeth cut in the projecting wall portion 773 The tooth 774b connected to 774b (see FIG. 50) starts meshing with the tooth 792b in the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790.

  Therefore, the range from the state shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 to the state shown in FIGS. 56 and 57 (that is, the rising angle of link member 770 becomes large, vibration in the back and forth direction of elevating base body 790 In the range in which shaking easily occurs and the gear of the gears 774 and 792 is most likely to be disengaged), it is possible to effectively utilize the teeth 774b extended and engraved on the wall surface of the projecting wall 773. As a result, it is possible to effectively achieve suppression of disengagement of the gears 774 and 792 or improvement in durability of the teeth 774 b and 792 b.

  From the state shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, by driving of the drive motor 740, the pinion gear 761 is further rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 52, and the pair of racks 762 further shortens its deployed length (rear end The linear movement of the side insertion holes 762 c in the direction in which the insertion holes 762 c are brought close to each other causes the pair of link members 770 to stand substantially vertically. That is, the direction connecting the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) of the lift base 780 and the insertion shaft 782 of the link member 770 is substantially vertical. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the pair of ring forming members 790 are disposed at the coupling position, and the tips of the pair of ring forming members 790 are brought into contact with each other to form an annular shape. It is formed.

  In this case, in the state where the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position (that is, when the pair of link members 770 are erected to the upright state (posture along the vertical direction)), the pair of link members A connection portion between the pillar portion 732 of the front case body 730 and the overhang portion 713 of the middle case body 710 between the facing surfaces of the 770 (in this embodiment, the head 713 b of the overhang portion 713, see FIGS. 48 and 49) And the left and right side surfaces of the connection portion (head portion 713b of the overhanging portion 713) are in contact with the opposing surfaces of the pair of link members 770 (see FIG. 56). The posture of the lifting and lowering base body 780 supporting the ring forming member 790 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be stabilized at the coupling position.

  That is, in the coupled position, the pair of link members 770 are erected upright, and the center of gravity is increased, so that the pair of link members 770 rotate left and right (the left and right direction in FIG. 56) about the insertion shaft 772. As a result, the rack 762 is also easily moved in the direction of its linear movement (left and right direction in FIG. 56) in response to left-right rotation of the pair of link members 770. Therefore, it is difficult to maintain the postures of the link member 770 and the rack 762, and as a result, the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 disposed at the tip of the link member 770 become unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a connecting portion (overlapping portion) between the front case body 730 (column portion 732) and the middle case body 710 (overlapping portion 713) between the opposing surfaces of the pair of link members 770. Since the head portion 713b) of 713 is interposed, the connecting portion (head portion 713b) causes the pair of link members 770 to rotate in the lateral direction about the insertion shaft 772 and in the direction of the linear motion of the rack 762 Can regulate the movement of Accordingly, the pair of link members 770 can be maintained in the upright state, and the postures of the lifting and lowering base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be stabilized at the coupling position.

  In addition, since the link members 770 are disposed substantially symmetrically facing each other in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIGS. 52, 54, and 56), the link members 770 are inclined relatively downward (for example, from FIG. In the interval between 55), the pair of link members are disposed facing each other such that the pair of link members 770 try to rotate left and right (left and right direction in FIGS. 52 and 54) about the insertion shaft 772. 770 can mutually cancel each other, and maintenance of the posture becomes possible.

  On the other hand, link member 770 may be formed in a flat plate shape, and it is difficult to maintain its posture with respect to displacement in the front-rear direction (for example, the vertical direction in FIG. 54). In this case, in the present embodiment, the base end side (the insertion shaft 772 side) of the link member 770 is sandwiched between the facing surfaces of the intermediate case body 710 and the front case body 730. That is, when the link member 770 is rotated (displaced) between the inclining state and the standing state, the front case body 730 (main body portion 731) of the front and back of the base end side of the link member 770 is rotated. The back surface 731a and the front surface 711a of the intermediate case body 710 (main body 711) can be brought into contact with each other. Thus, the link member 770 can be stably rotated (displaced) between the inclined state and the upright state while effectively suppressing the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the sheet of FIG. 54). Can. As a result, it is possible to move up and down while stabilizing the postures of the elevation base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, an overhanging portion 713 is formed to project upward at the central portion in the width direction of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) (see FIGS. 48 and 49). As shown in FIG. 56, as the widthwise central portion is approached (ie, as link member 770 is erected), the position of the upper edge of its front surface 713a is raised (ie, it abuts on the back surface of link member 770). Possible areas are increased).

  Thus, the position of the upper edge is raised by partially raising only the central portion rather than raising the position of the upper edge of the front surface 711a of the intermediate case body 710 (the main body 711) as a whole. As the link member 770 approaches the upright state while suppressing the appearance of the intermediate case body 710 from being damaged by the wall surface (or reducing the arrangement area of the third symbol display device 81), The contactable area between the front surface 713a and the rear surface of the link member 770 can be increased to enhance the effect of maintaining the posture of the link member 770 (suppressing the swing in the front-rear direction). As a result, the link member 770 can be stably rotated (displaced) in the vicinity of the standing state while suppressing the appearance from being damaged. That is, the postures of the lifting base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 can be stably held in the stopped state in the coupling position, and the postures of the lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 in the vicinity of the coupling position Can be raised and lowered while stabilizing the

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, the overhanging portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710 has its front surface 713a retracted to its retracted position (that is, it is inclined down to the bottom). It is set to a shape that can abut on the back surface of 770 (see FIG. 46). As a result, the postures of the lift base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are stably held in the stopped state in the coupling position, and the elevator base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 in the vicinity of the coupling position. And the elevation base 780 disposed at the retracted position (the lowermost position) using a portion (the overhang portion 713) in which the height position of the upper edge of the upper edge is raised for the purpose of stabilizing the posture of the The effect of stably maintaining the posture of the pair of ring forming members 790 in the stopped state can also be obtained at the same time.

  When the drive motor 740 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction to that described above from the states shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the pinion gear 761 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. Along with the rotation, the pair of racks 762 are deployed (that is, they are linearly moved in the direction in which the insertion holes 762c on the rear end side are separated from each other). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are gradually inclined, and as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the pair of ring forming members 790 are retracted to the retracted position.

  Here, in the annular operation member 700, the weight of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular forming members 790 acts on the rack and pinion mechanism (the pinion gear 761 and the pair of racks 762) via the pair of link members 770. Be done. That is, the weight of the lifting and lowering base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 is acted in the direction of expanding the pair of racks 762 through the pair of link members 770. Therefore, the lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 may be lowered from the coupling position. In this case, the descent of the elevating base 780 is restricted by opposing the driving force of the drive motor 740 to the weight of the elevating base 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 (ie, the elevating base 780 is coupled). In the structure of holding in position, the energy consumption required for the drive motor 740 is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the projecting wall portion 773 is interposed between the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and the projecting height of the projecting wall portion 773 The gear portion 774 is offset from the main body portion 711 to the front (front) side by the amount of h (see FIG. 50D). Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, the lifting base body 780 is a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack 762 and orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack 762 (ie, the paper surface of FIGS. 54 and 56). Of the thickness of the link member 770 (that is, the total of the thickness of the main body 771 and the gear 774 and the height h of the projection wall 773). It is offset from rack 762 by a minute.

  Thus, the weight of the lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 is exerted on the rack 762 via the link member 770 even in the above-described offset direction. That is, a force component in the direction in which the lifting and lowering base body 780 is offset can be generated as a force component acting on the rack 762 from the link member 770, and a force component that moves the rack 762 in that direction Can be made smaller. As a result, energy consumption required for the drive motor 740 can be suppressed.

  Particularly, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, at the coupling position, the link member 770 is erected in a posture along the vertical direction, and the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) of the lift base 780 and the link member 770 are inserted. The direction connecting the shaft 772 is substantially orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack 762. Therefore, when the weight of the lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 acts on the rack 762 via the link member 770, the rack 762 acts as a force component acting on the rack 762 from the link member 770. It is possible to suppress the generation of a force component in the direction of deploying (i.e., the direction of tilting the link member 770 in the upright state). As a result, even if the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released, the lifting and lowering base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be held at the coupled position, and as a result, the energy consumption required for the drive motor 740 Can be suppressed.

  In detail, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the distance T1 in the horizontal direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 56) between the pair of shafts 782 of the lifting and lowering base body 780 is the insertion axis of the pair of link members 770. It is smaller than the distance T2 in the horizontal direction between 772 (T1 <T2). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are erected in a posture in which they are slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction (that is, a posture in which the pair of link members 770 have a V shape). Thus, by setting the pair of link members 770 in a V-shaped posture, in order to start the operation from the state (joined position) shown in FIG. 56 to the retracted position, the drive motor 740 is described above. When rotationally driven in the opposite direction to the case, the deployment of the pair of racks 762 (that is, the tilting of the pair of link members 770) by the rotationally driving can be started easily and reliably.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a magnet is embedded at the tip of the main body 791 of the ring forming member 790, and the tips of the main body 791 are magnetically attached to each other. The lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be easily held at the coupling position. On the other hand, when the movement from the coupling position to the retracted position is started, it is necessary to release the magnetizing force of the magnet. In this case, keeping the pair of link members 770 in a V-shaped posture (that is, setting T1 <T2) means holding the coupled state at the coupled position and starting the operation from the coupled position to the retracted position. This is particularly effective in terms of achieving both the cancellation of the coupled state and the certainty.

  Here, the magnet embedded at the tip of the main body 791 of the ring forming member 790 may be omitted. In this case, the distance T1 in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 56) between the pair of shafts 782 of the lift base body 780 and the distance T2 in the horizontal direction between the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 are approximately equal. It is preferable to make them identical (T1 = T2), or to make the former larger than the latter (T2 <T1). As a result, even when the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released, the lift base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be easily held at the coupling position.

  In the present embodiment, the guide rod 733 is disposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 57) than the tooth surface of the rack 762 and on the back side (the right side in FIG. 57) than the elevating base body 780 (main body 781). Be done. Further, the guided portion 784 of the elevating base body 780 into which the guide rod 733 is inserted is disposed at the lowermost position of the elevating base body 780 (main body portion 781). That is, in the direction of the offset of the lifting base body 780 to the front relative to the rack 762, a portion where the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770 is inserted into the insertion hole 762 c of the rack 762, the lifting base body 780 and a pair of ring forming members A guide rod 733 is disposed at a position between the center of gravity and the center of gravity of the structure 790, and the raising and lowering of the elevating base body 780 is guided via the guide rod 733 and the guided portion 784. With this arrangement, it is possible to achieve both of exerting the effect of offset disposing the elevating base body 780 on the front side with respect to the rack 762 described above and securing a smooth elevating operation of the elevating base body 780.

  Next, the rocking operation unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 64.

  The rocking operation unit 800 includes the two arm members 820 (see FIGS. 7 and 11) as described above, and includes two units for operating (displacement) the two arm members 820. That is, in a front view of the rear case 210, the rocking operation unit 800 is formed in the upper side in the rear case 210, and two units disposed on the left and right across the opening 211a. In this case, the structure (technical idea) for operating (displacement) the arm member 820 is identical in each of the two units, so in the following, one of these two units (on the left side of the opening 211a) The unit to be disposed (see FIGS. 7 and 11) will be described as the oscillating operation unit 800.

  FIG. 58 is a front perspective view of the swing motion unit 800 in a state in which the arm member 820 is retracted to the retracted position, and FIG. 59 is a swing motion unit in a state in which the arm member 820 is extended to the overhang position. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of 800.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the rocking operation unit 800 includes an arm member 820 rotatably supported at its base end, and a drive motor 830 for applying a rotational driving force to the arm member 820, The arm member 820 is rocked (rotated) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 58 and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position, the arm member 820 is in a posture of hanging down vertically downward, and by being retracted to the back side of the combined operation unit 400, it is not visible to the player (see FIG. 6). In the out position, the arm member 820 lifts its tip upward and inclines obliquely downward, and projects the tip to the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 5).

  In this case, in the present embodiment, when the arm member 820 is disposed at the extended position shown in FIG. 59, the arm member 820 can be mechanically held at the extended position as described later. Therefore, it is not necessary to make the driving force of the drive motor 830 be opposed so that the arm member 820 does not rotate toward the retracted position by the action of gravity (the weight of the arm member). Energy consumption of the drive motor 830 required for holding can be suppressed. This detailed configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64.

  FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of the rocking movement unit 800 in which the rocking movement unit 800 disassembled is viewed in front. 61 (a) is a rear view of the swing operation unit 800 in a state where the arm member 820 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 61 (b) is a swing at the portion LXIb of FIG. 61 (a). FIG. 16 is a partial enlarged rear view of the operation unit 800. In FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the rocking operation unit 800 with the mounting base 810 removed is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the rocking operation unit 800 has a mounting base 810 disposed on the back case 210 (see FIG. 7) and a proximal end rotatably supported on the mounting base 810. An arm member 820, a drive motor 830 generating a driving force for rotationally driving the arm member 820, and a front case body 840 on which the drive motor 830 is disposed and which is disposed in front of the mounting base 810. , Mainly comprises.

  The mounting base 810 is a member for accommodating the base end of the arm member 820 and the drive motor 830 between itself and the front case body 840, and is formed in a rectangular shape which is long in a front view. The mounting base 810 is provided with a shaft 811 protruding from the front and rotatably supporting the arm member 820.

  The arm member 820 has a main body portion 821 formed in an elongated shape, a groove portion 822 formed as a groove-shaped opening on the base end side of the main body portion 821, and a main body portion 821 opposite to the groove portion 822. And a support hole 824 formed in the main body portion 821 at a position between the decoration portion 823 and the groove portion 821. Mainly prepared for.

  The groove portion 822 includes a first groove 822a linearly extending, and a second groove 822b connected to one end of the first groove 822a and curved and extending in an arc shape. It is formed as an L-shaped groove in a front view from 822 b. In other words, in the groove portion 822, a concave portion recessed in one of the opposing inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822 a is a second groove 822 b.

The arc shape of the second groove 822b is a state where the protruding pin 833 is disposed at the end point of the first groove 822a (the connection position of the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b) (see FIG. 63 (b)) In the shape of an arc centered on the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830. Also, the groove widths of the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b are set to the same dimension as each other. The arm member 820 has its proximal end by inserting the shaft 811 of the mounting base 810 into the axial support hole 824. Are rotatably supported with respect to the mounting base 810. In this case, in the arm member 820, the contact surface portion 841 of the front case body 840 is in contact with a region which is the front of the main body portion 821 and in the vicinity of the pivot hole 824 (FIG. 61 (b)) reference). As a result, the arm member 820 is held rotatably at its proximal end between the mounting base 810 and the front case body 840 facing each other.

  The drive motor 830 has a plate-like drive arm 832 having a base end fixed to the drive shaft 831 and extending radially outward from the drive shaft 831, and a protrusion provided on the tip of the drive arm 832. In the state where the mounting pin 833 is mainly provided and the protruding pin 833 is inserted into the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820, it is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the front case body 840 by a fastening screw.

  The protruding pin 833 is a portion inserted into the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820 as described above, and the outer width is equal to or slightly smaller than the groove width of the groove portion 822 (the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b) of the arm member 820. It is formed as a cylindrical body of diameter. Therefore, when the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven, the protrusion pin 833 is moved in the groove 822 of the arm member 820 along the extending direction of the groove 822, and as a result, the arm member 820 Are rotated about the axis 811.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64, the rocking operation of the rocking operation unit 800 will be described. In this description, FIG. 61 is referred to as appropriate.

  62 to 64 are diagrams for explaining the process of moving the arm member 820 of the swinging operation unit 800 from the retracted position to the extended position in time series, and FIGS. 62 (a), 63 (a) and FIGS. 64 (a) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit 800, and FIG. 62 (b), FIG. 63 (b) and FIG. 64 (b) are a part LXIIb of FIG. 62 (a) and FIG. 64A is a partially enlarged rear view of the rocking operation unit 800 in the portion LXIIIb of FIG. 64 and the portion LXIVb of FIG. 64 (a).

  In FIG. 62, the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven, and the arm member 820 is swung from the retracted position toward the extended position by a predetermined amount. In FIG. 63, the arm member 820 is in the extended position. As for the state immediately after reaching FIG. 64, the state in which the arm member 820 has reached the extended position and the drive motor is further rotationally driven is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), in a state where the arm member 820 is disposed at the retracted position, the arm member 820 is in a posture of hanging down toward the lower side, and the protruding pin 833 is It is positioned at the starting point (the end opposite to the side connected to the second groove 822b, the right side in FIG. 61 (b)) of the first groove 822a of the groove 822.

  In this retracted position, the protruding end surface of the protrusion 821 a protruding from the side surface of the main body 821 of the arm member 820 faces the control surface 812 on the side wall of the mounting base 810 at a predetermined interval. Therefore, when the arm member 820 is rotated about the shaft 811 in response to an external force (for example, an external force generated by the player striking or swinging the gaming machine), the projection 821 a is brought into contact with the restriction surface 812. By contacting them, the rotation of the arm member 820 can be restricted, and such rotation can be rapidly converged.

  The drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven from the state shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B (the state where the arm member 820 is disposed at the retracted position), and the drive arm 832 is left as shown in FIG. When it is rotated (counterclockwise), the projecting pin 833 is moved toward the end point (the side connected to the second groove 822b, the left side in FIG. 61B) of the first groove 822a of the groove 822 .

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, the arm member 820 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) around the pivot hole 824 in FIG. As the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is further rotationally driven, and the drive arm 832 is further rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 62 (b), the protruding pin 833 is the end point of the first groove 822a of the groove 822 Then, as shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), the arm member 820 is placed in the extended position.

  Here, also in the conventional game machine, a driving force is applied to the first shaft (corresponding to the shaft 811), the moving member (corresponding to the arm member 820) rotated about the first shaft, and the moving member Drive motor (corresponding to a drive motor 830), and the moving member is rotated about the first axis by the driving force of the driving means (see, for example, JP-A-2011-120640). In this case, when the moving member is disposed at the raised position (corresponding to the overhanging position), it is necessary to prevent the moving member from moving (falling) due to the action of gravity. In this case, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the movement (falling) of the moving member is restricted by opposing the driving force of the drive motor to the gravity (the weight of the moving member). Energy consumption needed to hold the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the swing operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor 830 can be released by mechanically holding the arm member 820 in the extended position, and the arm member 820 is extended. It is possible to reduce the energy consumption required to hold the position.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, the state shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B (the protruding pin 833 reaches the end point of the first groove 822a of the groove portion 822 and the arm member 820 is arranged at the extended position Drive motor 830 is further rotationally driven. As a result, when the drive arm 832 is further rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 62 (b), as shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the projecting pin 833 is in the groove 822. Form a moved (accepted) state in the second groove 822b of

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second groove 822b is connected to the end point of the first groove 822a (a concave portion is recessed in one of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other). In the state where the arm member 820 is disposed at the extended position, the protruding pin 833 is moved into the second groove 822b (on one of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other). Since the state in which the protruding pin 833 is received is formed in the recessed portion provided concavely, the arm member 820 is mechanically held in the extended position (the arm member 820 centers the support hole 824 (shaft 811) Control to be rotated). That is, even if the driving force of the drive motor 830 is released, the arm member 820 can be mechanically held at the extended position, and the consumption of the drive motor 830 is required to hold the arm member 820 at the extended position. It can reduce energy.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the protruding pin 833 and the axial support hole 824 (the shaft 811 in the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the protruding pin 833). And the mutually opposing inner wall surfaces of the second groove 822b of the portion where the projecting pin 833 is positioned are substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833). Formed as.

  Therefore, when the arm member 820 is rotated about the support hole 824 (shaft 811), the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b is directed in the direction coinciding with the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833. Even if the arm member 820 is rotated to press the protrusion pin 833 and the protrusion pin 833 is pressed by the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b, the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 can not be rotated. That is, the arm member 820 can not be rotated.

  Therefore, in a state where the driving force of the drive motor 830 is released, for example, even when the arm member 820 is shaken by the player striking or shaking the gaming machine, the arm member 820 is supported by the axial support hole. It is possible to regulate rotation about the axis 824 (shaft 811), and as a result, it is possible to securely hold it in the overhanging position.

  In this case, as described above, the arc shape of the second groove 822b is the end point of the first groove 822a (the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b) as shown in FIG. In the state of being disposed at the connection position), the shape is matched with an arc shape centering on the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830. Therefore, when moving (accepting) the projecting pin 833 disposed at the end point of the first groove 822b into the second groove 822b (ie, when transitioning from the state shown in FIG. 63 to the state shown in FIG. 64) And the shape of the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b matches the movement locus of the projecting pin 833, so that the attitude of the arm member 820 arranged at the overhanging position is prevented from changing. it can.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 63, after the arm member 820 is disposed at the overhanging position, fluctuation in the posture of the arm member 820 at the overhanging position is suppressed (while maintaining the stopped state). The projecting pin 833 can be moved (received) into the second groove 822b to mechanically hold the arm member 820 in the extended position.

  Here, the groove 822 has a shape (first groove 822a) in which the second groove 822b extends from the end point of the first groove 822a to the opposite side to the shaft support hole 824 (the side away from the shaft support hole 824). Even in the case where the recess is formed in the inner wall surface on the opposite side of the pivoting hole 824 among the inner wall surfaces facing each other, the mechanical retention of the arm member 820 is the same as in the case of the present embodiment. It is possible. However, in this case, when the projecting pin 833 is moved (received) into the second groove 822b after the arm member 820 is disposed at the extended position, it is necessary to switch the rotational direction of the drive motor 830. As a result, the control becomes complicated and the reliability of the operation decreases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the groove 822 has a shape in which the second groove 822b extends from the end point of the first groove 822a to the side of the support hole 824 (the side approaching the support hole 824) Since the recess is formed in the inner wall surface on the side of the pivoting hole 824 of the mutually opposing inner wall surfaces of the one groove 822a), the arm member 820 is retracted without switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 830 , And the recessed pin 833 can be moved (received) into the second groove 822b to mechanically hold the arm member 820 in the extended position. As a result, control can be simplified and operation reliability can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 72, the annular operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, when the elevation base body 780 is elevated, the offset amount to the front side (forward) of the elevation base body 780 is maintained constant regardless of the elevation position, but the second embodiment In the elevation base body 2780 in the embodiment, the offset amount to the front side (forward) is changed (increased / decreased) according to the elevation position. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 65 is a top view of the intermediate case body 2710, the rear case body 720 and the front case body 2730 in the assembled state in the second embodiment, and FIG. 66 is an intermediate case body 2710 at the LXVI-LXVI line in FIG. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of a case body 720 and a front case body 2730. In FIG. 65, the lengths in the longitudinal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 65) of the case bodies 2710, 720, and 2730 are partially omitted. Also, in FIGS. 65 and 66, only main parts of the case bodies 2710, 720, 2730 are illustrated in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 65, in the second embodiment, a space formed between the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710 and the rear surface 2731a of the front case body 2730 (the passage P guiding the link member 770 slidably). A part (the central portion in the longitudinal direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 65)) of the case is formed so as to protrude toward the front side (front, upper side in FIG.

  That is, in the first embodiment described above, the space is formed linearly along the longitudinal direction of both case bodies 710 and 730, and the link member 770 is slide-displaced along the linear space. The amount of offset to the front side of the base body 780 is not changed and kept constant (see FIGS. 48 and 49).

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the space P is formed non-linearly along the longitudinal direction of both case bodies 2710 and 2730, the link member 2770 is slidingly displaced along the non-linear space. Thus, the link member 2770 is also displaced toward the front side (the upper side in FIG. 65) and the back side (the lower side in FIG. 65) (see FIG. 67). Also in the case of raising and lowering, it is displaced toward the front side (the upper side in FIG. 65) and the back side (the lower side in FIG. 65). That is, the lifting base 2780 is lifted and lowered while changing the offset amount to the front side (upper side in FIG. 65) (see FIGS. 70 and 72). The specific configuration will be described below.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the middle case body 2710 has a shape in which the front surface 2711a of the main body 2711 protrudes toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 65) at the central portion in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 65). The front case body 2730 is formed in a shape in which the back surface 2731a of the main body portion 2731 is recessed toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 65) corresponding to the shape of the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710. Thus, a passage P for guiding the link member 770 slidably is formed between the front surface 2711 a and the back surface 2731 a.

  The passage P is a first passage P1 located on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the middle case body 2710 and the front case body 2730 and extending linearly along the moving direction of the rack 762 (see FIGS. 48 and 49) The first case extends straight in parallel with the first passage P1 and is offset to the front side (forward, upper side in FIG. 65) than the first passage P1 and is located at the longitudinal center of the intermediate case body 2710 and the front case body 2730 A third passage P3 and a second passage P2 connecting the third passage P3 and the first passage P1 are provided.

  The distance between the passages P1 to P3 is set to be slightly larger than the plate thickness of the link member 2770 (the main body 771 (see FIG. 67A)), and the connecting portions of the passages P1 to P3 are arcs. It is formed smoothly by the shape. Therefore, when the link member 2770 is slidingly displaced between the inclined state and the upright state, the inner wall surfaces (front surface 2711 a) of the passages P1 to P3 with respect to the front and back surfaces of the link member 2770 (main body 771). And the rear surface 2731a) to abut the link member 2770 smoothly between the inclined state and the upright state while effectively suppressing the swinging of the link member 2770 in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 65). Can. Here, the detailed configuration of the link member 2770 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 67 (a) is a side view of the link member 2770, corresponding to FIG. 50 (d). 67 (b) is a top view of the intermediate case body 2710, the back case body 720, and the front case body 2730 in an assembled state, in which the standing and lying link member 2770 is disposed in the passage P. It is illustrated in figure. 67B shows a state in which the main body 771 of the link member 2770 is cut along the opening edge of the passage P and viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the link member 2770 in the second embodiment is, like the link member 770 in the first embodiment, an insertion shaft 2772 from the back surface on one longitudinal side (base end) of the main body 771. And the projecting wall portion 2773 is projected from the front on the other side (tip) of the main body portion 771 opposite to the insertion shaft 2772 and the projecting wall portion 2773 A gear portion 774 is disposed at the tip.

  The link member 2770 in the second embodiment is the same as the link member 770 in the first embodiment in the projecting dimension of the insertion shaft 2772 and the projecting wall portion 2773 in the insertion shaft 772 and the projecting wall in the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same except that the dimensions are set to be larger (longer) than the projecting dimensions of the portion 773.

  As described above, the insertion shaft 2772 is inserted through the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 2710 into the insertion hole 762 c of the rack 762 so as to be slidable in the rotational direction and the axial direction. The end face in the axial direction is disposed on the back of the rear case body 720 via the insertion groove 722 of the rear case body 72, and the collar C is fastened and fixed to the end face in the axial direction of the insertion shaft 2772 (see FIGS. 48 and 49). .

  As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the projecting dimension (dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 67 (a)) of the insertion shaft 2772 from the main body 771 is a state where the link member 2770 is guided (held) in the first passage P1. Then, while the tip of the insertion shaft 2772 is projected from the back surface of the rear case body 720 and the link member 2770 is guided (held) in the third passage P3, the axial tip surface of the insertion shaft 2772 is the rear case It is set so as to be substantially flush with the back of the body 720 (the collar C is placed in contact with the back of the back case body 720 or with a slight gap). Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the insertion shaft 2772 of the link member 2770 slides the insertion hole 762c (see FIGS. 48 and 49) of the rack 762 in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 67B). The link member 2772 can be slidingly displaced along each of the first passage P1, the second passage P2 and the third passage P3.

  Referring back to FIGS. 65 and 66, description will be made. In the middle case body 2710, as in the case of the first embodiment, the overhanging portion 2713 is formed to project upward at the center in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 2711. The overhanging portion 2713 extends from the overhanging end to the main body 2711. The front surface 2713 a is formed in a substantially triangular shape in a front view that becomes wider toward the end (the width becomes wider), and is formed flush with the front surface 2711 a of the main body portion 2711.

  In the present embodiment, the range in which the overhang portion 2713 is formed (the range in which the overhang base is connected to the main body portion 2711) is substantially the same as the region corresponding to the third passage P3. A front surface 2713a of the housing 2713 is formed as a flat surface flush with the front surface 2711a of the main body portion 2711.

  Accordingly, in the vicinity of the standing state when the link member 2770 is rotated (displaced) toward the standing state, the front surface 2713a of the overhang portion 2713 abuts on the back surface of the link member 2770, and the link member 2770 is also performed. When the link member 2770 is held between the front surface 2713a of the overhanging portion 2713 and the column portion 2732 of the case body 2730 when the arm is in the upright state, the posture of the link member 2770 tends to be particularly unstable. In the vicinity thereof, the displacement of the link member 2770 can be restricted to effectively suppress the swaying of the link member 2770 in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the edge of the overhanging portion 2713 is curved in a circular arc shape in front view (see FIG. 48). Therefore, as the link member 2770 is erected (that is, as the posture thereof tends to be unstable), the area of the front surface 2713a of the overhang portion 2713 that can contact the back surface of the link member 2770 can be expanded. While the swinging of the link member 2770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed, the area in which the overhang portion 2713 is viewed from the front can be further reduced, and the appearance can be prevented from being impaired.

  The top portion of the column portion 2732 of the front case body 2730 is connected to the head portion 2713 b of the overhang portion 2713 in the intermediate case body 2710. A guide rod 2733 is accommodated in a pillar portion 2732 of the front case body 2730. The guide rod 2733 is a member for guiding the lifting and lowering of the lifting and lowering base body 2780, and is formed of a metal material as a rod-like body having a circular cross section.

  Here, the guide rod 2733 in the second embodiment is a first portion M1 disposed on the bottom side (the lower side in FIG. 66) of the column portion 2732 of the front case body 2730 in a posture in which the axis is along the vertical direction. And the first center portion M1 is disposed in a posture in which the axis is vertically aligned with the upper side (upper side in FIG. 66) of the column portion 2732 of the front case body 2730 in a posture in which the axis is vertically aligned. The third portion M3 is disposed offset to the front (front side, left side in FIG. 66), and the axis is inclined with respect to the vertical direction to connect the first portion M1 and the third portion M3 It is formed of a second portion M2 disposed in a posture.

  Each portion M1 to M3 of the guide rod 2733 is a second portion while the link member 2770 is guided to the second passage P2 by the first portion M1 while the link member 2770 is guided to the first passage P1. By M2, while the link member 2770 is guided to the third passage P3, the third portion M3 is formed at a position where the lift base body 2780 can be guided (held). Here, the lifting base 2780 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 68 is a rear perspective view of the elevation base 2780. FIG. As shown in FIG. 68, the elevating base body 2780 in the second embodiment is provided with a guided portion 2784 on the back surface of the main body portion 781, similarly to the elevating base body 780 in the first embodiment. The elevating base 2780 in the second embodiment is the same as the elevating base 780 in the first embodiment except for the structure of the guided portion 2784.

  The guided portion 2784 is formed of an annular guiding portion 2784a and a facing guiding portion 2784b disposed below (the lower side in FIG. 68) the annular guiding portion 2784a with a predetermined distance from the annular guiding portion 2784a. The annular guide portion 2784a is formed to have an inner wall surface continuous over the entire circumference, and a space surrounded by the inner wall surface is an insertion hole for inserting the guide rod 2733. That is, the insertion hole is formed as a closed hole. On the other hand, the opposing guide portion 2784b is formed of a pair of wall portions disposed opposite to each other at an interval, and a space between opposing surfaces of the pair of wall portions is an insertion hole for inserting the guide rod 2733. That is, the insertion hole is formed as an open hole having an open portion in a part of the circumferential direction and communicating the inside and the outside through the open portion.

  As described above, while four insertion holes are formed in the first embodiment, the number of insertion holes formed is two in the second embodiment. Therefore, when the guide rod 2733 is formed in a shape having a bending portion (a connecting portion between the first portion M1 and the second portion M2 and a connecting portion between the second portion M2 and the third portion M3, see FIG. 66) However, it can be suppressed that the insertion hole is locked to the bent portion of the guide rod 2733, and the elevation base body 2780 can be smoothly moved up and down along the guide rod 2733.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the insertion hole of one of the two insertion holes (opposing guide portion 2784b) is formed as a hole having an open portion in a part of the circumferential direction, and this open portion is a front surface The insertion hole (opposing guide portion 2784b), which is a side facing the case body 2730, is disposed on the lower side of the two insertion holes. From this, when the guide rod 2733 is shaped to project the upper end side (third portion M3) to the front side (front, left side in FIG. 66) (see FIG. 66), the lifting base along the guide rod 2733 The body 2780 can be moved up and down smoothly.

  Specifically, when lowering the lifting base 2780 in the coupled position (the position where the guided portion 2784 is guided by the third portion M3 of the guide rod 2733), the guided portion 2784 (the annular guiding portion 2784a and The opposite guiding part 2784b located at the lower part of the opposing guiding parts 2784b) first reaches the second portion M2 of the guide rod 2733, the opposite guiding part 2784b has an open part on the front case body 2730 side Since the opening portion is formed, it is possible to prevent the opposing guide portion 2784b from being locked to the second portion M2 of the guide rod 2733. As a result, the lift base 2780 can be lowered smoothly.

  Similarly, when raising the elevation base body 2780 at the retracted position (the position where the guided portion 2784 is guided by the first portion M1 of the guide rod 2733), the guided portion 2784 (the annular guiding portion 2784a and the opposing guide The annular guiding portion 2784a located above the portion 2784b) first reaches the second portion M2 of the guiding rod 2733, and the annular guiding portion 2784a is guided along the inclination direction of the second portion M2 When the lifting and lowering base body 2780 is displaced to the front side (forward, left side in FIG. 66), the opposing guide portion 2784b is formed to have an open portion on the front case body 2730 side. Thus, the opposing guide portion 2784 b can be prevented from being locked to the first portion M 1 of the guide rod 2733. As a result, the lifting base 2780 can be raised smoothly.

  As in the case of the first embodiment, the guide rod 2733 is forward of the tooth surface of the rack 762 (front side, left side in FIG. 66) and rearward of the elevating base 2780 (main body 781) Since it is disposed on the rear side and the right side in FIG. 66, as described later, the effect of arranging the elevation base body 2780 offset to the front side with respect to the rack 762 is exhibited and the smooth elevation movement of the elevation base body 2780 Coexistence with the securing of

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72, the operation of the annular operation unit 2700 will be described. In the description, FIGS. 65 to 68 will be referred to as appropriate.

  69 is a schematic rear view of the annular operation unit 2700 schematically showing the annular operation unit 2700 in which the pair of annular forming members 790 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along LXX- of FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular ring operation unit 2700 in LXX line. FIG. 71 is a schematic rear view of the annular operation unit 2700 schematically illustrating the annular operation unit 2700 in which the pair of annular forming members 790 are disposed at the coupling position, and FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular ring operation unit 2700 in the LXXI line.

  69 to 72, the outer shell structure including the middle case body 2710, the back case body 720, and the front case body 2730, the drive motor 740, and the gear group The illustration of the drive structure including the first gear 751 to the sixth gear 756, the cover body 785, and the like is omitted. However, in FIG. 69 and FIG. 71, the position of the upper edge in the main body portion 2711 and the overhang portion 2713 (front surfaces 2711a, 2713a) of the middle case body 2710 and the upper portion in the main body portion 2731 (rear surface 2731a) of the front case body 2730. The positions of the edges are schematically illustrated using two-dot chain lines, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, in the state in which the pair of ring forming members 790 are disposed at the retracted position, the pair of racks 762 are expanded in the direction away from each other, and the tip side (tip guide piece 762a The tooth surface of the side is meshed with the pinion gear 761. Therefore, as in the case of the first embodiment, when the pinion gear 761 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 69 via the gear group by the rotational drive force of the drive motor 540, the rack 762 moves rectilinearly. As the pair of link members 2770 are gradually erected, the lifting base 2780 is lifted.

  In this case, the pair of link members 2770 are slidably displaced while being guided by the first passage P1 of the passages P formed between the middle case body 2710 and the front case body 2730 (see FIG. 65), The base body 2780 (guided portion 2784) is raised along the first portion M1 of the guide rod 2733.

  When the rack 762 is moved rectilinearly by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 540 and the standing up of the pair of link members 2770 and the raising of the elevation base body 2780 are further advanced, the pair of link members 2770 becomes the second one The guided portion 2784 of the lifting base 2780 reaches the second portion M2 of the guide rod 2733 at P2 (see FIG. 65), and is guided along the second passage P2 and the second portion M2 respectively. The pair of link members 2770 and the lifting base 2780 gradually change the front-rear direction position (the position in FIG. 70 in the left-right direction) to the front side (the front, the left side in FIG. 70). Raised and raised).

  When the pair of link members 2770 reach the third passage P3 of the passages P (see FIG. 65) and the guided portion 2784 of the elevating base 2780 reaches the third portion M3 of the guide rod 2733, these links The position in the front-rear direction (the position in the left-right direction in FIG. 70) of the member 2770 and the elevation base body 2780 is set to the frontmost position (that is, the amount of offset to the front side is maximum).

  Thereafter, the pair of link members 2770 are further raised while being guided by the third passage P3 of the passages P (see FIG. 65), and the elevating base 2780 (guided portion 2784) is the third portion of the guide rod 2733 By being further elevated along M3, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the pair of link members 2770 are erected substantially vertically, and the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged in the coupling position, An annular shape is formed by bringing the ends of the annular forming member 790 into contact with each other.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the offset amount to the front side (front, left side in FIGS. 70 and 72) of the pair of link members 2770 and the elevation base body 2780 is configured to be changeable (increased or decreased). Since the offset amount to the side is such that the offset amount at the coupled position is at least larger than the offset amount at the retracted position, the drive motor 740 necessary to hold the lift base 2780 (ring forming member 790) at the coupled position. It is possible to achieve both the suppression of the consumption energy and the suppression of the consumption energy of the drive motor 740 required to raise and lower the elevation base body 2780 (ring forming member 790) between the coupling position and the retraction position.

  That is, if the lifting base 2780 (ring forming member 790) is offset to the front side (front, left in FIG. 72), a force component in the offset direction is generated, and the lifting base 2780 (ring forming The force component that the weight of the member 790 moves the rack 762 in the moving direction can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to hold | maintain the raising / lowering base body 2780 (ring formation member 790) in a coupling | bonding position can be suppressed by that part. On the other hand, when raising and lowering the lifting base 2780 (ring forming member 790) between the coupling position and the retracting position, the above-mentioned force component in the offset direction becomes resistance in the opposite direction. The energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to raise and lower the (ring forming member 790) is increased.

  On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, since the third passage P3 of the passage P is disposed at a position projecting to the front side relative to the first passage P1, the elevating base body 2780 (ring forming member 790) In the path between the retracted position and the coupling position (region corresponding to the first passage P1 and the second passage P2) while suppressing the offset amount to the front side of the coupling to the coupling position (third passage P3) Can be increased to a large amount when the region corresponding to Therefore, in the coupling position, a force component in the offset direction can be secured, and the movement of the rack 762 by the weight of the lifting and lowering base 2780 (ring forming member 790) can be suppressed. On the other hand, when raising and lowering the elevation base body 2780 (ring forming member 790) between the retracted position and the raised position, the force component in the offset direction can be reduced to reduce the resistance.

  As a result, suppression of the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to hold the lifting and lowering base 2780 (ring forming member 790) in the connecting position and the lifting and lowering base 2780 (ring forming member 790) in the connecting position and retraction It is possible to achieve coexistence with the suppression of the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to raise and lower between the positions.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74, the annular operation unit 3700 in the third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, when the elevation base body 780 is elevated, the offset amount to the front side (front) of the elevation base body 780 is maintained constant regardless of the elevation position, but the third embodiment has been described. In the embodiment, in addition to the amount of offset to the front side (front) of the elevation base body 2780 being changed (increased / decreased) according to the elevation position as in the second embodiment, the link at least at the coupling position The main body 771 of the member 3770 is elastically deformed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Here, the ring operation unit 3700 in the third embodiment is different from the ring operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment in the configuration of the link member 3700 from the link member 2700 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 67). Except for the points, the other configurations are the same. That is, in the third embodiment, the intermediate case body 2710, the back case body 720, the front case body 2730 (all in FIGS. 65 and 66) and the elevating base body 2780 (see FIG. 68) described in the second embodiment. Is used. The description of these same configurations is omitted.

  FIG. 73 (a) is a side view of the link member 3770 in the third embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 50 (d). FIG. 73 (b) is a top view of the intermediate case body 2710, the back case body 720, and the front case body 2730 in an assembled state, in which the standing and lying link member 3770 is arranged in the passage P. It is illustrated in figure. 73B shows a state in which the main body 771 of the link member 3770 is cut along the opening edge of the passage P and viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (a), the link member 3770 in the third embodiment is, like the link member 770 in the first embodiment, inserted shaft 772 from the back on the one side (base end) in the longitudinal direction of the main body 771. And the projecting wall portion 2773 is projected from the front on the other side (tip) of the main body portion 771 on the opposite side to the insertion shaft 772. A gear portion 774 is disposed at the tip.

  In the link member 3770 in the third embodiment, the projecting dimension of the projecting wall portion 3773 is larger than the projecting dimension of the projecting wall portion 773 in the first embodiment with respect to the link member 770 in the first embodiment. Other configurations are identical except that they are set to large (long) dimensions. On the other hand, with respect to the link member 2770 in the second embodiment, the link member 3770 in the third embodiment has the projection dimension of the insertion shaft 772 smaller (shorter) than the projection dimension of the insertion shaft 2772 in the second embodiment. The other configuration is the same except that the dimensions are set. That is, the insertion shaft 772 is common to the first embodiment and the third embodiment, and the projecting wall portion 3773 is common to the second embodiment and the third embodiment.

  The insertion shaft 772 is inserted through the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 in the rotational direction through the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 2710 as described above, and through the insertion groove 722 of the rear case body 720. The end face in the axial direction is disposed on the back face of the rear case body 720, and the collar C is fastened and fixed to the end face in the axial direction of the insertion shaft 772 (see FIGS. 48 and 49).

  In this case, in the second embodiment, the insertion shaft 2772 can slide in the axial direction with respect to the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 (see FIG. 67 (b)), but in the third embodiment, the first embodiment As in the case of the embodiment, the collar C being in contact with the back surface of the rear case 520 restricts (limits) the insertion shaft 772 from sliding in the axial direction with respect to the insertion hole 762 c of the rack 762. .

  That is, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), the link member 3770 is guided (held) in the first passage P1 in the projecting dimension (dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 73 (a)) of the insertion shaft 772 from the main body 771. In this state, the axial tip end face of the insertion shaft 772 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the rear case body 720 (that is, the collar C abuts on the rear surface of the rear case body 720 or has a slight gap). Set to be placed in

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the insertion shaft 2772 of the link member 2770 slides the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 67B), the link member 2772 is the first passage P1, The slide member is slidable along each of the second passage P2 and the third passage P3 (see FIG. 67 (b)), while the link member 3770 in the third embodiment has the insertion shaft 772 of the rack 762 The main body 771 of the link member 3770 does not slide in the second passage P2 and the third passage P3 in the second passage P2 and the third passage P3 without sliding in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 73B) with respect to the insertion hole 762c. It abuts on the inner wall surface (the front surface 2711 a of the intermediate case body 2710) of the passage P3. Thereby, the link member 3770 is secondly deformed while the main body 771 is pressed by the inner wall surfaces of the second and third passages P2 and P3 and is elastically deformed forward (front side (upper side in FIG. 73 (b)) The passage P2 and the third passage P3 are slidingly displaced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the operation of the annular operation unit 3700 will be described. Note that FIGS. 69 to 71 will be referred to as appropriate in this description.

  FIG. 74 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular operation unit 3700 in which the pair of annular forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position, and corresponds to FIG. In FIG. 74, an outer shell structure including an intermediate case body 2710, a back case body 720, and a front case body 2730, a drive motor 740, and a gear group (first gear 751) in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding. The illustration of the drive structure consisting of the sixth to sixth gears 756) or the cover body 785 etc. is omitted.

  As described above, in the state in which the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged at the retracted position (see FIGS. 69 and 70), the pair of racks 762 are expanded in the direction away from each other. As the rack 762 moves rectilinearly by the driving force, the lift base body 2780 is lifted with the pair of link members 3770 being gradually raised.

  In this case, as in the case of the second embodiment, the pair of link members 3770 is slide-displaced while being guided by the first passage P1 of the passages P formed between the intermediate case body 2710 and the front case body 2730. At the same time, the lifting base 2780 (guided portion 2784) is lifted along the first portion M1 of the guide rod 2733.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the standing up of the pair of link members 3770 and the raising of the lifting and lowering base body 2780 are further advanced, and the pair of link members 3770 along the second passage P2 and the third passage P3 of the passages P ( 73B, when the guided portion 2784 of the lifting base 2780 is guided to the second portion M2 and the third portion M3 of the guiding rod 2733, respectively, the link member 3770 is erected substantially vertically. Then, the pair of ring forming members 790 are disposed at the coupling position, and the ring shape is formed.

  In this case, as described above, in the link member 3770, the main body 771 is in contact with the inner wall surface of the second passage P2 and the third passage P3 (the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710). The link member 3770 (main body 771) is elastically deformed (flexible deformation) by pressing the portion 771 toward the front side (rear surface 2731a side) of the front case 2730.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, as in the case of the second embodiment, the positions of the first passage P1 and the third passage P3 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 73 (b) vertical direction) are made different. The amount of offset at the coupling position is increased to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to hold the lift base 2780 (ring forming member 790) at the coupling position, and to reduce the offset at the retraction position. Thus, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to raise and lower the lifting base 2780 (ring forming member 790) between the coupling position and the retraction position.

  In particular, in the third embodiment, the insertion shaft 772 protruding from one side (base end) in the longitudinal direction of the link member 3770 (main body 771) slides in the axial direction with respect to the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 That one side (base end) of the link member 3770 (body part 771) in the longitudinal direction is displaced with respect to the rack 762 in the offset direction (longitudinal direction, vertical direction in FIG. 73 (b)). Since the link member 3770 is connected to the rack 762 in an inoperable state, as shown in FIG. 74, one of the opposing inner wall surfaces of the third passage P3 (a front surface 2711a of the middle case body 2710). And elastically deforms the main body 771 of the link member 3770 in contact with the other one of the opposing inner wall surfaces of the third passage P3 (positive It is possible to form a state of being pressed against the back surface 2731A) of the case body 2730.

  Thereby, in the state where the lift base 2780 is disposed at the coupling position, the link member 3770 (main body 771) is added to the third passage P3 in addition to the force component in the offset direction by the lift base 2780 being offset. The increase in resistance caused by pressing against one of the opposing inner wall surfaces can suppress the rack 762 from being moved in the horizontal direction by the weight of the elevating base 2780, the ring forming member 790, and the like. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to hold the lifting and lowering base 2780 (ring forming member 790) in the coupling position.

  On the other hand, in the first passage P1 of the passages P, the main wall 771 of the link member 3770 is selected depending on the opposing inner wall surface of the first passage P1 (the front 2711a of the middle case 2710 and the back 2273a of the front case 2730). The elastic deformation is not formed, and the state in which the opposing inner wall surface of the first passage P1 is pressed is released by the main body 771 of the link member 3770. Thus, the resistance between the link member 3770 (main body 771) and the inner wall surface of the first passage P1 is suppressed, and the elevating base 2780 (ring forming member 790) is raised and lowered between the coupling position and the retraction position. It is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 necessary for causing the motor.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77, the first combined operation unit 4500 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, a crank mechanism (crank gear 524, rotating shaft 525a and connecting rod 525) and a first link member 541 (rotation mechanism) are mechanisms for converting rotational motion of the drive motor 522 into linear motion of the slide mechanism 530. In the fourth embodiment, a rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 4543 and rack 4544) is used as a mechanism for converting the rotational movement of the drive motor 522 into linear movement of the slide mechanism 530. Ru. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 75 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first combined operation unit 4500 in the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 75, illustration of the raising member 550 and the decoration part 560 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the first coupling operation unit 4500 in the fourth embodiment includes a drive unit 4520 which is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 4510 and generates a drive force, and the drive force of the drive unit 4520. A rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 4543 and rack 4544) which transmits to the slide mechanism 530 and is disposed on the back side of the substrate member 4510 is configured.

  Here, the first combined operation unit 4500 in the fourth embodiment transmits the rotational driving force of the drive unit 4520 (drive motor 522) to the slide mechanism unit 530 with respect to the first combined operation unit 500 in the first embodiment. The only difference is the configuration (that is, the first link member 541 is employed in the first embodiment, but the rack and pinion mechanism is employed in the fourth embodiment), and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, in the following, only the configuration for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive unit 4520 (drive motor 522) to the slide mechanism unit 530 will be described, and the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

  The substrate member 4510 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape which is long in a front view, and a connection hole 4513 is formed on the side of the pair of guide grooves 511 (left side in FIG. 75). The connection hole 4513 is for inserting the connection shaft 4526 in the drive portion 4520 from the front side to the back side of the substrate member 4510 and connecting the connection shaft 4526 and the pinion gear 4543 in the rack and pinion mechanism on the back surface side of the substrate member 4510 Is a circular opening in front view.

  The drive portion 4520 includes a drive motor 522, a pinion gear 523 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 522, and a second gear 4524 meshed with the pinion gear 523 and rotatably supported by the case body 521. And a connecting shaft 4526 protruding from the end face of the second gear 4524. The connecting shaft 4526 is coaxially fixed to the second gear 4524. Therefore, when the rotational drive of the drive motor 522 is transmitted to the second gear 4524 via the pinion gear 523 and the second gear 4524 is rotated, the connecting shaft 4526 is rotated in synchronization with the second gear 4525.

  As described above, the rack and pinion mechanism is a member for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism 530. The pinion gear 4543 and the rack gear with which the pinion gear 4543 is meshed are linear on the side. It consists of a rack 4544 to be engraved. The rack 4544 is connected to the slide mechanism 530 by the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism 530 being fastened and fixed. In this connection state, the rack 4544 extends the direction of extension of the rack gear as the guide groove 511 extends It is considered to be a posture along the direction.

  When drive unit 4520 (case body 521) is assembled on the front side of substrate member 4510, connection shaft 4526 is inserted through connection hole 4513 of substrate member 4510, and the tip of connection shaft 4526 is the back side of substrate member 4510. It is projected on. A flat surface is formed by chamfering at the tip of the connecting shaft 4526, and by engagement with the flat surface, the pinion gear 4543 of the rack and pinion mechanism is coupled to the connecting shaft 4526 so as to be relatively non-rotatable. A snap ring E formed as an E-ring is attached to a tip end of the connecting shaft 4526 inserted (coupled) to the pinion gear 4543, and it is set as a retaining member.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77, the operation of the first combined operation unit 4500 will be described.

  FIG. 76 (a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 4500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 76 (b) is a layout of the first coupling member 539 at the retracted position. FIG. 34 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 4500 in the closed state. FIG. 77 (a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 4500 in a state in which the first coupling member 539 is disposed in the coupling position, and FIG. 77 (b) is a diagram in which the first coupling member 539 is disposed in the coupling position FIG. 34 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 4500 in the closed state. 76 and 77, illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate the understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b), when the first coupling member 539 is in the retracted position, the rack 4544 of the rack and pinion mechanism is the upper end side of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 4510 (see FIG. 76 (b) upper side). Therefore, the A layer base plate 531 (see FIGS. 38 and 39) of the slide mechanism 530 is disposed on the upper end side of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 4510, and the first coupling member 539 is elevated (the retracted position is disposed). State is formed.

  In this case, as in the case of the first embodiment, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 indicates the posture of the second link member 542 in the posture shown in FIG. As a result, the sliding hole 542c is operated in the direction of holding it in the posture rotated in the direction to raise it. Therefore, the first coupling member 539 can be stably held at the retracted position shown in FIG. 76 (a). In particular, an external force (for example, an external force generated by a player hitting or swinging a gaming machine) is applied to the first coupling member 539 that should be in the stopped state at the retracted position, and the first coupling member 539 is vertically moved. Even when vibration is generated, the vibration of the first coupling member 539 in the vertical direction can be rapidly converged using the biasing force of the biasing spring 571.

  In the drive unit 4520, the drive motor 522 is rotationally driven in the first direction from the state shown in FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b), via the second gear 4524 and the connecting shaft 4526 (see FIG. When the pinion gear 4543 of the rack and pinion mechanism is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 76 (b)), the rack 4544 is lowered by the rotation of the pinion gear 4543. As a result, the slide mechanism 530 (A layer base plate 531) is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 4510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms are operated (FIG. 38). And FIG. 39), the first coupling member 539 is lowered.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the rack 4544 of the rack and pinion mechanism is lowered, and the A layer base plate 531 (insertion shaft 531c) of the slide mechanism 530 is a guide groove 511 of the substrate member 4510. By being disposed on the lower end side (the lower side in FIG. 77B), the first coupling member 539 is lowered (the coupling position is disposed).

  On the other hand, from the states shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), in the drive unit 4520, the drive motor 522 is rotationally driven in a second rotation direction opposite to the first direction. When the pinion gear 4543 of the rack and pinion mechanism is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 77B) via the second gear 4524 and the connecting shaft 4526 (see FIG. 75), the pinion gear 4543 rotates. The rack 4544 is raised. As a result, the A layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism 530 is raised along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 4510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms are operated (FIG. 38 and FIG. 39), the first coupling member 539 is lifted. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 76A and 76B, the first coupling member 539 is disposed (returned) to the retracted position.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the drive force transmission path for transmitting the drive force of the drive unit 4520 (drive motor 522) to the slide mechanism unit 530 is configured by the rack and pinion mechanism including the pinion gear 4543 and the rack 4544. The rotational driving force (rotational motion) of the portion 4520 (drive motor 522) can be converted into linear motion and then transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530. As a result, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 522 can be efficiently transmitted to the slide mechanism 530, and the slide displacement (raising and lowering) of the slide mechanism 530 can be stabilized.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, two or more (three in the present embodiment) insertion shafts 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c of the slide mechanism 530 can be coupled to one rack 4544, and the insertion shafts It is possible to increase the number of parts that can be shared by the rack 4544 as the parts (color C) necessary to hold the 531 c. That is, in the first embodiment, the number of the color C that can be shared by the first link member 541 is only one, and thus two other colors C are required (see FIG. 35). In the fourth embodiment, such two collars C can be omitted (three collars C can be shared by the rack 4544). As a result, while securing the number of insertion shafts 531c and enabling stable slide movement (lifting and lowering) of the slide mechanism 530, the number of parts (colors C) for holding the insertion shafts 531c is reduced. Can reduce costs.

  In this manner, two or more insertion shafts 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 that slides (moves up and down) are used as the first link member 541 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35). In the first link member 541 configured to transmit the driving force of the drive unit 520 to the slide mechanism unit 530 by swinging (rotation), movement of a connection portion (sliding hole 541 c) with the insertion shaft 531 c Since the locus becomes an arc, it is impossible, and it becomes possible for the first time by adopting a rack and pinion mechanism as a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive unit 4520 to the slide mechanism unit 530 as in the present embodiment. (Ie, by making the movement locus of the rack 4544 straight, the input direction of the driving force is made to correspond to the direction of slide displacement (raising and lowering) of the slide mechanism 530. Thus, as described above, a component for retaining the insertion shaft 531 c while securing the number of insertion shafts 531 c and enabling stable slide movement (raising and lowering) of the slide mechanism 530 (color C The cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts).

  Next, the first combined operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 79. In the fourth embodiment, the slide mechanism 530 (insertion shaft 531c) has been described in connection with the structure (rack and pinion mechanism and link mechanism (second link member)) having different mechanisms. The structure (rack and pinion mechanism) of the same mechanism is connected to the slide mechanism 530 (insertion shaft 531c) in the fifth embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 78 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first coupling operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 78, illustration of the raising member 550 and the decoration part 560 is omitted.

  Here, the first coupling operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment transmits the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 (see FIG. 34) to the slide mechanism 530 with respect to the first coupling operation unit 4500 in the fourth embodiment. The configuration is different (i.e., the second link member 542 is employed in the fourth embodiment, while the rack and pinion mechanism is employed in the fifth embodiment), and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, in the following, only the configuration for transmitting the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 to the slide mechanism unit 530 will be described, and the description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment will be omitted.

  Further, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, the one for transmitting the driving force of the drive portion 4520 of the pair of rack and pinion mechanisms to the slide mechanism portion 530 (the one on the left side of FIG. A pinion mechanism and a mechanism for transmitting the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 to the slide mechanism portion 530 (the one on the right side in FIG. 78) are referred to as “a rack and pinion mechanism on the biasing side”.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the substrate member 5510 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape long in a front view, and supports the connecting groove 5514 and the support at a position opposite to the insertion hole 4513 across the pair of guide grooves 511. A shaft 5516 is provided. The connection groove 5514 allows a locking claw (not shown) provided on the front side of the pinion gear 5543 to be inserted from the back side of the substrate member 5510 to the front side, and the locking claw inserted therein is biased by an urging spring 571. It is an opening for locking the end portion (see FIG. 34), and is curved and extended in an arc shape centering on the support shaft 5516. That is, the connection groove 5514 is formed as an opening of a size that allows movement of the locking claw when the pinion gear 5543 is rotated about the support shaft 5516.

  The support shaft 5516 is a shaft for supporting the pinion gear 5543 and the biasing spring 571 (see FIG. 34), and is protruded from the front side and the back side of the substrate member 5510, respectively. That is, the pinion gear 5543 is provided on the support shaft 5516 provided on the back side of the substrate member 5510, and the biasing spring 571 is provided on the support shaft (not shown) provided on the front side of the substrate member 5510. Be supported. Note that the support shaft 5516 is disposed at a position that is line-symmetrical to the communication hole 4513, with the virtual straight line passing through the middle of the pair of guide grooves 511 as the line of symmetry.

  The rack-pinion mechanism on the biasing side is a member for transmitting the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 (see FIG. 34) to the slide mechanism 530 as described above, and the pinion gear 5543 and its pinion gear 5543 are teeth A rack gear to be engaged is composed of a rack 5544 linearly engraved on the side surface. The biased rack-pinion mechanism (pinion gear 5543 and rack 5454) is configured substantially the same as the drive-side rack-pinion mechanism (pinion gear 4543 and rack 4544).

  That is, the pinion gear 5543 is the same as the pinion gear 4543 in the other configuration for determining the characteristics of the gear such as the number of teeth and the pitch circle except that a locking claw (not shown) is formed on the front side. . Similarly, the rack 5544 is the same as the rack 4544 in the other configuration for determining the characteristics of the rack gear such as the number of teeth and the tooth shape except that the upper end side is made uneven in order to avoid interference with the substrate member 5510. Be done.

  Therefore, the slide mechanism 530 is held in left-right symmetry with the drive-side rack and pinion mechanism and the drive-side rack and pinion mechanism (that is, the support reaction force acts left-right symmetrically, and the slide mechanism 530 is (Inclination) can be suppressed), so that the slide displacement (raising and lowering) of the slide mechanism 530 can be stably performed. In addition, when the slide mechanism 530 is raised, the driving force of the drive unit 4520 can be assisted by utilizing the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 (see FIG. 34). Can be suppressed.

  As described above, the biasing spring 571 is formed as a torsion coil spring, and is disposed in a state in which the pair of arm portions are elastically deformed in the direction in which they approach each other (see FIG. 34), The elastic recovery force urges the rack 5544 upward via the pinion gear 5543 in the upward direction (upper side in FIG. 78). That is, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 is exerted in the direction of holding the rack and pinion mechanism on the biasing side in the posture shown in FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, the operation of the first combined operation unit 5500 will be described.

  FIG. 79 (a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 5500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 79 (b) is a layout of the first coupling member 539 at the retracted position. FIG. 30 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 5500 in the closed state. FIG. 80 (a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 5500 in a state in which the first coupling member 539 is disposed at the coupling position, and FIG. 80 (b) is a layout of the first coupling member 539 at the coupling position. FIG. 30 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 5500 in the closed state. 79 and 80, illustration of the raising member 550 and the decoration part 560 is omitted in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate the understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), when the first coupling member 539 is in the retracted position, both the drive-side rack and pinion mechanism and the biasing side rack and pinion mechanism The racks 4454 and 5544 are disposed on the upper end side (upper side in FIG. 79) of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510.

  In this case, as in the first embodiment, the urging force of the urging spring 571 holds the rack 5544 in the rack-and-pinion mechanism on the urging side in the position shown in FIG. The pinion gear 5543 is operated to rotate clockwise in FIG. 79 (b). Therefore, the first coupling member 539 can be stably held at the retracted position shown in FIG. 79 (a). In particular, an external force (for example, an external force generated by a player hitting or swinging a gaming machine) is applied to the first coupling member 539 that should be in the stopped state at the retracted position, and the first coupling member 539 is vertically moved. Even when vibration is generated, the vibration of the first coupling member 539 in the vertical direction can be rapidly converged using the biasing force of the biasing spring 571.

  In the drive unit 4520, the drive motor 522 is rotationally driven in the first direction from the state shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), via the second gear 4524 and the connecting shaft 4526 (see FIG. When the pinion gear 4543 in the drive-side rack and pinion mechanism is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 79 (b)), the rack 4544 is lowered by the rotation of the pinion gear 4543. As a result, the slide mechanism 530 (A layer base plate 531) is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510.

  On the other hand, from the state shown in FIGS. 80A and 80B (the state where the first coupling member 539 is lowered (the coupling position is disposed)), the driving motor 522 in the driving portion 4520 By being rotationally driven in the second rotation direction opposite to the direction, the pinion gear 4543 in the drive-side rack and pinion mechanism is reversely driven via the second gear 4524 and the connecting shaft 4526 (see FIG. 78). When it is rotated counterclockwise (FIG. 80 (b)), the rack 4544 is raised by the rotation of its pinion gear 4543. Accordingly, the slide mechanism 530 (A layer base plate 531) is lifted along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510.

  According to the present embodiment, when the slide mechanism unit 530 is slide-displaced (raised or lowered), the rack 5544 in the rack-and-pinion mechanism on the biasing side can be lowered while the pinion gear 55443 is driven to rotate. it can. In this case, as described above, the connecting shaft 4526 and the support shaft 5526 are disposed in line symmetry with an imaginary straight line passing through the middle of the pair of guide grooves 511 as a symmetry line, and on the biasing side. The rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 5543 and rack 5544) and the drive side rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 4543 and rack 5544) have substantially the same configuration.

  That is, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, in the configuration in which the slide mechanism 530 is supported by the structures (rack and pinion mechanism and link mechanism (second link member)) of different mechanisms, the support reaction force on the left and right is It becomes uneven and the slide displacement of the slide mechanism 530 becomes unstable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the support reaction force received by the pair of racks 4454 and 5544 from the respective pinion gears 4543 and 5543 can be equalized in left-right symmetry, and as a result, the slide mechanism 530 is held in left-right symmetry. be able to. Therefore, the slide displacement of the slide mechanism 530 can be stably performed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, all (six in the present embodiment) insertion shafts 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c of the slide mechanism 530 can be connected to the racks 4454 and 5544, and the insertion shafts 531c can be The racks 4454 and 5544 can share all of the parts (color C) that were required to hold them. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the color C can be eliminated. As a result, while securing the number of insertion shafts 531c and enabling stable slide movement (lifting and lowering) of the slide mechanism 530, parts (colors C) for holding the insertion shafts 531c are omitted, and cost is reduced. It is possible to reduce.

  As described above, the omission of all of the components (colors C) for holding the plurality of insertion shafts 531 c of the slide mechanism unit 530 that slides (moves up and down) as in the case of each of the above embodiments. The configuration that employs the link mechanism (the first link member 541 or the second link member 542) is not possible, and the drive side that transmits the drive force of the drive unit 4520 to the slide mechanism unit 530 as in the present embodiment This is made possible for the first time by adopting a rack and pinion mechanism for both of the biasing side that transmits the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 to the slide mechanism portion 530, and as a result, as described above, insertion There is no need for a part (color C) for holding the insertion shaft 531c while securing the number of the shafts 531c to enable stable slide movement (lifting and lowering) of the slide mechanism 530. , It is possible to reduce the cost.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81 to FIG. 83, the first combined operation unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the rack and pinion mechanism on the drive side and the racks 4454 and 5544 in the rack and pinion mechanism on the urging side are separately formed. However, the rack 6544 in the sixth embodiment is a drive. The rack in the side rack and pinion mechanism and the rack in the biasing side rack and pinion mechanism are used in common. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 81 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first coupling operation unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 81, illustration of the raising member 550 and the decoration part 560 is omitted.

  Here, the first combined operation unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment is different from the first combined operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment in the configuration of the rack 6544 (that is, two parts of the racks 4454 and 5544 in the fifth embodiment). In the sixth embodiment, the rack 6544 is formed as an integral part, while the other configuration is the same. Therefore, in the following, only the configuration of the rack 6544 will be described, and the description of the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 81, the rack 6544 is formed by connecting and integrating facings between the rack 4544 in the drive side rack and pinion mechanism and the rack 5544 in the drive side rack and pinion mechanism in the fifth embodiment. It is formed as a part. That is, the rack 6544 is formed as a flat plate in which a rack gear in which the pinion gear 4543 is meshed and a rack gear in which the pinion gear 5543 is meshed are linearly cut on the other side. Ru.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83, the operation of the first combined operation unit 6500 will be described.

  FIG. 82 (a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 6500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 82 (b) is a layout of the first coupling member 539 at the retracted position. FIG. 32 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 6500 in the closed state. FIG. 83 (a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 6500 in a state in which the first coupling member 539 is disposed in the coupling position, and FIG. 83 (b) is a diagram in which the first coupling member 539 is disposed in the coupling position FIG. 32 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 6500 in the closed state. 82 and 83, illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate the understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, according to the first combined operation unit 6500, the drive motor 522 of the drive unit 4520 is rotationally driven in the first direction, as in the case of the fifth embodiment. The pinion gear 4543 is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 82B), and the rack 6544 (slide mechanism 530) is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510 while the drive motor 522 of the drive unit 4520 is By being rotationally driven in the second rotation direction opposite to the first direction, the pinion gear 4543 is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (b)), and the rack 5544 (ie, the slide mechanism portion) 530) is raised along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510.

  According to the present embodiment, as in the case of the fifth embodiment, since the racks 6544 are symmetrically held by the pair of pinion gears 4543 and 5543, the supporting reaction force that the racks 6544 receive from the pair of pinion gears 4543 and 5543. Can be made symmetrical as a left-right symmetry, and as a result, slide displacement (raising and lowering) of the slide mechanism 530 can be stably performed.

  Here, as in the case of the fifth embodiment, a pair of racks 4454 and 5544 are formed independently, and one rack 4544 is driven by one pinion gear 4543, and the displacement of the other rack 5544 causes the other pinion gear 5543 to move. In the configuration in which the drive mechanism is driven, relative displacement is likely to occur between the pair of racks 4454 and 5544. Therefore, the rotation of one pinion gear 4543 and the rotation of the other pinion gear 5543 are shifted, and the slide displacement of the slide mechanism 530 Lifting) becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rack 6544 is formed as one integral part, positional deviation is not generated at the relative positions of the rack gears respectively formed on both sides, and accordingly, rotation of one pinion gear 4543 and the other It is easy to synchronize with the rotation of the pinion gear 5543. As a result, slide displacement (raising and lowering) of the slide mechanism 530 can be stably performed.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the two rows of the insertion shafts 531 c of the slide mechanism 530 are connected by the racks 6544 so that the rigidity of the slide mechanism 530 as a whole can be enhanced. At the same time, the postures of the two rows of insertion shafts 531c with respect to the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 5510 can be stabilized. As a result, slide displacement (raising and lowering) of the slide mechanism 530 can be stably performed.

  Next, a composite operation unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the connection groove 481c of the slide rack member 481 is linearly extended, but the connection groove 7481c of the slide rack 7481 in the seventh embodiment is formed to be curved in an arc shape. Ru. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  84 (a) to 84 (c) are exploded perspective views of the combined operation unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment, showing the relative displacement of the second gear 452 and the slide rack member 7481 relative to the back arm 471. In the illustrated state, the operation members 491, 492 and the front arm body 472 are removed. In FIG. 84 (a), the open / close second gear 452 is counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with respect to FIG. 84 (b), and FIG. 84 (c) is open / close with respect to FIG. 84 (b). The gear 452 corresponds to the clockwise (clockwise) rotation.

  As shown in FIG. 84, in the combined operation unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment, the opening / closing second gear 7452 makes the arrangement position of the connecting projection 452 d different from the opening / closing second gear 452 in the first embodiment. It is formed. Specifically, the main body portion 7452a is formed such that the portion where the connection projection 452d is disposed protrudes radially outward (downward in FIG. 84B) than in the case of the main body portion 452a in the first embodiment. Thus, the distance from the axial center of the opening / closing second gear 7452 to the axial center of the connecting projection 452 d is from the axial center of the opening / closing second gear 7452 in the first embodiment to the axial center of the connecting projection 452 d in the first embodiment. It is set to a size larger than the distance of.

  As the slide rack member 7481 is positioned outward in the radial direction with the connecting protrusion 452d of the opening / closing second gear 7452, the forming position of the connecting groove 7481c is on the side of the guide protrusion 481d (FIG. 84 (b) Close to the lower side). Further, the connecting groove 7481 c is curved and extended in an arc shape. Specifically, the connecting groove 7481c has an annular shape whose axis is located on the extension of the guide convex portion 481d on the side opposite to the axis of the open / close second gear 7452 (lower side in FIG. 84B). It is formed in a substantially C shape divided at a predetermined central angle (about 45 degrees in this embodiment). The groove width of the connection groove 7481c is a groove width with which the connection projection 452d of the open / close second gear 452 can slide.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (b), according to the combined operation unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment, the second gear 452 is not rotated when the second gear 452 is not rotated against the biasing force of the biasing spring 484. The connection protrusion 7452 d of the gear 7452 is pulled downward (FIG. 84 (b) lower) by the slide rack member 7481, and the connection groove 7481 c and the second shaft in the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 84 (b)). A distance between 427 is a distance L3. Further, in the pair of first pinion leg members 482, the distance between their connection holes 482d is a distance W1. Note that, as described above, the distance L3 is the distance L1 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 26 (b)) as the connecting projection 452d is positioned more radially outward than in the first embodiment. It is made larger than L1 (L1 <L3).

  When, for example, the open / close second gear 7452 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm 471 from the state shown in FIG. By sliding in the connection groove 7481c of the slide rack member 7481, the movement of the connection projection 7452d moves the slide rack member 7481 against the biasing force of the biasing spring 484 to the upper side (the upper side in FIG. 84A). Slide to displace.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 84 (a), when the open / close second gear 7452 is rotated to a predetermined rotational position, the connecting groove 7481c and the second shaft 427 in the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 84 (a)). The distance between them is shortened to the distance L2 (L2 <L3), and the slide rack member 7481 is slidingly displaced upward by the difference between the distances L3 and L2.

  In this case, since the difference between the distances L3 and L2 is larger than the distance L1 as described above, the difference between the distances L1 and L2 in the first embodiment (FIG. 26 (a) and FIG. b) (see (L1-L2) <(L3-L2)). Thus, with the upward slide displacement of the slide rack member 7481, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are rotated in the direction away from each other, and the distance between the connection holes 482d is enlarged and formed. The interval W3 can be made larger than the interval W2 in the first embodiment (W2 <W3). The same applies to the case of FIG. 84 (c) in which the open / close second gear 7452 is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise)), and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, according to the seventh embodiment, the connection groove 7481 c of the slide rack member 7481 is formed in an arc shape having an axial center on the opposite side to the opening / closing second gear 7452 (ie, convex toward the opening / closing second gear 7452). Of the combined operation unit 7400, and the slide displacement amount (L3-L2) of the slide rack member 7481 accompanying the rotation of the second gear 7452 is increased without increasing the size of the combined operation unit 7400. As a result, the maximum amount of movement of the first pinion leg member 482 (and the second pinion leg member 483) (that is, the distance between the communication holes 482d, W3) can be increased. As a result, the maximum opening amount of the operation members 491, 492 can be increased (see FIG. 27) to enhance the effect of the effect.

  Next, a combined operation unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, two pairs of members for supporting the operation members 491, 492 (two pairs of a pair of first pinion leg members 482 and a pair of second pinion leg members 483) Although the case where it arrange | positions was demonstrated, the member for supporting the operation member 491, 492 of 8th Embodiment is used as a one-to-one pair. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  85 (a) to 85 (c) are exploded perspective views of the combined operation unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment, showing the relative displacement of the second gear 452 and the slide rack member 7481 with respect to the back arm 471. In the illustrated state, the operation members 491, 492 and the front arm body 472 are removed. 85 (a) shows that the second gear 452 for opening and closing is counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with respect to FIG. 85 (b), and FIG. 85 (c) shows the second for opening and closing with respect to FIG. 85 (b). The gear 452 corresponds to the clockwise (clockwise) rotation.

  Here, the combined operation unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment differs from the combined operation unit 400 in the first embodiment in that the first pinion leg member 482 is omitted and the shape of the second pinion leg member 8483 is changed. And the other configurations are identical. In the following, only these different configurations will be described, and descriptions of the same configurations will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the second pinion leg member 8483 in the eighth embodiment is different from the main body portion 483a of the second pinion leg member 8483 in the first embodiment in the main body portion 8483a from the connection hole 483d to the axial support hole 483b. And a second connection hole 8483 e is formed through the tip of the extended portion (the other end in the longitudinal direction opposite to the axial support hole 483 b). The raised fastening portions 491a and 492a of the operation members 491 and 492 are rotatably inserted into the connection holes 483d and the second connection holes 8483d, and are fastened and fixed by fastening screws (see FIGS. 21 and 22). As a result, the operation members 491, 492 are connected to the second pinion leg member 8483.

  An urging spring 484 (see FIG. 22) formed of a coil spring is disposed between the pair of second pinion leg members 8483 in a state of being elastically deformed in tension, and the elastic recovery of the urging spring 484 is performed. The force is configured to cause the pair of second pinion leg members 8483 to approach each other. Thus, when the operating members 491 and 492 are closed in the opening and closing operation, the operating members 491 and 492 are brought into close contact with each other using the biasing force of the biasing spring 484 to form a gap. It can be suppressed.

  Here, when the operating members 491 and 492 are operated to open and close (see FIG. 27), each of the operating members 491 and 492 is supported at a plurality of locations (two or more) in order to stabilize the posture during the operation. Is preferred. In this case, in the case of the first embodiment, by connecting the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 to each of the operation members 491, 492, support at a plurality of places (two places) is possible. However, in such a configuration, the number of parts of the members (the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483) for supporting the operation members 491, 492 is increased.

  On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, since the connecting hole 483 d and the second connecting hole 8483 e are provided in the second pinion leg member 8483, each of the operation members 491, 492 can be supported at a plurality of places (two places). As a result, the first pinion leg member 8482 (and the shaft portion 471c of the back arm 471 for supporting the support hole 482b of the first pinion leg member 482) (see FIGS. 21 and 22) is omitted. can do.

  As a result, the weight of the combined operation unit 8400 as a whole can be reduced, so the maximum output required for the drive motor 530 (see FIG. 21) can be reduced, and the drive motor 530 can be miniaturized accordingly. it can.

  In particular, the first pinion leg member 482 (and the shaft portion 471c of the back arm 471 for rotatably supporting the shaft support hole 482b of the first pinion leg member 482) is the second operating member 491, 492 When rotated about the shaft 427 (see FIG. 27), the members are displaced together with the operation members 491 and 492 about the second shaft 427. Therefore, the weight reduction due to the omission of the first pinion leg member 482 and the shaft portion 471c reduces the influence of the inertial force when starting the rotational operation of the operating members 491, 492 in the stopped state, and the drive motor 530 In particular, it contributes to the miniaturization of

  Next, a combined operation unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the operating members 491 and 492 are opened and closed using the rotational movement of the first and second pinion leg members 482 and 483 has been described. However, the opening and closing of the operating members 491 and 492 in the ninth embodiment are described. The linear motion of the cam leg member 9483 is used. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  86 (a) to 86 (c) are exploded perspective views of the combined operation unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment, showing the relative displacement of the second gear 452 and the slide cam member 9481 relative to the back arm 9471. In the illustrated state, the operation members 491, 492 and the front arm body 472 are removed. 86 (a) corresponds to FIG. 86 (b), the second gear 452 opens and closes counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and FIG. 86 (c) corresponds to FIG. 86 (b). The second gear 452 corresponds to the clockwise (clockwise) rotation.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the combined operation unit 7400 in the ninth embodiment has an open / close second gear 452 between opposing surfaces (front and back) of a back arm 9471 and a front arm 472 (not shown). A slide cam member 9481 driven (slide displacement) and a cam leg member 9482 driven (slide displacement) by the slide cam member 9481 are provided.

  The slide cam member 9481 and the cam leg member 9482 constitute a cam mechanism with these two members, and the rotational movement of the open / close second gear 452 is linear motion (a direction in which the pair of cam leg members 9482 approach or move away from each other b) Slide members in the left and right direction) are operated to open and close the operation members 941 and 942.

  The slide cam member 9481 has a main body 9481a, cams 9481b formed to project to the left and right sides of the main body 9481a, and one end of the main body 9481a in the longitudinal direction, and the connecting projection 452d of the open / close second gear 452 It has a connection groove 481c to be inserted, and a guide convex portion 9481d which is projected in a substantially rectangular cross section from the front and back of the main body 9481a and is linearly extended along the longitudinal direction of the main body 9481a.

  The guide convex portion 9481 d is formed by shortening the extension length of the guide convex portion 481 d in the first embodiment, and can slide on the back arm body 9471 and the guide concave grooves 471 d and 472 d of the front arm body 472. It is interpolated. Therefore, the slide cam member 9481 has the slide displacement direction in the extending direction of the guide recessed grooves 471 d and 472 d (that is, the longitudinal direction of the back arm 9471 and the front arm 472) as in the first embodiment. , (B) in the vertical direction).

  The cam surface CS is formed on the outer surface of the cam portion 9481 b facing the open / close second gear 452 side. The cam surface CS is a sliding surface for pushing the main body 9482a of the cam leg member 9482 outward (in the direction away from the main body 481a), and separates from the second gear 452 as it is separated from the main body 9481a. It is formed as an inclined surface, and is disposed (interposed) between the facing of the pair of cam leg members 9482 (main body portion 9482a).

  The cam leg member 9482 has a main body portion 9482a, a shaft support hole 9482b penetratingly formed in the main body portion 9482a, and first connection holes 9482d1 and second communication penetratingly formed in one end and the other end of the main body portion 9482a. A pair of holes 9482 d 2 are provided, and a pair is disposed facing each other on both left and right sides of the slide cam member 9481. The axial support hole 9482b is formed as an oblong (long hole) shaped hole extending in a direction (right and left direction in FIG. 86B) substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the main body 9482a.

  The shaft portion 9471c of the rear arm body 9471 is inserted into the shaft support hole 9482b in the assembled state. Here, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the shaft portion 9471 c of the back arm body 9471 is a shaft body having an oval (long hole) shape in the axial direction, and the major axis direction is the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 9471. (That is, the displacement direction of the slide cam member 9481) is disposed in a posture along the direction (left and right direction in FIG. 86B).

  Shaft portion 9471c of back arm body 9471 has a dimension (the dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 86B) in the minor axis direction substantially equal to (or slightly smaller than) the dimension in the minor axis direction of axial support hole 9482b. On the other hand, the dimension in the major axis direction (the dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 86B) is set to be sufficiently smaller than the dimension in the major axis direction of the shaft support hole 9482b. As a result, the cam leg member 9482 is moved in the direction toward or away from the slide cam member 9481 by the inner wall surface of the axial support hole 9482b being guided along the shaft portion 9471c of the back arm body 9471 (FIG. 2.) It is possible to slide and displace in the left and right direction.

  Bulking fastening portions 491a and 492a of the operation members 491 and 492 are rotatably inserted into the first communication holes 9483d1 and the second connection holes 9483d2, and fastened and fixed by fastening screws (see FIGS. 21 and 22). Thereby, the operation members 491, 492 are connected to the cam leg member 9483.

  A biasing spring 484 (see FIG. 22) formed of a coil spring is disposed between the pair of cam leg members 9482 in an elastically tensioned state, and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 484 is The pair of cam leg members 9482 are configured to act in a direction approaching each other. Thus, when the operating members 491 and 492 are closed in the opening and closing operation, the operating members 491 and 492 are brought into close contact with each other using the biasing force of the biasing spring 484 to form a gap. It can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (b), according to the combined operation unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment, the pair of cam leg members 9482 is not slid against the biasing force of the biasing spring 484, so that opening and closing are performed. The connection protrusion 452d of the second gear 452 is pulled downward by the slide cam member 9481 (the lower side in FIG. 86B), and the connection groove 481c and the A distance between the two axes 427 is a distance L1. Further, in the pair of cam leg members 9482, the distance between their first connection holes 9482d1 is taken as a distance W1.

  From the state shown in FIG. 86 (b), for example, when the open / close second gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) around the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 9471, the connecting projection 452d is By sliding in the connection groove 481c of the slide cam member 9481, the movement of the connection projection 452d moves the slide cam member 9481 against the biasing force of the biasing spring 484 to the upper side (the upper side in FIG. 86A). Slide to displace.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the open / close second gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotational position, the connection groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 86 (a)). The distance between them is shortened to the distance L2 (L2 <L1), and the slide cam member 9481 is slidingly displaced upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2.

  Along with the upward slide displacement of the slide cam member 9481, the cam portion 9481b (cam surface CS) of the slide cam member 9481 pushes the facing distance between the pair of cam leg members 9482 (main portion 9482a) in the expanding direction and expands The pair of cam leg members 9482 are pushed outward (in a direction away from the main body 9481 a of the slide cam member 9481). That is, the pair of cam leg members 9882 are slidingly displaced in the direction away from each other, and the distance between the first connection holes 9482d1 is enlarged to the distance W2. The same applies to the case of FIG. 86 (c) in which the open / close second gear 7452 is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise)), and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, according to the ninth embodiment, since the first connecting hole 9482d1 and the second connecting hole 9482d2 are provided in the cam leg member 9482, one member (cam leg member 9482) of the operation members 491, 492 Each can be supported at a plurality of places (two places). For example, as in the case of the first embodiment, two members (a first pinion leg 482 and a second pinion leg 483, see FIG. 26). There is no need to provide Thus, as in the eighth embodiment, the weight of the combined operation unit 9400 as a whole can be reduced, so that the maximum output required for the drive motor 530 (see FIG. 21) can be reduced. The drive motor 530 can be miniaturized.

  In particular, according to the ninth embodiment, when the rotational operation of the operation members 491, 492 in the stopped state is started, the influence of the inertial force is reduced and the drive motor is compared with the case of the eighth embodiment. Further miniaturization of the 530 can be achieved.

  That is, as described above, the slide cam member 9481 and the pair of cam leg members 9482 rotate the operating members 491, 492 about the second shaft 427 (see FIG. 27). According to the ninth embodiment, a slide cam for the rear arm body 9471 and the front arm body 472 (not shown) is adopted according to the ninth embodiment, though it is a member that is displaced about the second shaft 427 together with 492. The arrangement positions of the member 9481 and the pair of cam leg members 9482 are biased toward the second shaft 427 in the longitudinal direction of the back arm 9471 and the front arm 472 (vertical direction in FIG. 86B). be able to.

  This makes it possible to reduce the weight of the distal end side (opposite to the second shaft 427) in the longitudinal direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 86B) of the back arm 9471 and the front arm 472. Can be closer to the second shaft 425 side, so that the influence of the inertial force can be reduced when starting the rotational operation of the operating members 491, 492 in the stopped state. As a result, the maximum output required for the drive motor 530 can be reduced, and further downsizing can be achieved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 91, the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined operation unit 600 in the tenth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the lower surfaces 539e of the first coupling members 539 are brought into contact with the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, whereby the first coupling members 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 Although the case where it couple | bonds was demonstrated, the coupling | bonding of the 1st coupling member 10539 and a pair of 2nd coupling member 10630 in 10th Embodiment is the 1st and 2nd engagement of those 1st and 2nd coupling members 10539 and 10630. It is performed by the parts 10539f and 10630f being engaged with each other. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Here, in the first embodiment described above, it is necessary to set the angle α of the upper and lower surfaces 539 e and 630 a in relation to the angle θ of the link members 621 and 622. Since the first and second engagement members 10539 and 10630 are coupled using the engagement between the first and second engagement portions 10539f and 10630f provided on the two engagement members 10539 and 10630, the upper and lower surfaces 10539e Can be set to any angle. That is, since the front view shape (projecting shape) of the first coupling member 10539 and the front view shape (concave shape) of the pair of second coupling members 10630 can be arbitrarily set, the projection can be made in comparison with the case of the first embodiment. The protrusion height in the shape and the recess depth in the recess shape can be made larger.

  Thus, according to the tenth embodiment, when the first and second coupling members 10539 and 10630 are coupled (see FIG. 32), the first coupling member 10539 is interposed between the pair of second coupling members 10630. It is easy for the player to recall an aspect in which the first coupling member 10539 intrudes and spreads the pair of second coupling members 10630 in a direction away from each other (that is, an aspect in which a gap is formed between the opposing surfaces 630b). can do. As a result, it is possible to operate in a mode different from the player's expectation and to improve the rendering effect. The detailed configuration of the first and second coupling members 10539 and 10630 will be described below.

  FIG. 87 (a) is a front view of the first coupling member 10539 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 87 (b) is a bottom view of the first coupling member 10539 in the arrow LXXXVIIb direction view of FIG. 87 (a). is there. FIG. 88 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first coupling member 10539 taken along line LXXXVIIIa-LXXXVIIIa in FIG. 87 (a), and FIG. 88 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 87 (a). 88 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the first coupling member 10539 taken along line LXXXVIIIc-LXXXVIIIc of FIG. 88 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the first coupling member 10539 forms a decorative portion that is viewed by the player from the front side, and abuts on the pair of second coupling members 10630 of the second coupling operation unit 10600. 32 (see FIG. 32), and the front view shape (see FIG. 87 (a)) of the lower surface 10539e of the decorative portion 539c has a center in the downward direction of the first coupling member 10539 (see FIG. It is formed in an inverted V shape projecting toward the lower side 87 (a).

  The lower surface 10539e of the first coupling member 10539 has a step between the rear lower surface 10539e1 located on the rear surface side (the lower side in FIG. 87 (b)) of the first coupling member 10539 and the rear surface lower surface 10539e1 It is formed of an inclined lower surface 10539e2 that is inclined downward to the front side (upper side in FIG. 87B) of the first coupling member 10539 from the connected portion having the step and the step. That is, the inclined lower surface 10539e2 is retracted downward from the rear lower surface 10539e1 (upper side in FIG. 88A) and then inclined downward (lower in FIG. 88A) as it is separated from the rear lower surface 10539e1. In addition, each of the rear side lower surface 10539e1 and the inclined lower surface 10539e2 is formed by combining two flat surfaces that are inclined downward toward the center.

  In this case, an edge portion of the inclined lower surface 10539e2 has an inclined tip end side (lower end side, front side in FIG. 87A) in the entire width direction of the first coupling member 10539 (horizontal direction in FIG. 87A). It is arranged at the same height position as the rear side lower surface 10539e1 or at a height position slightly below the rear side lower surface 10539e1 (downward in FIG. 87A). As a result, in the front view of the first coupling member 10539, the back side lower surface 10539e1 (opening of the recess 10539f described later) can be made invisible from the player. The inclined upper surface 10630a2 of the second coupling member 10630 is in contact with the inclined lower surface 10539e2 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91A), whereby the front of the second coupling member 10630 with respect to the first coupling member 10539 is Regulation (positioning) of relative displacement to (front side) is possible.

  On the back side lower surface 10539e1, a recess 10539f having a rectangular shape in a front view horizontally long shape is recessed at the center in the width direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 87B). The concave portion 10539f is a portion engaged with the convex portion 10630c protruding from the upper surface 10630a of the second coupling member 10630 at the coupling position, and the pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 positioned on both sides in the longitudinal direction And a back side inner wall surface 10539f2 positioned on the lower side (FIG. 87 (b)).

  The pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 are formed as flat surfaces that are inclined such that the opposing intervals become wider toward the lower side (lower side, lower side in FIG. 88C) in the elevating direction of the first coupling member 10539. That is, the pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 is formed in a shape that is diverged toward the traveling direction side when the first coupling member 10539 is lowered toward the coupling position. The left and right outer wall surfaces 10630 c 1 of the convex portion 10630 c of the second coupling member 10630 abut the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539 f 1 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91B). The restriction of the relative displacement of the second coupling member 10630 in the left-right direction (lateral width direction) is possible.

  Further, the back side inner wall surface 10539f2 is formed as a flat surface inclined so as to be closer to the back side as it goes downward (downward side, lower side in FIG. 88A) in the raising and lowering direction of the first coupling member 10539. That is, the back side inner wall surface 10539f2 is inclined in the direction opposite to the inclined lower surface 10539e2, and the distance between the back side inner wall surface 10539f2 and the inclined lower surface 10539e2 is lowered by the first coupling member 10539 toward the coupling position It is formed so as to be gradually increased toward the traveling direction side (lower side in FIG. 88A). The rear inner wall surface 10539f2 is in contact with the rear outer wall surface 10630c2 of the convex portion 10630c of the second coupling member 10630 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91A), whereby the first coupling member 10539 is formed. It is possible to restrict (position) the relative displacement of the second coupling member 10630 to the rear (rear side) with respect to the angle.

  FIG. 89 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the second coupling operation unit 10600, and FIG. 89 (b) is a top view of the second coupling member 10630 in the direction of arrow LXXXIXb of FIG. FIG. 90 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second coupling member 10630 taken along line XCa-XCa in FIG. 89 (b), and FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of a coupling member 10630. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the second coupling member 10630 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is viewed by the player from the front side and is coupled to the first coupling member 10539 in the coupling position (FIG. 32). Reference), a front view shape (see FIG. 89A) on the upper surface 10630a side of the second coupling member 10630 is formed in a shape inclining downward toward the opposing surface 630b. That is, when the pair of second coupling members 10630 are coupled in the coupling position, the front view shape on the upper surface 10630a side of the pair of second coupling members 10630 is formed in a V shape whose center is recessed (see FIG. 32). ).

  The upper surface 10630a of the second coupling member 10630 is connected with a step between the rear upper surface 10630a1 positioned on the rear surface side (the upper side in FIG. 89B) of the second coupling member 10630 and the rear surface upper surface 10630a1. And an inclined upper surface 10630a2 which is inclined downward from the connecting portion having the step toward the front side (the lower side in FIG. 89 (b)) of the second coupling member 10630. That is, the inclined upper surface 10630a2 rises upward from the rear upper surface 10630a1 (upper side in FIG. 90A), and then is inclined downward (lower in FIG. 90A) as it is separated from the rear upper surface 10630a1. Further, each of the back side upper surface 10630a1 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 is formed as a flat surface which is inclined downward toward the opposing surface 630b.

  Note that the inclined lower surface 10539e2 of the first coupling member 10539 is in contact with the inclined upper surface 10630a2 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91A), whereby, as described above, the second coupling to the first coupling member 10539 is performed. Restriction (positioning) of relative displacement of the coupling member 10630 to the front (front side) is possible.

  On the back side upper surface 10630 a 1, a convex portion 10630 c having a rectangular shape in front view and laterally long side is provided to protrude on the side of the facing surface 630 b. The convex portion 10630c is a portion engaged with the concave portion 10539f which is recessed in the lower surface 10539e of the first coupling member 10539 in the coupling position, and is located on one side in the longitudinal direction opposite to the opposing surface 630b. An outer wall surface 10630 c 1 and a back side outer wall surface 10630 c 2 located on the back side (upper side in FIG. 89B) are provided.

  The left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 are formed as flat surfaces that are inclined from the rear upper surface 10630a1 toward the opposing surface 630b. That is, in the state where the pair of second coupling members 10630 couple the opposing surfaces 630b (see FIG. 91 (b)), the pair of left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 are tapered toward the first coupling member 10539. It is formed in shape. As described above, the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 in the recessed portion 10539f of the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 are in contact with the left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91B). It is possible to regulate the relative displacement of the second coupling member 10630 in the left-right direction (width direction) with respect to 10539.

  Further, the back side outer wall surface 10630 c 2 is formed as a flat surface which is inclined downward from the top of the convex portion 10630 a to the back side of the second coupling member 10630. That is, the rear side outer wall surface 10630c2 is inclined in the direction opposite to the inclined upper surface 10630a2, and the distance between the rear side outer wall surface 10630c2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 is the first coupling member 10539 side (the upper side in FIG. 90A). It is formed to decrease gradually as it heads toward. The rear side outer wall surface 10630c2 is abutted against the rear side inner wall surface 10539f2 of the recess 10539f of the first joint member 10630 at the joint position (see FIG. 91A), whereby the first joint member 10539 is obtained. Restriction (positioning) of relative displacement of the second coupling member 10630 to the rear (rear side) is possible.

  In this case, the edge portion of the inclined upper surface 10630a2 is convex in the entire width direction (the left and right direction of FIG. 89B) of the second coupling member 10630 at the inclined base end side (upper end side, right side of FIG. 90A). It is disposed at a height position (upper side in FIG. 90A) which is above the top of the portion 10630c. As a result, in the front view of the second coupling member 10630, the convex portion 10630c can be made invisible from the player.

  Here, the convex portion 10630c is made smaller as the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction (the dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 90A) goes to the tip of the protrusion. That is, the outer wall surface of the front surface side (the opposite side to the rear surface outer wall surface 10630 c 2, the left side of FIG. 90A) of the convex portion 10630 c is formed to be inclined in the same direction as the inclined upper surface 10630 a 2. Therefore, when the first coupling member 10539 and the second coupling member 10630 are coupled, the convex portion 10630f of the second coupling member 10630 can be easily inserted into the recess 10539f of the first coupling member 10539.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the coupling operation of the first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 will be described.

  91 (a) and 91 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first coupling member 10539 and the second coupling member 10630 in the state of being disposed in the coupling position. 91 (a) corresponds to FIGS. 88 (a) and 90 (a), and FIG. 91 (b) corresponds to FIGS. 88 (b) and 90 (b).

  As described above, the coupling of the first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 is performed by bringing the pair of second coupling members 10630 close to each other by raising the link mechanism from the retracted position (see FIG. 31). As shown in FIG. 91 (a) and FIG. 91 (b), by lowering the first coupling member 10539 toward the pair of second coupling members 10630 which are disposed side by side and are disposed side by side on the left and right. The first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 are coupled to each other.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recessed portion 10539f of the first coupling member 10539 includes the pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1, and the left and right outer wall surfaces that are in contact with the pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 of the recessed portion 10539f. 10630c1 are respectively provided with the convex portions 10630c of the pair of second coupling members 10630, and the pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 and the pair of left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 progress when the first coupling member 10539 is lowered toward the coupling position 91 (b), the left and right inner wall surface 10539f1 of the recess 10539f is the left and right direction (horizontal width direction, FIG. 91B) relative to the left and right outer wall surface 10630c1 of the convex portion 10630c. 91 (b) left and right direction) by being abutted from both sides, a pair of second coupling portions 10630 can be displaced to a mutually approaching direction (the direction to abut was what facing surface 630b). That is, the pair of second coupling members 10630 can be coupled while reliably suppressing the formation of a gap between the opposing surfaces thereof (between the opposing surfaces 630a).

  As described above, the lower surface 10539e of the first coupling member 10539 is formed with the inclined lower surface 10539e2 connected to the front of the first coupling member 10539, and the upper surface 10630a of the pair of second coupling members 10630 is formed (2) Since the inclined upper surface 10630a2 connected to the front of the coupling member 10630 is formed, and the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 are inclined in the same direction (in this embodiment, inclined at the same inclination angle) In the closed state, as shown in FIG. 91A, the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 can be made to abut each other.

  Even if the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 can not be completely in close contact with each other due to dimensional tolerance or the like, the first connecting member 10539 can be formed by the inclined surfaces facing each other The player can be made to recognize the front view shape so that no gap exists between the facings of the second coupling member 10630 and the second coupling member 10630. That is, even if there is a gap between the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2, the background can not be visually recognized through the gap, and the player can visually recognize the inclined upper surface 10630a2. Thereby, the rendering effect can be improved by coupling the first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 at the coupling position.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the concave portion 10539f of the first coupling member 10539 and the convex portion 10630c of the second coupling member 10630 are the first coupling member 10539 and the second coupling member 10630 on the back side of the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2. Are arranged so as not to be visible when the player faces the front. Therefore, when the first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 are coupled at the coupling position, the pair of second coupling members 10630 are displaced in the direction in which the pair of second coupling members 10630 approach each other (the direction in which the opposing surfaces 630b abut each other) It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the structure portion to be caused to

  Thus, when the first coupling member 10539 is coupled to the pair of second coupling members 10630, such a coupling operation is different from the player's expectation (that is, the front view shape of the lower surface 10539e of the first coupling member 10539) Is formed in a projecting shape and the front view shape on the upper surface 10630a side of the pair of second coupling members 10630 is formed in a concave shape, whereby the first coupling member 10539 enters between the pair of second coupling members 10630, Where the player recalls an aspect in which the first coupling member 10539 pushes and expands the pair of second coupling members 10630 in a direction away from each other (that is, an aspect in which a gap is formed between the opposing surfaces 630b). Can be easily performed in a mode in which the coupling members 10630 are coupled without a gap, and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  When the entire lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a are formed flush as in the first coupling member 539 and the second coupling member 630 in the first embodiment, the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 (recessed portion 1039f) and the left and right It is impossible to make the outer wall surface 10630f1 (convex portion 10630f) invisible from the player in front view, and as in the present embodiment, the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 are the front side of the lower surface 10539e and the upper surface 10630a ( It becomes possible for the first time by providing it in the front, the left side of FIGS. 88 (a) and 90 (a) (that is, by the lower surface 10539e2 and the upper surface 10630a2) Player in front view of outer wall surface 10630f1 (convex portion 10630f) It can be et invisible).

  While the back surface side inner wall surface 10539f2 is formed in the recess 10539f of the first coupling member 10539, the back surface side outer wall surface 10630c2 which is in contact with the back surface side inner wall surface 10539f2 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91A) is the second The back side inner wall surface 10539f2 and the back side outer wall surface 10630c2 are formed in the convex portion 10630c of the connecting member 10630 and are inclined in different directions with respect to the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2, respectively. The direction of positioning of the second coupling member 10630 (the direction of restricting relative displacement) is the direction by the contact of the back inner wall surface 10539f2 and the back outer wall surface 10630c2, and the contact of the back inner wall surface 10539f2 and the back outer wall surface 10630c2 It is opposite to the direction by tangent Door can be.

  As a result, since the second coupling member 10630 can be positioned in the front-rear direction (the direction connecting the front and the back, the left and right direction in FIG. 91A) with respect to the first coupling member 10539, these first coupling members 10539 and the second coupling The first connecting member 10539 and the second connecting member 10630 are held at the positioning positions in the front-rear direction, as well as being able to suppress a step in the front-rear direction with the connecting portion of the members 10630 (the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2) flush As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of relative misalignment or rattling after being placed at the coupling position.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with the configuration of part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to provide another embodiment. For example, as described in the second embodiment, as described in the third embodiment, the insertion shaft 2772 of the link member 2770 is inserted in the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 so as to be axially displaceable. The structure in which the member 3770 is in contact with the inner wall surface of the third passage P3 (the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710) and the main body 771 of the link member 3770 is elastically deformed (ie, the second embodiment and the third embodiment) You may combine form and).
The gaming machine 8 and the gaming machine 9 may be combined.

  In the above embodiments, in the combined operation unit 400 and 7400 to 9400, the positioning holes 451e and 462e of the opening and closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 are formed as through holes in the main body 451a and 462a. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the positioning holes 451 e and 462 e of the opening and closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 may be concaved with a bottom. Even in the case of the recessed portion having a bottom, by inserting the jig into the recessed portion by the same method as in the above embodiment, it is possible to position the attachment position etc. while comparing with the case of forming as a through hole Thus, the rigidity of the open / close first gear 451 and the rotational second gear 462 can be secured, so that the durability can be improved.

  In the above embodiments, the connecting protrusion 452d is disposed on the second gear 452, 7452 and the connecting groove 481c, 7481c through which the connecting protrusion 452d is inserted is the slide rack member 481, 7481 or the slide cam member 9481. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the positions of their placement may be interchanged. That is, the connecting projection 452 d is disposed on the slide rack member 481, 7481 or the slide cam member 9481, and the connecting grooves 481 c and 7481 c through which the connecting projection 452 d is inserted are disposed on the second gear 452, 7452. It is good also as composition. In this case, the connecting grooves 481 c and 7481 c disposed in the opening and closing second gears 452 and 7452 are convex toward the slide rack member 481 or 7481 or the slide cam member 9481 in which the connecting projection 452 d is disposed. It is preferable to curve and form in circular arc shape. This is because the amount of movement of the connecting projection 452d in accordance with the rotation of the opening / closing second gear 452, 7452 can be increased, and the maximum amount of movement of the slide rack member 481, 7481 or the slide cam member 9481 can be increased accordingly.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the connecting groove 7481c is curved in a circular arc with a constant curvature has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the shape of the connecting groove 7481c is combined with circular arcs of multiple types of curvatures. It may be formed. Thus, for example, by making the curvatures of the first portion and the second portion of the connection groove 7481 c different, the slide rack with respect to the rotation (rotational speed) of the unit angle of the open / close second gear 452 The sliding amount (moving speed) of the member 7481 can be made different between when the connecting projection 452d passes through the first portion and when passing through the second portion. As a result, it is possible to change the opening / closing operation (opening / closing speed) of the operation members 491, 492 while rotating the opening / closing second gear 452 (drive motor 430) at a constant rotation speed. The connecting groove 7481c may be formed by combining a curved portion curving in an arc shape and a linear portion (a linear portion in which a part of the connecting groove 7481c extends linearly). May be).

  In the first to seventh embodiments and the tenth embodiment, in the combined operation units 400 and 7400, by making the lengths of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 different from each other, the operation members 491, 492 are provided. Although the case of enhancing the rendering effect as the non-parallel opening and closing operation has been described, the invention is not limited thereto. The first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 have the same length, and the operation is performed. Naturally, it is possible to make the opening and closing operations of the members 491, 492 parallel opening and closing. Alternatively, the gear portion 482c of the first pinion leg member 482 and the gear portion 483c of the second pinion leg member 483 have different gear characteristics (that is, the rotation angle accompanying the slide of the slide rack member 481 is the first pinion leg member). By setting the second pinion leg member 483 so as to be larger than 482), the opening and closing operation of the operation members 491, 492 may be parallel opening and closing. In this case, two different types of gears corresponding to the gear portions 482 c and 483 c are provided in the rack portion 481 b of the slide rack members 481 and 7481.

  Alternatively, in the first to eighth embodiments, the connection holes 482 d and the second connection holes 8483 e are formed in a long hole shape in the combined operation unit 400, 7400, 8400, but the long diameter of the long hole The dimensions of the directions may be set as follows, and the opening and closing operations of the operating members 491, 492 may be parallel opening and closing. That is, when focusing on the operating member 491, when the respective pinion leg members 482, 483, 8483 are rotated, in the pair of connected raised portions 491 a of the operating member 491, one connected raised portion 491 a is connected to the connecting hole 493 d. The other connecting and raising portion 491a is rotatably supported by the connecting hole 482d and the second connecting hole 8483e so as to be rotatable and slidably movable in the major axis direction. In this case, in a state before the second open / close gear 452 rotates (for example, see FIG. 26B), an imaginary line connecting the pair of connected raised portions 491a of the operation member 491 and the second open / close gear 452 after rotation The connection holes 482 d and the second connection holes 8483 e are parallel to a virtual line connecting the pair of connected raised portions 491 a of the operation member 491 in the state (see, for example, FIGS. 26A and 26C). Set the dimension in the major axis direction.

  In the first to seventh embodiments and the tenth embodiment, in the combined operation units 400 and 7400, the gear ratio between the gear portion 482c and the rack portion 481b of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 Although the case where the gear ratio between the gear portion 483c and the rack portion 481b is the same has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the gear portion 482c and the rack portion 481b of the first pinion leg member 482 are not necessarily limited. The gear ratio may be different from the gear ratio between the gear portion 483c and the rack portion 481b of the second pinion leg member 483. Thereby, the rendering effect can be enhanced by making the opening and closing operations of the operation members 491, 492 non-parallel opening and closing.

  In the first to seventh embodiments and the tenth embodiment, the case where both the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 mesh with the rack portion 481b in the combined operation units 400 and 7400 is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and only one of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 is meshed with the rack portion 481b, and the other is not meshed with the rack portion 481b. It may be only rotatably supported by the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. Thereby, the rendering effect can be enhanced by making the opening and closing operations of the operation members 491, 492 non-parallel opening and closing.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the combined operation units 400 and 7400 to 9400, as the opening and closing operation and the rotation operation of the operating members 491, 492, the first rotating gear 461 and the first opening and closing first gear 451 are continuously Although the operation of rotating and rotating is described as one unit, it is not necessarily limited to this, and it is naturally possible to divide the unit of operation within the range of the rotation angles θ0 to θ4.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the first combination operation units 500 and 4500 to 6500, a case has been described in which two insertion shafts 531c are arranged in a row on the back surface of the A layer base plate 531. The number of insertion shafts 531c in each row may be two or less, or four or more.

  In the first to third embodiments and the seventh to tenth embodiments, in the first coupling operation unit 500, the central insertion shaft of the three insertion shafts 531c arranged vertically on the back surface of the A layer base plate 531. Although the case where the 1st link member 541 and the 2nd link member 542 were connected to 531c was explained, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the upper insertion shaft 531c or the lower of the three insertion shafts 531c arranged vertically The first link member 541 and the second link member 542 may be connected to the insertion shaft 531c on the side. The same applies to the fourth embodiment, and the second link member 542 may be connected to the upper insertion shaft 531c or the lower insertion shaft 531c of the three insertion shafts 531c arranged vertically.

  In the first to third embodiments and the seventh to tenth embodiments, in the first coupling operation unit 500, the support shaft 527 and the insertion are inserted into the pivot hole 541a and the slide hole 541c of the first link member 541. The retaining ring E is attached or fastened to the shaft 531c as a retaining member, while the retaining ring E is attached to the connecting shaft 526 inserted into the connection hole 541b, or the fastening screw is fastened. Although the case where is omitted is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and it is sufficient if attachment of the snap ring E as a retaining member or fastening of a fastening screw is performed in at least one of these three places. .

  In the second and third embodiments, the case where the passage P is formed by combining linear passages (the first passage P1, the second passage P2 and the third passage P3) in the top view (see FIG. 65) will be described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the offset amount to the front side (forward) in the state where the link members 2770 and 3770 are erected substantially vertically and the ring forming member 790 is disposed at the coupling position is at least The amount of offset to the front side (forward) in the state where the circle forming member 790 is disposed at the retracted position may be set larger, and the shape of the passage P from the retracted position to the coupling position can be set arbitrarily. For example, only the third passage P3 may be formed as a passage curved in an arc shape in top view. If the offset amount to the front side at least in the coupling position is larger than the offset amount to the front side in the retracted position, the drive necessary to hold the lifting and lowering base body 2780 (ring forming member 790) in the coupling position It is possible to achieve both the suppression of the energy consumption of the motor 740 and the suppression of the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 necessary to raise and lower the lifting base 2780 (ring forming member 790) between the coupling position and the retraction position. it can.

  In the tenth embodiment, in the coupling position, the convex portions 10630 c of the pair of second coupling members 1630 are disposed adjacent to each other, and the concave portion 10539 f is an integral recess that receives the pair of convex portions 10630 c disposed adjacent to each other. Although the case where it is concavely provided on the back side lower surface 10539e1 of the first coupling member 10539 as (the concave portion of 1) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the convex portions 10630c of the pair of coupling members 1630 are mutually connected at the coupling position. Are separately disposed, and separate recesses (recesses of 2) capable of respectively receiving the pair of projections 10630c may be recessed in the lower surface 10539e1 of the first coupling member 10539. good.

  In the tenth embodiment, in the lower surface 10539e of the first coupling member 10539, the surface connecting the back lower surface 10539e1 and the inclined lower surface 10539e2 (hereinafter referred to as “connection surface”) is vertical (raising and lowering the first coupling member 10539). Although the case where the direction is made parallel to the direction (FIG. 88 (a) vertical direction) has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. In this case, the connection surface of the first coupling member 10539 is preferably inclined in the opposite direction to the inclined lower surface 10539e2 (that is, in the same direction as the back inner wall surface 10539f2). When the first coupling member 10539 is coupled to the second coupling member 10630, the first coupling member 10539 is relatively frontward relative to the second coupling member 10630 under the influence of vibration or the like due to disturbance (forward, as shown in FIG. When the position is shifted to 91 (a) (left), the connection surface of the first coupling member 10539 is brought into contact with the rising end (the right end in FIG. 91 (a) of FIG. 91) of the inclined upper surface 10630 a 2 of the second coupling member 10630 be able to. Thus, the rising end (corner) of the inclined upper surface 10630a2 can be slid along the inclined surface in accordance with the downward movement of the first coupling member 10539 with respect to the second coupling member 10630, and both coupling members 10539 and 10630 Can be guided to the regular position (positioning in the front-rear direction).

  In the tenth embodiment, the back side lower surface 10539e1 of the first coupling member 10539 is a flat surface, and the height position in the vertical direction (the moving direction of the first coupling member 10539) is generally the same height position. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the height position of a part of the back side lower surface 10539e1 may be disposed below the height position of the other part. Specifically, of the back side lower surface 10539e1 of the first coupling member 10539, only the portion located on the front side (front side, left side in FIG. 91A) with respect to the convex portion 10630c of the second coupling member 10630 is The height position of the portion located on the back side (the rear side, the right side in FIG. 91A) than the convex portion 10630c is disposed lower (the lower side in FIG. 91A). As a result, when lowering the first coupling member 10539 with respect to the second coupling member 10630, the portion (the front side of the convex portion 10630c (FIG. 91 (FIG. 91 a) The part located on the left side) abuts on the outer wall surface of the convex part 10630c (the outer wall surface on the opposite side to the rear outer wall surface 10630c2, the left side of FIG. 91A) The back side (the portion located on the right side in FIG. 91A) can be earlier than the timing of contacting the outer wall surface (back side outer wall surface 10630c2) of the convex portion 10630c, and as a result, the both connecting members 10539 and 10630 can be reliably Bond can be achieved.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

  A moving member movable between a first position and a second position, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving means And a transmitting unit for transmitting the driving force to the moving member from the driving unit, and the transmitting unit transmits the driving force from the driving unit to the moving member. When the movement of the moving member at least at the first position to the second position is started, the transmission state is formed after the blocking state is formed. A game machine A1 characterized by being

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the movement of the moving member in the first position to the second position is started, the transmitting state is formed after the blocking state is formed by the transmitting means. The driving force required for the drive means to start movement can be suppressed, and as a result, the drive means can be miniaturized.

  That is, when movement of the moving member at the first position to the second position is started, the stationary object is moved, so a force exceeding the inertia force generated at the moving member at the start of movement is It is necessary to act on such a moving member, and the driving force required for the driving means becomes large. As a result, the drive means has been increased in size (see, for example, JP-A-2011-120640). On the other hand, after the movement of the moving member is started, the driving force required for the drive means moves the moving member because the action of inertia acts to maintain the moving state of the moving member. Smaller compared to the driving force required to start. In other words, after the movement of the moving member is started, it can be said that a driving means having an unnecessarily large maximum output is used.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, when the movement of the moving member in the first position to the second position is started, the transmission state is formed after the blocking state is formed by the transmission means. Even if the driving force that can be generated by the means is small, the movement of the moving member can be started. That is, by forming the cutoff state first by the transmission means, it is possible to cause the drive means to generate driving force in no load state, and to give momentum (inertial force) to the drive state of the drive means. . Thereafter, the transmission state is formed by the transmission means (switched from the shut-off state to the transmission state), and the drive means drives the movement means to the movement means in a state where the drive state is strong (inertial force is large). Can be transmitted. Thereby, even if the drive means is miniaturized, the movement of the moving member can be started. In other words, after the movement of the moving member is started, it is possible to suppress the state where the driving means having the unnecessarily large output is used.

  In the gaming machine A1, the transmission means is formed so as to be able to be engaged with a drive means side member formed on at least a part or all of the teeth to which the drive force is transmitted from the drive means A moving member side member formed on at least a part or the entire periphery of a tooth for transmitting the driving force transmitted from the driving means side member to the moving member; at least at least the driving means side member or the moving member side member A game machine A2 comprising: a non-forming portion in which one of the teeth is non-formed and can not mesh with the other of the drive unit side member or the moving member side member.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the transmission means is formed so that the drive means side member and the moving member side member can be meshed with each other, so when the drive means side member is rotated by the drive force of the drive means, the drive means side The moving member side member engaged with the member is rotated, and the driving force is transmitted to the moving member (the transmission state is formed) through the rotation of the moving member side member. In this case, since the non-forming portion in which the teeth are not formed is formed in one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member, the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the driving means side When the non-forming portion is disposed at the meshing position of the member and the moving member side member, the driving means side member and the moving member side member can not be engaged and the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member is blocked Being shut off (the blocking state is formed).

  Therefore, when the movement of the moving member at the first position to the second position is started, the driving means side member can be made to idle by first forming the blocking state using the non-forming portion. Therefore, the driving means can be driven in a no-load state, and momentum (inertial force to the driving means side member) can be given to the driving state of the driving means. Thereafter, by causing the drive means side member to idle to mesh with the moving member side member (that is, to form a transmission state), the drive means starts driving the movement means in a state where the drive state is energized be able to. Thus, the movement of the moving member can be started even if the drive means is miniaturized.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the transmission means includes the driving means side member and the moving member side member, and at least one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member Since the non-forming portion in which the teeth are non-forming is provided, depending on the relative rotational position (rotational position of the non-forming portion) between the driving means side member and the moving member side member, the blocking state and the transmission state And can be switched. That is, the configuration for achieving such switching of the state does not require an actuator device, and can be configured only by gears, so the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, the teeth formed on the driving means side member and the moving member side member are mechanical elements used for transmitting power through the engagement with the other teeth. In this case, the shape of the tooth lines is not limited. For example, the teeth of the gear illustrated below can be applied to the teeth of the drive unit side member and the moving member side member. Examples of the gear include a spur gear, a helical gear, a helical gear, a bevel gear, a spiral gear, a screw gear, a crown gear, a miter gear, an internal gear, a hypoid gear, a worm gear and the like. The same applies to the concepts of various inventions described below.

  In the gaming machine A2, each of the drive unit side member and the moving member side member includes the non-formed portion, and the non-formed portion of the drive unit side member and the non-formed portion of the moving member side member face each other. A game machine A3 characterized in that a blocking state is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member includes the non-forming portion, and the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member Since the forming portions face each other to form a shutoff state, the outer diameters of the non-forming portions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member are secured, and the rigidity of the driving means side member and the moving member side member It can improve.

  That is, only one of the drive unit side member and the moving member side member has the non-formed portion (ie, the other of the drive unit side member or the moving member side member has teeth formed over the entire circumferential direction). In this case, the non-forming portion needs to be retracted to a position where meshing with the other teeth of the drive unit side member or the moving member side member can be avoided. Specifically, the non-formed portion needs to be retracted to the rotation shaft side with respect to the valley bottom of one of the teeth of the driving means side member or the moving member side member. As a result, since the amount of retraction in the non-forming portion becomes large, the outer diameter in one non-forming portion of the driving means side member or the moving member side member becomes small, and accordingly one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member Decrease the rigidity of the

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A3, since each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member has the non-formed portions, these both non-formed portions are retracted to a position where they do not interfere with the facing non-formed portions. It is enough if it is. Specifically, both non-formed portions can be positioned between the valley bottom and the peak in the teeth of the drive means side member and the moving member side member, and it is not necessary to make them retract to the rotation shaft side from the valley bottom. As a result, since the amount of retraction in the non-forming portion can be reduced, the outer diameters of the non-forming portions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member are secured, and the rigidity of the driving means side member and the moving member side member It can improve.

  In the gaming machine A3, the non-forming portion on one of the drive unit side member or the moving member side member is formed to be curved in an arc shape centered on one rotation axis of the drive unit side member or the moving member side member The non-formed portion of the other of the drive means side member or the moving member side member is the drive means side member or the moving member side member as it is separated from the other teeth of the drive means side member or the moving member side member in the circumferential direction A game machine A4 characterized in that it is shaped so as to project toward the non-forming portion in one side.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the non-forming portion provided in each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is the non-forming portion in one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member The driving means side member or the moving member side member is formed to be curved in an arc around the rotation axis of one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member, and the non-forming portion in the other of the driving means side member or the moving member side member A shape projecting toward a non-forming portion formed on one of the drive means side member or the movement member side member as it is separated from the other teeth of the member side member in the circumferential direction (that is, the drive means side member or the movement side member) Of the other rotation axis), so that interference between the two non-formed portions is avoided to enable formation of the blocking state, and the driving means side member or the moving member By increasing the outside diameter of the other non-formation portion of the member, the other of the rigid drive means side member or the moving member side member can be further enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the driving means side member and the moving member side member are at the first phase position and at the second phase position which is a phase position different from the first phase position, respectively. The game machine A5 is characterized in that the non-forming portion of the side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member face each other to form the blocking state.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3 or A4, the driving means side member and the moving member side member form the blocking state in two places of the first phase position and the second phase position. As the first phase position and the second phase position correspond to the first position and the second position of the moving member, the movement of the moving member at the first position to the second position is started. Not only when the moving member in the second position is started but also when the moving state is formed after the blocking state is formed, the driving state of the driving means is set. Force (inertial force) can be given. That is, even if the driving force that can be generated by the driving means is small, the movement of the moving member can be started both when the moving member is at the first position and when it is at the second position.

  A game comprising: a movable member movably formed; driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member; and transmission means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the movable member Machine, the moving member includes a first moving member and a second moving member, and the transmitting means transmits a driving force of the driving means to the second moving member, and the driving means transmits the driving force from the driving means. A game machine B1 capable of simultaneously forming a shutoff state that shuts off the transmission of the driving force to the first moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member and the second moving member by the transmitting means, and the first moving member and the second moving member move. Be done. In this case, the transmission means can simultaneously form a transmission state for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second moving member and a blocking state for cutting off the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the first moving member. Therefore, the operation mode for stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means.

  That is, when the first moving member and the second moving member are moved by one driving means, in the conventional product, two driving states, a state where the driving means generates a driving force and a state where the generation of the driving force is stopped Since the operation mode of the first moving member and the second moving member is switched by forming the second moving member, only the operation mode in which both the first moving member and the second moving member move together or both stop together It is impossible to stop the first moving member while moving the second moving member. Therefore, in order to stop the first moving member while moving the second moving member, the driving means for moving the first moving member and the driving means for moving the second moving member are separately provided. It was necessary (see, for example, JP-A-2011-139766).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, as described above, the operation mode for stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means, the first moving member and the second movement It is possible to reduce the number of drive means and to reduce the product cost while making it possible to exert the rendering effect by the movement and stop of the members.

  In the gaming machine B1, the transmission means transmits a first transmission member for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the first moving member, and transmits the driving force generated by the driving means to the second moving member. A first drive unit side member including a second transmission member, wherein the first transmission member is formed on at least a part or the entire circumference of a tooth to which a driving force is transmitted from the drive unit; A first moving member side member formed on at least a part or the entire periphery of teeth formed on the side member so as to be meshable and transmitting the driving force transmitted from the first driving means side member to the first moving member; And the first drive member side member or the first moving member side member is not formed with the teeth and can not mesh with the other of the first drive member side member or the first moving member side member. Characterized in that it comprises Game machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member by the first transmission member and to the second moving member by the second transmission member. The first moving member and the second moving member are respectively moved.

  In this case, since the first drive member side member and the first moving member side member are formed to be able to mesh with the first transmission member, when the first drive member side member is rotated by the drive force of the drive means, The first moving member side member engaged with the first driving means side member is rotated, and the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member through the rotation of the first moving member side member, thereby the first moving member Is moved. In addition, since one of the first drive unit side member or the first moving member side member is provided with the non-formed portion in which the teeth are not formed, the first drive unit side member is rotated by the drive force of the drive unit. When the non-forming portion is disposed at the meshing position of the driving member side member and the first moving member side member, the first driving member side member and the first moving member side member can not be engaged, and The transmission of the driving force to the first moving member is cut off (a cut-off state is formed). That is, the formation of the blocking state by the first transmission member can be performed independently of the transmission of the driving force to the second moving member by the second transmission member. Thereby, the operation mode for stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the first transmission member includes the first drive member side member and the first moving member side member, Since at least one of the first moving member side members is not formed with teeth and a non-formed portion is provided, the relative rotational position between the first drive member side member and the first moving member side member Depending on the rotational position, it is possible to switch between the blocking state and the transmission state. That is, the configuration for achieving such switching of the state does not require an actuator device, and can be configured only by gears, so the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B2, when the transmission state in which the second transmission member transmits the driving force of the drive means to the first moving member is formed by the first transmission member, the second transmission member receives the second movement member from the drive means. A game machine B3 capable of forming a shutoff state that shuts off the transmission of the driving force to the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, when the transmission state in which the second transmission member transmits the driving force of the driving means to the first moving member is formed by the first transmission member, the driving means to the second moving member Since it is possible to form a shutoff state that shuts off the transmission of the driving force, it is possible to achieve the operation mode of stopping the second moving member while moving the first moving member by one driving means. That is, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2 (that is, the effect that the operation of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means), the first moving member is moved. The operation mode for stopping the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means. Thereby, while reducing the number of driving means and reducing the product cost, the variation of the movement modes of the movement and the stop of the first moving member and the second moving member is increased to enhance the effect of the effect. it can.

  In the gaming machine B3, the second transmission member includes a groove-shaped groove and a pin formed to be movable along the groove, and the groove and the pin extend from the driving means to the second moving member. And the pin portion is moved along the groove portion to form a transmission state for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second moving member. A game machine B4 capable of forming a blocking state in which transmission of driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is blocked by stopping the pin portion with respect to the groove portion.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the pin portion is moved along the groove, so that a transmission state for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second moving member can be formed. On the other hand, when the pin portion is stopped with respect to the groove portion, it is possible to form a blocking state in which the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member can be formed. When the transmission state to be transmitted to the member is formed by the first transmission member (that is, the first moving member is moved), the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is blocked. The second moving member is stopped while the driving force from the driving means to the first moving member is interrupted by the first transmission member (ie, the first moving member is stopped), the driving means Driving force is transmitted to the second moving member to move the second moving member. Rukoto can.

  In the gaming machine B4, the second transmission member may be a second drive means side member in which a tooth to which the drive force is transmitted from the drive means is formed at least in part or the entire circumference, and the second drive means side member A toothing is formed on at least a part or the entire circumference of the second drive member, the teeth being configured to be meshable and transmitting the driving force transmitted from the second driving means side member to the second moving member, and the pin portion is disposed (2) The moving member side member and the groove portion are disposed, and the pin portion moves along the groove portion with the rotation of the second moving member side member, thereby approaching or moving to the second moving member side member And a groove-arranging member for moving the second moving member by moving in a direction to move away, and the groove of the groove-arranging member is curved in an arc shape which is convex toward the second moving member side member. A game machine B5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B5, when the second drive means side member is rotated by the drive force of the drive means and the second moving member side member engaged with the second drive means side member is rotated, the second The pin member of the moving member side member is moved along the groove of the groove arrangement member. As a result, the groove disposing member is moved in the direction toward or away from the second moving member side member, and the second moving member is moved with the movement of the groove disposing member. In this case, since the groove of the groove arrangement member is curved in an arc shape which is convex toward the second moving member side member, the moving amount of the groove arrangement member accompanying the rotation of the second moving member side member is large. Thus, the maximum moving amount of the second moving member can be increased accordingly.

  In the gaming machine B4, the second transmission member may be a second drive means side member in which a tooth to which the drive force is transmitted from the drive means is formed at least in part or the entire circumference, and the second drive means side member A tooth is formed on at least a portion or the entire circumference of the second drive member, the teeth being configured to be meshable and transmitting the driving force transmitted from the second driving means side member to the second moving member. The moving member side member and the pin portion are disposed, and the pin portion moves along the groove along with the rotation of the second moving member side member, thereby approaching or moving to the second moving member side member And a pin portion disposing member for moving the second moving member by moving in a direction to move away, and the groove portion of the second moving member side member is curved in an arc shape which is convex toward the pin portion disposing member Game machine B6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B6, the second drive member side member is rotated by the driving force of the drive means, and the second moving member side member meshed with the second drive member side member is rotated. The pin portion of the pin portion disposing member is moved along the groove portion of the moving member side member. Thus, the pin portion disposing member is moved in the direction toward or away from the second moving member side member, and the second moving member is moved along with the movement of the pin portion disposing member. In this case, since the groove portion of the second moving member side member is curved in an arc shape which is convex toward the pin portion arranging member, the movement amount of the pin portion arranging member accompanying the rotation of the second moving member side member Can be increased to increase the maximum moving amount of the second moving member accordingly.

  In any one of the game machines B4 to B6, the game machine is movably supported by the first moving member and interposed between the groove disposing member or the pin disposing member and the second moving member, A second transmission member is provided for transmitting the movement of the groove portion arrangement member or the pin portion arrangement member to the second movement member to move the second movement member, and a plurality of locations of the second transmission member is the second movement A game machine B7 characterized by being connected to a member.

  According to the gaming machine B7, when the groove-arranging member or the pin-arranging member is moved in the direction toward or away from the second moving member side member, the movement of the groove-arranging member or the pin-arranging member is The second transfer member is transferred via the second transfer member to the second transfer member. In this case, in order to make the second moving member movable in a stable posture, it is preferable that the second transmission member is connected to a plurality of places (for example, two places) of the second moving member. However, in the configuration in which the second transmission member is provided at each of the connection points to the second moving member, the number of members for movably supporting the second transmission member to the first moving member increases (the example described above In this case, two members for supporting the second transmission member on the first moving member are required.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, since the plurality of locations of the second transmission member are connected to the second moving member, the number of the second transmission members can be reduced while securing the number of connection locations. (For example, in the case of securing two connection points, according to the gaming machine B7, the second transmission member can be reduced to one without requiring two second transmission members); The number of members for causing the second transfer member to be movably supported by the first moving member can be reduced. As a result, in addition to the advantageous effects of any one of the game machines B4 to B6, the weight of the entire first moving member can be suppressed and the weight can be reduced. Therefore, to the driving means for moving the first moving member The required maximum output can be reduced, and the drive means can be miniaturized. In particular, the weight reduction of the moving member contributes to the miniaturization of the drive means by reducing the influence of the inertial force when starting the movement of the first moving member in the stopped state.

  In the gaming machine B7, the first moving member is rotationally moved about the rotation axis of the first moving member side member, and the second transmission member is movable relative to the first moving member. A game machine B8 characterized in that the position to be supported is on the rotation shaft side of the first moving member side member rather than the longitudinal center of the first moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B8, since the second transmission member is movably supported by the first movement member, and is connected to the first movement member and the second movement member via the second transmission member, the first movement member When the second moving member is moved, the second moving member is also moved together with the first moving member. That is, the load of the drive means required to move the first moving member is the total weight of both the first moving member and the second moving member. In this case, according to the gaming machine B8, the position at which the second transmission member is movably supported with respect to the first moving member is the rotation axis of the first moving member side member than the longitudinal center of the first moving member. Since it is a side, the second moving member can be brought closer to the rotation shaft side of the first moving member. Thereby, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the position of the center of gravity in the structure in which both the first moving member and the second moving member are integrated can be brought closer to the rotation shaft side of the first moving member. When the movement of the first moving member in the stopped state is started, the influence of the inertial force can be reduced. As a result, the maximum output required for the drive means can be reduced, and the drive means can be miniaturized.

  In any one of the game machines B4 to B6, the second transmission member is a second drive means side member in which the teeth to which the drive force is transmitted from the drive means are formed at least in part or in the entire circumference, and the second A tooth is formed on at least a portion or the entire circumference of the drive means side member so as to be able to be engaged with the drive means side member and which transmits the driving force transmitted from the second drive means side member to the second moving member. A second moving member side member in which one of the parts is disposed, the second drive means side member being disposed coaxially with the first drive means side member of the first transmission member; A game machine B7 characterized in that 2 moving member side member is arranged coaxially with the first moving member side member of the first transmission member.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B4 to B6, the second drive means side member and the second moving member side member of the second transmission member are the first drive means side of the first transmission member Since the member and the first moving member side member are respectively arranged coaxially, the backlash between the second driving member side member and the second moving member side member of the second transmission member, and the first of the first transmission member The backlash between the driving means side member and the first moving member side member can be generated in the same direction, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a deviation in the rendering timing between the first moving member and the second moving member it can.

  In the gaming machine B6, the second drive means side member of the second transfer member may be fixed to the first drive means side member of the first transfer member. According to this, since the second drive means side member of the second transmission member is fixed to the first drive means side member of the first transmission member, to both the first drive means side member and the second drive means side member A member for transmitting the driving force of the driving means is not required, and it is sufficient if there is a member for transmitting to either the first driving means side member or the second driving means side member. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced or the parts can be miniaturized to reduce the product cost.

  Here, adhering to the first drive means side member to the second drive means side member means that the rotations of the first drive means side member and the second drive means side member may be synchronized. Therefore, the first drive means side member and the second drive means side member may be separately formed, may be fixed to each other, or may be integrally formed. When they are formed separately, as a method of fixing them together, for example, adhesion with an adhesive, welding with ultrasonic waves, fastening with a screw, and a method of internally fitting a protrusion provided on one into a recess or a hole provided on the other , A method combining these, etc. are illustrated.

  A game comprising: a movable member movably formed; driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member; and transmission means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the movable member In the machine, the transmission means is formed on the drive means side member in which the teeth to which the drive force is transmitted from the drive means is formed at least a part or the entire circumference, and the drive means side member A moving member side member formed on at least a part or the entire periphery of a tooth for transmitting the driving force transmitted from the means side member to the moving member, the driving means side member and the moving member side member The moving member side is provided with non-forming portions in which the teeth are non-forming and can not be meshed with each other, and the non-forming portions are arranged at meshing positions of the drive unit side member and the moving member side member. No formation of parts Gaming machine C1 but which is characterized in being capable of abutting to form a non-formation portion of the driving means side member.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the moving member side member meshed with the driving means side member is rotated, and along with the rotation of the moving member side member , The moving member is moved. When the driving means side member is further rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the non-formed portions are arranged at the meshing positions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, the driving means side member and the moving member side member Can not be engaged. Thereby, the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member is shut off (a shut-off state is formed), and the moving member is stopped. That is, the moving member is disposed at the end of the moving range. In this case, since the non-formed portion of the moving member side member is formed to be able to abut on the non-formed portion of the driving means side member, the non-formed portion of the moving member side member The rotation of the moving member side member in the contacting direction can be restricted. That is, the movement of the moving member can be restricted.

  In this case, stopping of the moving member is conventionally performed as follows. That is, there is provided a sensor device for detecting the rotational position of the driving means side member or the moving member side member, and when the sensor device detects the rotation of the driving means side member or the moving member side member to a predetermined rotational position It is determined that the moving member has reached the end of the moving range, and the driving of the driving means is stopped. Alternatively, it detects (counts) the drive amount of the drive means (for example, the number of steps when configuring the drive means with a step motor), and when the drive amount reaches a predetermined amount, the moving member ends the movement range It is judged that the driving of the driving means is stopped (see, for example, JP-A-2011-120640). In this case, for example, the drive means may not be stopped even though the moving member has reached the end of the movement range due to detection failure of the rotational position or the drive amount due to the influence of electrical noise. obtain. Therefore, in the conventional game machine, the stopper is provided at the end of the movement range of the moving member, and the movement of the moving member is restricted by the stopper when the driving means is not properly stopped. However, in the structure in which the movement of the moving member is restricted by the stopper as described above, not only the moving member and the stopper may be damaged when the moving member collides with the stopper, but also the load on the driving means is excessive. There is also a risk that it may cause damage to the drive means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, as described above, when the moving member reaches the end of the moving range, the driving means side member and the moving member side member can not be engaged with each other, so that from the driving means Since the transmission of the driving force to the moving member is shut off, the moving member can be stopped even when the driving force of the driving means continues to be generated. Thus, damage due to a collision between the moving member and another member can be avoided. In addition, even if the moving member collides with another member, the moving member is separated from the driving means, and the driving means is idled, so an excessive load acts on the driving means. It can be avoided.

In addition, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a movable member movable and a driving means for applying a driving force to the moving member, and the movable member is moved within a predetermined movement range by the driving force of the driving means. There is a game machine which makes it do (see, for example, JP, 2011-120640, A).
In this case, for example, when the end of the moving range of the moving member is at the rising position and gravity is applied to the moving member disposed at the end of the moving range, the moving member moves (falls) by the action of gravity It is necessary not to. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the movement (falling) of the moving member is restricted by opposing the driving force of the driving means to the gravity (the weight of the moving member) (ie, the moving member is at the end of the movement range Because of the structure of holding), the energy consumption required for holding the moving member is increased.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, as described above, when the moving member is disposed at the end of the moving range, the non-forming portion of the moving member side member abuts against the non-forming portion of the driving means side member Thus, the rotation of the moving member side member (the movement of the moving member) can be restricted. That is, in the gaming machine C1, when the moving member is disposed at the end of the moving range, the moving member and the driving means are separated, so that the moving member can not be held at the end using the driving force of the driving means. The abutment of the non-forming part can be used to mechanically hold the moving member at the end of the movement range. As a result, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption necessary for holding the moving member.

  In the gaming machine C1, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member are disposed at the meshing position of the driving means side member and the moving member side member and abut each other. In this case, the game machine C2 is formed in a shape capable of restricting the rotation of the moving member side member in both directions.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member are disposed at the toothed position of the driving means side member and the moving member side member And the movable member is formed in a shape capable of restricting the rotation of the movable member in both directions when the movable member is placed at the end of the movable range. The moving member when the end of the moving range is reached as compared with the case where the rotation of the side member is formed in a shape that can be restricted by only one direction (for example, only the direction in which the moving member is moved by gravity). The movement of the moving member that should be in the stopped state is an external force (for example, a game) because the moving member can be quickly positioned at the end of the moving range and the moving member can be stably held at the end of the moving range. People play the game board The external force) generated in the Ku or shake it possible to suppress the vibration and displacement.

  In the gaming machine C2, the non-formation portion of the drive means side member is curved in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the drive means side member, and the non-formation portion of the moving member side member is the drive When arranged at the meshing position of the means side member and the moving member side member, it has an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the drive means side member, and the same diameter as the arc of the non-forming portion of the drive means side member Alternatively, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it is formed in a curved shape of a slightly larger diameter arc.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C2, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member is curved in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the driving means side member When the non-forming portion of the member is disposed at the meshing position of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, the non-forming portion has an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the driving means side member and does not form the driving means side member Since it is curved in the shape of a circular arc having the same diameter as the circular arc of the part or a slightly larger diameter, the non-formed part of the moving member side member can be made to abut smoothly on the non-formed part of the driving means side member Both can be easily brought into contact by surface contact. As a result, the non-formed parts can be made to abut each other smoothly, and the impact when the moving member reaches the end of the movement range and stopped can be made gentle, and the contact pressure between the non-formed parts can be reduced Durability of the driving means side member and the moving member side member can be improved.

  In addition, since the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member are curved in a concentric arc shape, the moving member side member is not dependent on the rotational position (phase) of the driving means side member. The non-formed portion can be brought into contact with the non-formed portion of the driving means side member, so that rotation of the moving member side member in both directions can be regulated. That is, even if the drive gear is further rotated after the moving member reaches the end of the moving range, the rotation of the moving member can be restricted in both directions, and as a result, the moving member is held at the end of the moving range can do.

  In any one of the game machines C1 to C3, the moving member side member includes a plurality of fastened portions, and the moving member is fastened and fixed to the moving member side gear via the plurality of fastened portions. A game machine C4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine C4, since the moving member is fastened and fixed to the moving member side member via the plurality of to-be-fastened portions, one structure is formed by the moving member side member and the moving member connected at the plurality of locations. it can. That is, the rigidity of the moving member side member can be enhanced by utilizing the rigidity of the moving member. That is, since the moving member side member receives a reaction force from the driving means side member when the non-forming portion is brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means side member, the rigidity for resisting the reaction force is secured. While it is necessary, for example, if the thickness is increased, the weight is increased, and if the material with high rigidity is used, the material cost is increased. According to the gaming machine C4, the rigidity of the moving member is utilized (ie, movement There is no need to thicken the moving member side member or adopt a high rigidity material in order to increase the rigidity of the moving member side member by being integrated with the member). Thus, the durability of the moving member side member can be improved while reducing the weight and cost of the moving member side member.

  In the gaming machine C4, the moving member side member is disposed at a position where the to-be-fastened portion faces the drive means side member with the non-forming portion of the moving member side member interposed therebetween. C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in the gaming machine C4, the moving member side member is disposed at the position where the to-be-fastened portion faces the driving means side member across the non-forming portion of the moving member side member. When the non-formed portion of the member side member is brought into contact with the non-formed portion of the drive means side member, the rigidity of the portion receiving the reaction force from the drive means side member can be effectively enhanced. As a result, it is possible to further achieve both the weight reduction and cost reduction of the moving member side member and the improvement of the durability of the moving member side member.

  In addition, it is more preferable that the to-be-fastened part of a moving member gearwheel is arrange | positioned by the position which opposes the rotating shaft of a drive means side member on both sides of the non-formation part of a moving member side member. The reaction force received by the moving member side member when the non-forming portion of the moving member side member abuts against the non-forming portion of the driving means side member is the rotational axis of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member Since the to-be-fastened portion is disposed at a position facing the rotation axis of the drive means side member, the rigidity of the portion receiving the reaction force from the drive means side member is enhanced. It is because it can exhibit more.

  A gaming machine comprising: a moving member rotatably formed about a first axis between a first position and a second position; and driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the moving member. The moving member includes: a rotating member rotated about a second axis by a driving force transmitted from the driving means; and a pin member disposed on the rotating member and located eccentric to the second axis, the movement The member has a groove-like guide groove for guiding the pin member along the inner wall surface, and the guide groove is recessed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove and is a recess formed to be able to receive the pin member. The gaming machine D1 comprising: at least the first position, the pin member is received in the recess; and the moving member is mechanically held at the first position.

  According to the gaming machine D1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the rotating member is rotated about the second axis by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and the pin member disposed on the rotating member Are guided along the guide groove of the moving member. Since the pin member is located eccentrically from the second axis of the rotating member, the moving member is moved between the first position and the second position as the pin member is guided along the inner wall surface of the guide groove. It is rotated around one axis.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a first shaft, a moving member rotated about the first shaft, and driving means for applying a driving force to the moving member, and the driving force of the driving means Accordingly, there is a gaming machine which rotates the moving member between the first position and the second position with the first axis as a rotation center (see, for example, JP-A-2011-120640). In this case, for example, when the first position is the raised position, it is necessary to prevent the moving member disposed at the first position from moving (falling) due to the action of gravity. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the movement (falling) of the moving member is restricted by opposing the driving force of the driving means to the gravity (the weight of the moving member) (ie, the moving member is held at the first position) Energy consumption needed to hold the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, at least at the first position, the moving member is mechanically held at the first position by receiving the pin member in the recess provided in the inner wall surface of the guide groove. . That is, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the moving member can be mechanically held at the first position, and accordingly, the energy consumption of the driving means can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the pin member is received in the recess recessed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion and the moving member is mechanically held at the first position, the moving member is machined to the first position only by the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion. The degree of freedom in the arrangement of the guide groove portion and the rotation member can be enhanced as compared with the structure of holding the same.

  In addition, the recessed part does not need to be bottomed and may penetrate. That is, it is sufficient to have the inner wall surfaces communicating with the guide groove and facing each other. The same applies to the concepts of various inventions described below.

  In the gaming machine D1, at least at the first position, the inner wall surface of the recess is substantially parallel to the direction connecting the first axis and the pin member, and the direction connecting the second axis and the pin member A game machine D2 substantially orthogonal to the game machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, at least at the first position, the inner wall surface of the recess is disposed in a direction substantially parallel to the direction connecting the first axis and the pin member, And since it is arrange | positioned in the direction substantially orthogonal to the direction which connects a 2nd axis | shaft and a pin member, even in the state which cancelled | released the driving force of a drive means, rotation centering around the 1st axis of a movement member Since the inner wall surface of the concave portion presses the pin member in a direction parallel to the direction connecting the second axis and the pin member, depending on the pressing of the pin member accompanying the rotation of the moving member, It is not possible to form a rotation about the second axis. Thus, the holding of the moving member at the first position can be performed more firmly. Therefore, for example, by moving or swinging the game machine, the player can reliably hold the moving member in the first position even when the moving member is shaken, and moves downward in the direction of gravity ( It can control that it descends.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inner wall surface of the recess is formed to be curved in a circular arc centered on the second axis of the rotating member in a state where the moving member is disposed at the first position. A gaming machine D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inner wall surface of the recess is curved in an arc around the second axis of the rotating member in the state where the moving member is disposed at the first position. As a result, the pin member can be received in the recess while suppressing the change in the posture of the moving member after the moving member is disposed at the first position.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the recess is an inner wall surface facing the guide groove, and the pin member slides when the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position. A game machine D4 characterized in that the inner wall surface on the side of

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the recess is an opposing inner wall surface of the guide groove portion, and the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position The moving member is moved from the second position to the first position without switching the driving direction of the driving means (rotational direction of the rotating member). The recess may receive the pin member to hold the moving member in the first position.

  The game machine D5 according to any one of the game machines D1 to D4, wherein the recess is an inner wall surface opposite to the guide groove portion, the inner wall surface closer to the first axis.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the recessed portion is a recessed inner wall surface of the guide groove facing the first shaft, which is closer to the first axis. The recessed portion can be disposed in a region serving as a dead space between the guide groove and the first axis, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, since the concave portion is disposed on the first axis side in this manner, the distance between the first axis and the pin member in the state where the movable member is disposed at the first position can be further shortened. The inner wall surface of the recess can reduce the force pressing the pin member with the rotation about the first axis. Thus, the holding of the moving member at the first position can be performed more firmly.

  A moving member slidably formed, a driving means for generating a driving force for sliding the moving member, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member In the gaming machine, the moving member includes a base member having a slide hole formed as an opening extending along the direction of sliding movement of the moving member, and the moving member is a plurality of members inserted through the slide holes of the base member. The transmission means is disposed on the other surface side of the base member opposite to the one surface side of the base member on which the movement member is disposed, and the drive force of the drive means is moved A first member for transmitting to the member, the first member including at least one of the plurality of projections of the movable member projected to the other surface of the base member through the slide hole of the base member; Gaming machine E1, characterized in that also connected to the projecting portion of the 1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the first member of the transmitting means is displaced by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and the displacement of the first member is the protrusion of the moving member Transmitted to Thus, the movable member is slid by moving the protrusion of the movable member along the slide hole.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as pachinko or the like, a movable member formed slidably, a drive means for generating a drive force for sliding the move member, and a drive force generated by the drive means are moved. There is a gaming machine having a transmission means for transmitting to a member, and transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the moving member by the transmission means to slide the moving member (see, for example, JP-A-2004-229885). . In this case, in order to stably perform the sliding movement of the moving member, it is preferable to increase the number of protrusions inserted through the slide hole. On the other hand, when the number of protrusions is increased, the number of parts for holding the protrusions (preventing removal from the slide hole) also increases, and the cost increases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a method of reducing the cost while stabilizing the sliding movement of the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the transmitting means includes the first member for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the moving member, and the first member is one surface side of the base member on which the moving member is disposed. And at least one of the plurality of projections of the movable member which is disposed on the other side of the base member opposite to the side of the base member and which protrudes to the other side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member Being connected, at least one of the parts for holding the protrusion can be used as the first member. As a result, the number of projecting portions can be secured, and stable sliding movement of the moving member can be achieved, and the number of parts for holding the projecting portions can be reduced, thereby achieving cost reduction.

  In the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a connection member connected to the first member to transmit the driving force transmitted from the drive means to the first member, and the base member is a connection formed as an opening. And a connecting member of the driving means and the transmitting means is disposed on one side of the base member, and the connecting member is connected to the first member through the connecting hole of the base member. A game machine E2 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes the connecting member for transmitting the driving force connected to the first member and transmitted from the driving means to the first member, and is formed as an opening The connection member is provided with the connection hole and the connection member is connected to the first member through the connection hole of the base member. Therefore, the connection member of the drive means and the transmission means is disposed on one side of the base member together with the moving member. can do. Thereby, the constituent members can be concentrated on one side of the base member (that is, the arrangement of the constituent members on the other side of the base member can be suppressed), and as a result, the space can be efficiently used. The overall size can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E2, a first member of the transmission means is rotatably supported by the base member on the other surface side of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member. That is, in the transmission means, the connection member is disposed on one side of the base member, the first member is disposed on the other side of the base member, and the connection member and the first member are connected via the connection hole of the base member. As a result, the transmission path of the driving force formed by the connecting member and the first member is lengthened. Therefore, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted, the connection member and the first member may be deformed, and the stable transmission to the moving member may not be possible. On the other hand, since the first member is rotatably supported by the base member on the other surface side of the base member, the rigidity of the connecting member and the first member as a whole can be obtained by utilizing the rigidity of the base member. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member via the connection member and the first member.

  In particular, in the gaming machine E3, since the first member of the connection member and the first member is rotatably supported on the base member, such connection is performed in comparison with the case where the connection member is rotatably supported on the base member. The distance from the pivotal support to the base member to the projection of the movable member can be shortened, and as a result, stabilization of the transmission of the drive force of the drive means to the movable member can be achieved with less pivotal support.

  In the gaming machine E1, the first member is connected to at least one of a plurality of projections of the movable member which is projected to the other surface side of the base member through a slide hole of the base member. And a rack member formed as a rack having teeth engraved on one side along the direction of sliding movement of the moving member, and a pinion formed in mesh with the rack member and transmitted from the drive means And a pinion member for transmitting a driving force to the rack member.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the first member is formed as a rack and pinion (rack member and pinion member), and the teeth of the rack member are engraved along the direction of slide movement of the moving member. Since the driving force of the driving means can be transmitted to the moving member as the driving force in the linear direction through the first member, it is possible to stabilize the sliding movement of the moving member. Can be

  In the gaming machine E4, the rack member is connected to at least two or more of the plurality of projections of the movable member which are projected to the other surface side of the base member through the slide holes of the base member. Game machine E5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E4, the rack member is a part of the plurality of projecting portions of the moving member projected to the other surface side of the base member through the slide holes of the base member. Since it is connected to at least two or more projections, at least two or more of the parts for holding the projections can be used as the rack member. As a result, the number of projecting portions can be secured, and stable sliding movement of the moving member can be achieved, and the number of parts for holding the projecting portions can be reduced, thereby achieving cost reduction.

  Note that connecting two or more of the plurality of projections of the sliding movable member to the first member in this manner causes the driving force of the drive means to move to the movable member by swinging (rotation). In the first member of the transmitting configuration, the movement locus of the connection portion with the projecting portion is arc-shaped, which is impossible. By forming the first member as a rack and pinion as in the game machine E7, This is possible for the first time (the movement trajectory of the rack member can be made to be a straight line to correspond to the slide movement of the moving member), thereby securing the number of protrusions and stably moving the moving member The cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts for holding the projection.

  In the gaming machine E4 or E5, the base member includes a plurality of rows of slide holes extending along the direction of slide movement of the moving member, and the rack member of the first member is a row of the slide holes. A game machine E6 characterized in that each is connected to at least one projection.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine E4 or E5, the base member is provided with a plurality of rows of slide holes extending along the direction of the slide movement of the moving member. Thus, the plurality of projections of the moving member can be respectively guided, and the sliding movement of the moving member can be stably performed by that amount. In this case, since the rack member of the first member is connected to at least one protrusion in each row of the slide holes, it is possible to suppress the inclination of the posture of the movable member when the movable member slides. it can. In addition, the number of projecting portions can be secured to enable stable sliding movement of the moving member, and the number of parts for holding the projecting portions can be reduced to reduce the cost.

  In any one of the game machines E1 to E6, the base member is formed in a plate shape and is disposed in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole extends in the vertical direction, and the moving member is arranged along the slide hole of the base member Is slidingly moved in the vertical direction, and the game machine E7 is characterized.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the base member is formed in a plate shape and disposed in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is in the vertical direction. Since the movable member is slid in the vertical direction along the slide hole, the structure in which the first member is disposed on the other surface side of the base member is effective, and the movable member can be stably slid. That is, when the base member is disposed in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is in the vertical direction, the moving member is inclined forward in the direction away from one surface of the base member by the action of gravity. Since the base member is interposed between the first member connected to the movable member and the movable member, the forwardly inclined posture of the movable member is determined not only by the component for holding the projection but also by the first member. As a result, it is possible to slide the moving member in a stable state.

  In the gaming machine E7, the first member is connected to a projecting portion located on the upper side of at least the center of the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine E7, the first member is connected to the projecting portion located on the upper side of at least the center of the moving member, and therefore, one side of the base member With respect to the moving member which is in the forward tilting posture in the direction away from the moving member, the forward tilting posture of the moving member can be effectively restricted by the first member, and as a result, the sliding movement of the moving member is further stabilized. It can be done.

  A game comprising: a movable member movably formed; driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member; and transmission means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the movable member And the transmission means includes a pinion to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving means, and a tooth surface engaged with the pinion and disposed substantially parallel to a horizontal surface, and is horizontally displaced as the pinion rotates. And a link member whose one end is connected to the rack and the other end is connected to the moving member and which is erected or tilted along with the horizontal movement of the rack, the erecting of the link member The moving member is disposed at the elevated position and the moving member is disposed at the lowered position by tilting the link member, and in the elevated position of the moving member, one end of the link member and Gaming machine F1, characterized in that the direction connecting the end is close to the plane perpendicular to the respective direction of movement of the tooth surface and the rack of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine F1, when the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the rack is displaced to one side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, the link member is moved along with the displacement to the one side in the horizontal direction of the rack. As the link member is tilted, the moving member is moved downward (downward) to the lower position as the link member is tilted, and when the rack is displaced to the other side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion Along with the sideward displacement, the link member is erected, and as the link member is erected, the movable member is moved upward (lifted) toward the raised position.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable member which is movably formed, a driving means which generates a driving force to be applied to the moving member, and a transmission means which transmits the driving force of the driving means to the moving member And the transmission means includes a rack and pinion in a part of the transmission path of the driving force (see, for example, JP 2012-065923 A). In this case, when the moving member is disposed at the raised position, it is necessary to prevent the moving member from moving (descending) by the action of gravity. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the movement (falling) of the moving member is restricted (that is, the moving member is held at the raised position) by making the driving force of the driving means oppose gravity (the weight of the moving member). Because of the structure), the energy consumption required for holding the moving member is large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, at the rising position of the moving member, the direction connecting the one end and the other end of the link member is close to the plane orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack and the moving direction of the rack. As a force component acting on the rack from the link member, generation of a force component in the direction of moving the rack in the horizontal direction can be suppressed. Thus, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the moving member can be held at the raised position, and as a result, the energy consumption necessary for holding the moving member can be suppressed.

  In addition, being close to a plane (hereinafter referred to as a "reference plane") orthogonal to each of the tooth surface of the rack and the movement direction of the rack means the reference plane and the direction connecting one end and the other end of the link member. It means that the angle is set to at least 30 degrees or less (preferably 15 degrees or less). Therefore, an aspect in which the direction connecting the one end and the other end of the link member is positioned in the reference plane is also included in an example of the game machine F1.

  In the gaming machine F1, the pinion and the rack of the transmission means are provided with a base member rotatably and movably disposed, the transmission means comprising at least a pair of the rack and the link member and the link member being the link member. The base members are disposed to face each other along the movement direction of the rack, and the base members are interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of link members when the movement members are disposed in the raised position, and the pair of links A game machine F2 comprising: an interposed portion formed to be able to abut on an opposing surface of a member.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, when the moving member is disposed at the raised position, it is interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of link members and on the facing surfaces of the pair of link members. Since the base member is provided with the interposed portion formed to be contactable, the posture of the movable member can be stabilized at the raised position. That is, in the raised position, the pair of link members is erected, so it is difficult to maintain the posture, and the posture of the movable member tends to be unstable. An interposed portion is provided between the opposing surfaces of the pair of link members. As a result, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the pair of link members in the opposing direction (that is, the moving direction of the rack) by the interposed portion. As a result, the pair of link members can be maintained in the upright state, and the posture of the movable member can be stabilized at the raised position.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the pinion and the rack of the transmission means each include a base member rotatably and movably disposed, and the transmission means includes at least a pair of the rack and the link member and the link member Are disposed facing each other along the moving direction of the rack, and the base member is extended along the moving direction of the rack and is disposed at a predetermined distance from each other. A game machine F3 characterized in that one end of each of the pair of link members is interposed between opposing surfaces of the pair of opposing wall portions.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the base member includes a pair of opposing wall portions extending along the moving direction of the rack and disposed opposite to each other at a predetermined distance from each other. Therefore, the moving member can be moved in a stable posture. That is, a moving member is connected to the other end of the link member, and a variation in the position of the center of gravity is likely to occur due to the input of a disturbance, and maintaining its posture (stable movement) is difficult. Since they are disposed face to face along the moving direction of the rack, it is possible to cancel each other's displacement between the pair of link members disposed facing each other in the moving direction of the rack. Maintenance is possible. On the other hand, since one end of the pair of link members is interposed between the opposing surfaces of the pair of opposing wall portions, the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack of the pair of link members by the pair of opposing wall portions Displacement can be regulated. Thereby, the posture of the pair of link members can be maintained, and the moving member can be moved in a stable posture.

  In the gaming machine F3, at least one of the pair of opposing wall portions of the base member is characterized in that its standing height is increased as the moving member approaches the rising position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, as the moving member approaches the raised position (ie, as the link member is erected), the standing height of the opposing wall is increased (ie, one end of the link member with respect to the opposing wall) Since the area facing the side is increased), the movement of the moving member can be stabilized while improving the appearance. That is, by raising the erected height of the facing wall not entirely but by partially raising it, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the facing wall from being impaired, and the link member is erected (ie, raised) The effect of maintaining the posture of the link member by the opposing wall portion can be enhanced as the moving member becomes more difficult to move in a stable posture. As a result, it is possible to move the moving member in a stable posture while suppressing the loss of the appearance.

  In this case, at least one of the pair of opposing wall portions of the base member, in the portion where the standing height is increased, the moving member is disposed at the lowered position (that is, the link member is laid down) Is preferably set to a height at which the other end side (a side connected to the moving member) of the link member can face. According to this configuration, it is possible to simultaneously obtain the effect of maintaining the posture of the moving member disposed at the lowered position by utilizing the portion where the vertical height is increased in order to stabilize the posture of the moving member during movement. Can.

  In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, an extending member is provided extending in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack, and the moving member is slidably connected to the extending member and the extending member is provided. The movable member includes a guide portion which is guided along the extending direction of the members, and the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack, and the extending member is A game machine F5, wherein the moving member is disposed between the link member and the moving member in a direction in which the moving member is offset.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the extending member extending in the direction orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack and guiding the guide portion of the moving member along the extending direction Since the extending member is disposed between the link member and the center of gravity of the moving member in the direction in which the moving member is offset, the effect of offsetting the moving member (that is, necessary for holding the moving member) It is possible to secure smooth movement of the moving member while exerting

  In the case where a pair of link members is provided and an interposed portion is provided between the pair of link members facing each other, it is preferable to dispose the extending member inside the interposed portion. An extending member is disposed in a central portion where a pair of link members face each other, and while improving the guiding effect of the movement of the moving member, effectively utilizing the inside of the intervening portion which becomes a dead space to achieve downsizing as a whole. It is because

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and orthogonal to the movement direction of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and orthogonal to the movement direction of the rack When the moving member is disposed at the raised position, the weight of the moving member is also acted on the rack via the link member in the direction of offset of the moving member. That is, a force component in the offset direction of the moving member can be generated as a force component acting on the rack from the link member. Therefore, the weight of the moving member can reduce the force component in the direction to move the rack in the horizontal direction, and the energy consumption of the driving means necessary to hold the moving member in the raised position can be suppressed. .

  When the moving member is offset in the direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack, the shift of the center of gravity due to the input of the disturbance tends to occur by the offset. The configuration of the gaming machine F3 is particularly effective.

  In the gaming machine F6, the amount of the offset can be changed as the rack moves in the horizontal direction, and the amount of offset of the moving member at the raised position is at least the movement at the lowered position. A game machine F7 characterized in that it is larger than the amount of offset of members.

  Here, when the moving member is offset in the direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack, the force component in the offset direction is in a state where the moving member is disposed at the raised position. Can be used to prevent the rack from being moved horizontally by the weight of the moving member. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive means required to hold | maintain a movement member in a raise position can be suppressed by that part. On the other hand, when moving the moving member between the lowered position and the raised position, the force component in the offset direction becomes resistance, and the energy consumption of the drive means necessary to move the moving member increases accordingly. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, the amount of offset of the moving member can be changed along with the horizontal movement of the rack, and the amount of offset of the moving member at the rising position is Since it is larger than the offset amount of the moving member at least at the lowered position, the force component in the offset direction is secured at the raised position, and the rack is prevented from being moved horizontally by the weight of the moving member. it can. On the other hand, when moving the moving member between the lowered position and the raised position, the force component in the offset direction can be reduced to reduce the resistance. From the above, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive means required to hold the moving member in the raised position, and to suppress the energy consumption of the drive means necessary to move the moving member between the raised position and the lowered position. It is possible to achieve both.

  The gaming machine F7 includes a pair of opposing wall portions extending along the moving direction of the rack and disposed opposite to each other at a predetermined interval, and one end of the link member is in the offset direction with respect to the rack Connected to the rack in a displaceable state, and interposed between the facing of the pair of facing walls, and the moving member is disposed at a raised position between the facing of the pair of facing walls When the moving member is disposed at the lowered position, at least the portion where one end of the link member is interposed is in the offset direction from the rack than the portion where the one end of the link member is disposed. A game machine F8 characterized in that the amount of separation is increased.

  According to the gaming machine F8, one end of the link member is connected to the rack so as to be displaceable along the offset direction with respect to the rack, and is interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of facing wall portions. When the link member is moved in the horizontal direction, one end of the link member is guided along the gap between the pair of opposing wall portions to move the link member along the offset direction while raising or tilting it. It can be done. As a result, as the link member rises or tilts, the moving member can also be moved along the offset direction, and the amount of offset of the moving member can be changed.

  In this case, when the moving member is disposed at the raised position (when the link member is erected), at least the moving member is lowered at the portion where the one end of the link member is interposed between the opposing wall portions. When placed in the position (when the link member is tilted), the amount of separation in the offset direction from the rack is larger than in the portion where one end of the link member is interposed, so the offset of the moving member in the raised position Can be at least greater than the amount of offset of the moving member in the lowered position. Thereby, in the ascending position, a force component in the offset direction can be secured, and energy consumption of the drive means necessary for holding the moving member in the ascending position can be suppressed, and the movement between the descending position and the ascending position When moving the member, the force component (i.e., the resistance) in the offset direction can be reduced to reduce the energy consumption of the drive means required to move the moving member between the raised position and the lowered position.

  In particular, in the gaming machine F8, one end of the link member is connected to the rack so as to be displaceable along the offset direction with respect to the rack, so that one end of the link member is guided along the facing between the pair of opposing wall portions In this case, the link member itself can be moved along the offset direction. Therefore, the occurrence of resistance when the link member moves along the facing between the pair of opposing wall portions can be suppressed, and as a result, the driving means required for moving the link member between the raised position and the lowered position Energy consumption can be reduced.

  The gaming machine F7 includes a pair of opposing wall portions extending along the moving direction of the rack and disposed opposite to each other at a predetermined interval, and one end of the link member is in the offset direction with respect to the rack Connected to the rack in a non-displaceable state, and the other end side of the part connected to the rack is interposed between the opposing walls of the pair of opposing walls, and Between the opposing parts, when the moving member is disposed at the rising position, a portion where one end of the link member is interposed is at least one end of the link member when the moving member is disposed at the lowering position. A gaming machine F9 characterized in that the amount of separation from the rack in the offset direction is larger than that of the portion to be played.

  According to the gaming machine F9, one end of the link member is connected to the rack in a state in which it can not be displaced along the offset direction with respect to the rack, and the other end is a pair of opposing wall portions than the portion connected to the rack When the rack is moved in the horizontal direction, one end of the link member is guided along the gap between the pair of opposing wall portions, whereby the link member is It is possible to stand or tilt while elastically deforming along the offset direction. As a result, the moving member can be moved along the offset direction with the rising or tilting of the link member, and the amount of offset of the moving member can be changed.

  In this case, when the moving member is disposed at the raised position (when the link member is erected), at least the moving member is lowered at the portion where the one end of the link member is interposed between the opposing wall portions. When placed in the position (when the link member is tilted), the amount of separation in the offset direction from the rack is larger than in the portion where one end of the link member is interposed, so the offset of the moving member in the raised position Can be at least greater than the amount of offset of the moving member in the lowered position. Thereby, in the ascending position, a force component in the offset direction can be secured, and energy consumption of the drive means necessary for holding the moving member in the ascending position can be suppressed, and the movement between the descending position and the ascending position When moving the member, the force component (i.e., the resistance) in the offset direction can be reduced to reduce the energy consumption of the drive means required to move the moving member between the raised position and the lowered position.

  In particular, in the gaming machine F9, one end of the link member is connected to the rack in a state in which it can not be displaced along the offset direction with respect to the rack, and the other end is a pair of opposing wall portions than the portion connected to the rack Since the link member is interposed between the opposing members, when the link member is erected (arranged in the raised position), the elastically deformed link member is pressed against one of the pair of opposing wall portions. be able to. Thereby, in a state where the moving member is disposed at the raised position, in addition to the force component in the offset direction by the offset of the moving member, the rack is made by the increase in resistance by pressing the link member against the opposing wall portion. Horizontal movement can be suppressed by the weight of the moving member. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive means required to hold | maintain a movement member in a raise position can be suppressed by that part.

  A game comprising: a movable member movably formed; driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member; and transmission means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the movable member In the above-mentioned machine, the transmission member has a first transmission member having teeth at least in part and to which the moving member is connected, and a second transmission member at least in part having teeth capable of meshing with the teeth of the first transmission member. A transmission member, and a coupling member connected to the second transmission member and transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second transmission member, the coupling member being continuous with the teeth of the second transmission member A game machine G1 characterized in that teeth are formed.

  According to the gaming machine G1, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second transmission member through the coupling member, the second transmission member is rotated, and the rotation of the second transmission member is the meshing of the teeth of each other Is transmitted to the first transmission member, and the first transmission member is rotated. As a result, the moving member coupled to the first transmission member is moved with the rotation of the first transmission member.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable member which is movably formed, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member And a first transmission member to which the moving member is connected, and a second transmission member engaged with the first transmission member to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the first transmission member via the coupling. There is a gaming machine in which a part of drive means is formed by a transmission member (see, for example, JP-A-2011-110376). In this case, the second transmission member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the first transmission member engaged with the second transmission member is rotated, whereby the moving member connected to the first transmission member is It is moved with the rotation of the first transmission member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the moving member is connected to the first transmission member, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are rotated by the driving force of the driving means to move the movement member. When the movable member shakes, the first transmission member is displaced with the movement of the movable member, which may cause disengagement with the second transmission member. Even if it is possible to avoid disengagement of the first transmission member and the second transmission member, the meshing area of the second transmission member with the teeth is equal to the displacement of the first transmission member due to the swing of the moving member. As a result, the contact pressure is concentrated on a part of the tooth surface, which may cause uneven wear of the teeth and reduce the durability.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the coupling member is formed with teeth continuous to the teeth of the second transmission member, so even if the first transmission member is displaced due to the movement of the movable member, The teeth of the first transmission member can be meshed with the teeth formed on the connecting member. Thus, disengagement of the first transmission member and the second transmission member can be suppressed. In addition, when the first transmission member is displaced due to the movement of the moving member, the tooth engagement area between the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member and the connection member can be secured. The wear can be suppressed to improve the durability.

  The teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member do not have to be formed over the entire circumference, but may be formed in a part of the circumferential direction. The same applies to the following. The same is true for the other gears.

  In the gaming machine G1, the connecting member is provided along the axial direction of the second transmitting member from the axial end surface of the second transmitting member and the tooth forming portion on which the teeth are formed, and the tooth forming portion And a body portion connected to the erected end of the portion, and the tooth forming portion has a surface on the opposite side to the side on which the teeth are formed curved in an arc around the axis of the second transmission member A game machine G2 characterized by being formed as a concave surface.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the tooth forming portion of the connecting member is erected along the axial direction of the second transmitting member from the axial end face of the second transmitting member. Since the surface opposite to the side on which the teeth continuous to the teeth of the transmission member are formed is formed as a concave curved surface curved in a circular arc centered on the axis of the second transmission member, the tooth forming portion of the connection member Even when connecting to the axial end face of the second transmission member, the area of the axial end face of the second transmission member can be secured, and accordingly, the fixing member attached to the axial end face of the second transmission member The diameter can be made. In addition, when the second transmission member and the connection member are integrally molded from a resin material, the tooth forming portion is formed by forming the surface opposite to the surface on which the teeth are formed as described above. Can be made uniform to improve the formability thereof.

  In the gaming machine G2, in the tooth forming portion of the connection member, the teeth are formed in a range from an axial end surface of the second transmission member to the main body portion.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the teeth are formed in the tooth forming portion of the connecting member over the range from the end face in the axial direction of the second transmission member to the main body. It is possible to secure a sufficient area to prevent disengagement of the first transmission member and the second transmission member more reliably. In addition, when the second transmission member and the connection member are integrally molded from a resin material, the teeth are formed over the entire teeth forming portion as described above, so that the thickness of the teeth forming portion is the entire thickness thereof. Can be made uniform to improve its formability.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a second moving member provided with the first transmission member and the second transmission member and formed movable is a guide for guiding the second moving member in a linear direction And the transmission member includes a pinion to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving means, and a rack engaged with the pinion and displaced along with the rotation of the pinion, and the connection member includes A gaming machine G4 having one end connected to the rack and the other end connected to the second transmission member.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the second moving member in which the first transmission member and the second transmission member are disposed is provided, and the second moving member is the guide member And the transmission means comprises a pinion to which the driving force is transmitted from the drive means, and a rack engaged with the pinion and displaced along with the rotation of the pinion, and the connecting member is connected to the rack Since one end is connected and the other end is connected to the second transmission member, the connection member is displaced by operating the rack and pinion by the driving force of the drive means, and the second connection member is displaced. The rotation of the transmission member and the linear movement of the second moving member can be simultaneously performed. That is, since the movable member is connected to the first transmission member engaged with the second transmission member, the movable member can be linearly moved together with the second movable member while rotating the movable member. As a result, the stage effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the transmission of the driving force of the driving means to the moving member and the transmission to the second moving member can be shared by one member (connection member), the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be

  In the gaming machine G4, the rack is disposed such that the tooth surface meshed with the pinion is substantially parallel to the horizontal plane and is displaced in a horizontal direction as the pinion rotates, and the second moving member is horizontal to the rack The guide member is guided by the guide member in the vertical direction along with the displacement in the direction, and the coupling member is configured such that the tooth formed in the tooth forming portion is the first transmission when the second moving member is disposed at the raised position. A game machine G5 disposed at a position corresponding to the teeth of the member.

  According to the gaming machine G5, the rack is disposed such that the tooth surface engaged with the pinion is substantially parallel to the horizontal plane and is displaced in the horizontal direction as the pinion rotates, and the second moving member is in the horizontal direction of the rack. Since it is guided by the guide member in the vertical direction along with the displacement, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and when the rack is displaced to one side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, to the one side in the horizontal direction of the rack As the connection member is tilted, the second moving member is moved downward (downward) toward the lower position as the connection member is tilted, while the rack is displaced to the other side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion. Then, the connecting member is raised with the displacement of the rack to the other side in the horizontal direction, and the second moving member is moved upward (lifted) toward the raised position as the connecting member is raised.

  In this case, in the state in which the second moving member is disposed at the raised position, the connecting member is erected, making it difficult to maintain its posture, and the posture of the second moving member becomes unstable. Along with this, the posture of the moving member disposed in the second moving member becomes more unstable. Therefore, the swaying of the second moving member makes the swaying of the moving member more remarkable, and the displacement of the first transmission member accompanying the swaying of the moving member becomes large. That is, in the state in which the second moving member is disposed at the raised position, the meshing between the first transmission member and the second transmission member is easily released.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G4, the connecting member causes the first transmission of the teeth formed on the tooth forming portion when the second moving member is disposed at the raised position. Since the displacement of the first transmission member is increased with the movement of the movable member because it is disposed at the position corresponding to the teeth of the member, the state in which the engagement between the first transmission member and the second transmission member is most easily released , The teeth formed in the tooth forming portion can be effectively used. Thus, disengagement of the first transmission member and the second transmission member can be effectively suppressed.

  In the gaming machine G4 or G5, the transmission means includes the rack, a connecting member whose one end is connected to the rack, a second transmitting member whose other end is connected to the rack, and a tooth on the second transmitting member A pair of first transmission members to be engaged and a pair of moving members connected to the first transmission members, and the first transmission member and the second transmission member of one set are the first transmissions of the other set One set and the other set may be disposed to face each other along the moving direction of the rack in a state of being engaged with the member and the second transmission member. According to this, it is possible to improve synchronization accuracy between the moving member in one set and the moving member in the other set. In addition, even if only the first transmission members or only the second transmission members are engaged with each other, the synchronization accuracy of the moving members can be improved, so that the first transmission members and the second transmission members By meshing with each other, it is possible to increase the meshing location (meshing area) and to disperse the surface pressure of the tooth surface by that amount, so that the durability can be improved.

  A plurality of movable members movably formed, a drive means for generating a driving force for respectively moving the plurality of movable members, and a transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the plurality of movable members And the plurality of moving members are respectively retracted to different retracted positions, and are moved from the different retracted positions respectively to be disposed at a reference position, whereby the plurality of moving members are combined. The plurality of moving members are moved in a direction close to each other, and the first moving member and the second moving member arranged adjacent to each other at the reference position, and the adjacent directions of the first moving member and the second moving member And a third moving member that is in contact with each of the first moving member and the second moving member in a direction substantially orthogonal to each other, and the third moving member serves as the reference By being brought into contact with each of the first moving member and the second moving member in position, a force is formed in a direction to make the first moving member and the second moving member approach each other, and the first moving member, A game machine H1 characterized in that a second moving member and a third moving member are combined.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the first moving member, the second moving member and the third moving member by the transmitting means, whereby the first moving member, the second moving member and the third moving member are transmitted. The moving members are retracted to different retraction positions, and are moved from the different retraction positions to the reference position.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of movable members formed movably, a driving means for generating a driving force for respectively moving the plurality of moving members, and a driving force of the driving means The plurality of moving members are provided with transmission means for transmitting to the plurality of moving members, respectively, and the plurality of moving members are respectively retracted to the different retracted positions, and moved from the different retracted positions and arranged at the reference position. There is a gaming machine in which is combined (for example, see JP-A-2012-115300). In this case, if the plurality of moving members are not properly connected at the reference position, the rendering effect by combining the plurality of moving members is lost. However, as in the above-described conventional gaming machine, although it is relatively easy to couple a pair of symmetrical moving members face to face, it has been difficult to couple three or more moving members.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, at the reference position, the first moving member and the second moving member are disposed adjacent to each other, and are substantially orthogonal to the adjacent direction of the first moving member and the second moving member. When the third moving member moved toward the first moving member and the second moving member from the direction is brought into contact with each of the first moving member and the second moving member, the first moving member and the second moving member The forces in the directions of bringing the members into proximity with each other are formed, so that the first moving member, the second moving member and the third moving member can be properly coupled. As a result, it is possible to secure a rendering effect by combining a plurality of moving members.

  In the gaming machine H1, the first moving member and the second moving member respectively have a first contact portion and a second contact portion, and are in contact with the first contact portion and the second contact portion, respectively. The third moving member is provided with a third abutting portion, and the third abutting portion of the third moving member is in contact with the first abutting portion and the second abutting portion of the first moving member and the second moving member By being respectively abutted, a force in a direction to make the first moving member and the second moving member close to each other is formed, and a front view shape of the first moving member and the second moving member is the first contact The front view shape of the third moving member is a concave shape formed by the contact portion and the second abutting portion and recessed toward the contact surface between the first moving member and the second moving member. Formed by the third abutment portion and Gaming machine 1 in response to the concave shape of the moving member and the second moving member center, characterized in that it is a projecting shape protruding H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the first moving member and the second moving member are arranged side by side at the reference position, and the first moving portion and the second moving portion with respect to the first contact portion and the second contact portion of the second moving member. When the third contact portion of the third moving member is abutted, a force is formed in the direction to move the first moving member and the second moving member closer to each other, whereby the first moving member, the second moving member And the third moving member are coupled.

  In this case, the front view shape (the combination of the first contact portion and the second contact portion) of the first moving member and the second moving member is a concave shape in which the center is recessed, while the front view of the third moving member The first movable member, the second movable member, and the second movable member have a projecting shape in which the center is projected corresponding to the concave shapes of the first movable member and the second movable member. The moving effect can be improved by moving the moving member from the retracted position to the reference position and combining the moving members at the reference position.

  That is, as described above, the first moving member and the second moving member disposed adjacent to each other have a concave shape as described above in the front view shape of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member. In a form in which the third moving member moved toward the shape has a protruding shape, when the third moving member is moved from the retracted position to the reference position, the first moving member and the second moving member are arranged adjacent to each other. The third moving member (the third moving member in the reference position according to the gaming machine H2) reminds the player of a mode in which the moving member moves in and pushes the first moving member and the second moving member apart in the direction away from each other. The contact portion is brought into contact with the first moving member and the second moving member (the first contact portion and the second contact portion) to move the first moving member and the second moving member closer to each other. These first move to form the force Wood, can be bound to the second moving member and the third movable member. As a result, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the game can be operated in a mode different from the player's expectation, and the effect produced can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine H2, the first moving member and the second moving member are respectively supported by the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism on the base member, and the first moving member and the second moving member are at the reference position. In the state where they are arranged side by side, the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism may be arranged in a V shape in which the distance between the first moving member and the second moving member is narrowed with respect to the base member side. preferable. The first movement is performed at the reference position by setting the angle formed by the first and second contact portions and the third contact portion with respect to the angle formed by the first and second link mechanisms. This is because a force can be generated in the direction in which the member and the second moving member are brought close to each other.

  In the gaming machine H1, while the front view shape of the first moving member and the second moving member is a concave shape which is recessed toward the contact surface between the first moving member and the second moving member, the third A game machine H3 characterized in that a front view shape of the moving member is a protruding shape in which a center protrudes corresponding to the concave shape of the first moving member and the second moving member.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the front view shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member have a concave shape in which the center is concave, while the front view shape of the third moving member is The first movable member, the second movable member, and the third movable member are referred to from the retracted position, because the first movable member, the second movable member, and the third movable member It is possible to improve the rendering effect by moving to the position and combining at the reference position.

  That is, as described above, the first moving member and the second moving member disposed adjacent to each other have a concave shape as described above in the front view shape of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member. In a form in which the third moving member moved toward the shape has a protruding shape, when the third moving member is moved from the retracted position to the reference position, the first moving member and the second moving member are arranged adjacent to each other. 3) The player is reminded of a mode in which the moving member enters and pushes the first moving member and the second moving member apart from each other. According to the gaming machine H3, the third moving member is abutted at the reference position. Thus, it is possible to form a force in the direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member approach each other, and to couple the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member. As a result, it is possible to operate in a mode different from the player's expectation, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine H3, the first moving member and the second moving member have a first restricting portion and a second restricting portion, and a third restricting portion that is in contact with the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion, respectively. The third moving member, and at least one of the third restricting portion, the first restricting portion, and the second restricting portion moves the third moving member toward the reference position. The first moving member and the second moving member are formed by being inclined in a shape that becomes wider toward the traveling direction side and the third restricting portion is in contact with both sides of the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion. A game machine H4 characterized by being displaced in the direction in which they approach each other.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3, the third moving member is moved toward the reference position in at least one of the third regulating portion, the first regulating portion and the second regulating portion. The first movement member and the second movement are formed by being inclined in a shape that is broadened toward the traveling direction side when the third movement portion is in contact with the first restriction portion and the second restriction portion from both sides. Since the members are displaced in the direction approaching each other, the displacement in the direction approaching each other of the first moving member and the second moving member can be reliably performed. Therefore, the structure which makes the first moving member and the second moving member movable can be simplified, and the design freedom of the structure can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine H4, the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion are respectively disposed on the back side of a portion forming the front view shape of the first moving member and the second moving member, and a third restricting portion The game machine H5 is disposed on the back side of the portion forming the front view shape of the third moving member.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H4, the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion are respectively disposed on the back side of the portion forming the front view shape of the first moving member and the second moving member. And the third restricting portion is disposed on the back side of the portion forming the front view shape of the third moving member, so the first restricting portion, the second restricting portion and the third restricting portion It can be suppressed from being viewed. Therefore, by setting the concave shape and the protruding shape as the external shape of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member, the effect of operating in a mode different from the player's expectation can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine H4 or H5, the first moving member and the second moving member are inclined downward or upward toward the front side of the first moving member and the second moving member, and the first moving member and the second moving member are inclined. The first movable surface is provided with a first inclined surface and a second inclined surface respectively connected to the front of the second moving member, and the third moving member is inclined in the same direction as the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface. A game machine H6 comprising a third inclined surface that is in contact with the front surface of the first inclined surface and that is in contact with the first and second inclined surfaces at the reference position.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H4 or H5, the first moving member and the second moving member are connected to the front of the first moving member and the second moving member, respectively. The third movable member includes a third inclined surface inclined in the same direction as the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface and continuous with the front surface of the third movable member, each having an inclined surface, and at the reference position, the first inclined surface Since the surface and the second inclined surface and the third inclined surface are in contact with each other, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member in the front-rear direction (front and back surfaces) Positioning in the direction of connecting Furthermore, when the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are coupled at the reference position due to the abutment of the inclined surfaces, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member Thus, the player can be made to recognize the front view shape so that there is no gap between them, and as a result, it is possible to improve the rendering effect by combining at the reference position.

  In the gaming machine H6, the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion are respectively disposed on the back side of the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface, and the third restricting portion is formed of the third inclined surface. A game machine H7 characterized in that it is disposed on the back side.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H6, the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion are respectively disposed on the back side of the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface, and the third inclined surface Since the third restricting unit is disposed on the back side of the second restricting unit, it is possible to suppress the player from visually recognizing the first restricting unit, the second restricting unit, and the third restricting unit. Therefore, by setting the concave shape and the projecting shape as the front view shape in the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member, the effect of operating in a mode different from the player's expectation can be enhanced. .

  Here, the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface are formed in an inclined shape in which the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion are not visible in front view, and the third restricting portion is not visible in front view The third inclined surface may be formed in an inclined shape. As described above, making each restricting part invisible by each inclined surface in a front view is a first restricting part in a structure in which the front of each restricting part (the front side of each moving member) is formed as a horizontal surface. And even if one of the second and third restricting parts is arranged invisibly on the back side of the horizontal surface, the other is exposed, which is impossible, as in the gaming machine H7, each restricting part It becomes possible for the first time by forming an inclined surface in front of (the front side of each moving member) (without exposing both the first restricting portion, the second restricting portion and the third restricting portion), It can be made invisible in front view on the back side of each inclined surface), whereby the first restricting portion, the second restricting portion and the third restricting portion are visually recognized by the player, the retracted position and the reference Even during movement between the positions, it can be reliably suppressed. As a result, by combining the concave shape and the protruding shape, it is possible to further enhance the effect of operating in a mode different from the player's expectation.

  In the gaming machine H7, the first moving member and the second moving member have a first positioning surface and a second positioning surface which are inclined upward or downward in a direction opposite to the first and second inclined surfaces. And the third moving member is inclined upward or downward in the same direction as the first positioning surface and the second positioning surface, and is abutted respectively on the first positioning surface and the second positioning surface at the reference position. 3 A game machine H8 having a positioning surface.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H7, the first moving member and the second moving member respectively have the first positioning surface and the second positioning surface, and the third moving member has the third positioning surface. In the reference position, since the first positioning surface and the second positioning surface and the third positioning surface are in contact with each other, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third movement are caused by the contact between the inclined surfaces. Positioning with the member can be performed. In particular, the first positioning surface and the second positioning surface are inclined upward or downward in the direction opposite to the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface, and the third positioning surface is formed by the first positioning surface and the second As it is inclined in the same direction as the positioning surface, the direction of positioning by the abutment of these positioning surfaces is opposite to the direction of positioning by the abutment of the first and second inclined surfaces with the third inclined surface. It can be a direction. As a result, it is possible not only to position the first moving member and the second moving member and the third moving member in the front-rear direction (the direction connecting the front and back) but also to hold the positioning position in the front-rear direction As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattle or relative displacement of the third moving member relative to the first moving member and the second moving member after being coupled at the reference position.

  A movable member movably formed, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the movable member; In a gaming machine, wherein the transmission means comprises a first transmission member and a second transmission member meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, the second transmission member relative to the first transmission member A game machine I1 comprising positioning means for positioning a meshing position at the predetermined phase.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable member which is movably formed, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member There is a gaming machine having a transmission means for transmitting, the transmission means comprising a first transmission member and a second transmission member meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase (e.g. Open 2009-125092)). According to this gaming machine, when one of the first transmission member or the second transmission member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the other of the first transmission member or the second transmission member is rotated by the rotation of the one, The other rotation moves the moving member. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the second transmission member is not meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, a shift occurs in the movement range of the moving member. Therefore, when assembling (engaging) the first transmission member and the second transmission member, it is necessary to position the meshing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member in a predetermined phase and then assemble the same. Positioning operation was complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the positioning means for positioning the meshing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member at a predetermined phase is provided, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are assembled In this case, the first transmission member and the second transmission member can be assembled by using such positioning means. That is, when positioning the meshing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member at a predetermined phase, it is possible to improve the workability of the positioning operation.

  As described above, the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member do not have to be formed over the entire circumference, and it is sufficient if they are formed in a part of the circumferential direction.

  The gaming machine I1 includes a base member on which the first transmission member and the second transmission member are rotatably supported, and the positioning means includes a first base positioning portion and a second base positioning portion formed on the base member. And a first transmission member positioning portion and a second transmission member positioning portion respectively formed on the first transmission member and the second transmission member at positions corresponding to the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion. Game machine I2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed on the base member, and the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are supported. The first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion are respectively formed on the first transmission member and the second transmission member at the position where the first transmission member positioning portion is made to coincide with the first base positioning portion. By assembling the first transmission member and the second transmission member to the base member while aligning the second transmission member positioning portion with the second base positioning portion, the second transmission member can be brought into a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member. It can be positioned. As a result, the operability of the positioning operation can be improved.

  In particular, when at least one of the first base positioning portion or the first transmission member positioning portion and at least one of the second base positioning portion or the second transmission member positioning portion are formed as a through hole, such one penetration By inserting the jig into the hole and bringing the tip of the inserted jig into contact with the other (or inserting), the positioning operation for positioning the second transmission member at a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member is simplified. And accurate.

  In the gaming machine I2, the base member includes a first shaft and a second shaft protruding toward the front of the base member and inserted through the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and the first base positioning A gaming machine I3 characterized in that the unit and the second base positioning unit are formed as through holes.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine I2, the base member includes the first axis and the second axis that are projected from the front of the base member and inserted into the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Since the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, the first transmission member and the second transmission can be positioned while the second transmission member is positioned in a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member. When assembling the member to the base member, it is possible to simultaneously perform the positioning operation and the assembling operation, and the workability can be improved.

  That is, according to the gaming machine I3, since the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, the jig is inserted from the back surface of the base member to the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion. Thus, the jig can be protruded from the front of the base member together with the first axis and the second axis. Thus, the tip of the jig is used as the first transmission member and the second transmission member simultaneously with the operation of assembling (inserting) the first transmission member and the second transmission member to the first axis and the second axis from the front of the base member. A positioning operation can be performed in which the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion are brought into contact (or inserted). As a result, the positioning operation and the assembling operation can be performed simultaneously, and the operability can be improved accordingly.

  In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first transmission member is formed of a pair of members coaxially coaxially in the axial direction, and the first transmission member positioning portion is formed as a through hole at corresponding positions of the pair of members. Game machine I4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first transmission member is composed of a pair of members coaxially coaxially in the axial direction, and the first transmission member is disposed at mutually corresponding positions of the pair of members. Since the positioning portions are respectively formed as through holes, the positioning operation of the pair of gears can be performed simultaneously, and the workability of the positioning operation can be improved accordingly. In addition, since the positioning operation of the pair of gears can be performed using a common jig, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to couple a pair of gear wheels, the pair of gear wheels can be rotatably supported on a common shaft so as to be relatively rotatable. The second transmission member may be configured similarly.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the second transmission member is formed of a pair of members coaxially overlapping in the axial direction, and the pair of members are a protrusion which protrudes from one member and a protrusion thereof The second transmission member positioning portion is formed on a member disposed on the side of the base member of the pair of members, including a concave portion which is recessed in the other member for receiving. Gaming machine I5.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the second transmission member is formed of a pair of members coaxially overlapping in the axial direction, and a member disposed on the base member side of the pair of members Since the second transmission member positioning portion is formed on the second transmission member positioning portion, the member disposed on the base member side of the pair of members can be positioned at a predetermined phase by using the second transmission member positioning portion. . In this case, the pair of members can be positioned in a predetermined phase and can not be relatively rotated (that is, synchronized) by having the protrusion of one member be received in the recess of the other member. Can be pivotally supported on a common axis. In particular, since the projections are received in and fitted to the recesses, the overall rigidity can be increased accordingly.

  The recess does not have to be bottomed and may be formed as a through hole. That is, when the concave portion coaxially overlaps the pair of members, it is sufficient as long as the concave portion can be positioned in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) to receive the connection projection.

  A game comprising a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings disposed below the liquid crystal display device, and an out port for discharging game balls that have not flowed without winning in the plurality of winning ports from the gaming area In the gaming machine, the first winning opening of the plurality of winning openings is close to the lower edge of the gaming area to the position where the passage of gaming balls is disabled between the lower edge of the gaming area or The first out port is disposed in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the first out port is disposed on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning port; A game machine J1 comprising a second out port disposed on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the winning port.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings disposed below the liquid crystal display device, and a gaming ball that has not been won in the plurality of winning openings There is a gaming machine provided with an out port for discharging from (see, for example, JP 2012-143268 A). In recent years, in order to enhance the rendering effect, the enlargement of the liquid crystal display device is required. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device is lowered to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device, it is necessary to lower the position of the winning opening accordingly. At some point, if the position of the winning opening falls too low, it is not possible to secure a space for the game ball to flow downward (lower edge of the game area, for example, to the inner rail) below the winning opening. In other words, it is not possible to discharge the game ball that has flown without being won in the winning opening from the out opening. Therefore, there is a limit in lowering the position of the winning opening, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device can not be made sufficiently large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the out port is a first out port disposed on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning port among the plurality of winning ports, and the first out port. Is provided on the other side in the width direction other side of the game area with respect to the winning opening of the game area, the first winning opening is not won and the width direction is on one side than the first winning opening. The game ball which has flowed down can be discharged from the game area by the first out port, while the second game ball which has not flown to the first winning port and has flowed to the other side in the width direction than the first winning port Can be discharged from the game area by the out-port of the Thus, there is no need to secure a space for the game balls to flow downward (at the lower edge of the game area, for example, to the inner rail) below the first winning opening. Therefore, the position of the first winning opening can be lowered further (that is, to a position that disables passage of the game ball between the lower edge of the game area), and accordingly, the liquid crystal display device Can be made larger.

  The gaming machine J1 includes an effect member on which an effect accompanying the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening of the plurality of winning openings is provided, and the gaming board in which the gaming area is formed on the front side is transparent And the rendering member is disposed at a position corresponding to the second winning opening on the back side of the game board, and the second winning opening and the rendering member are in the first winning opening. A game machine J2 characterized in that it is disposed on one side in the width direction of the game area or on the other side in the width direction.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J1, the gaming machine J2 is provided with an effect member for performing an effect accompanied by the game ball winning to the second winning opening among the plurality of winning openings. Since it is disposed at the position corresponding to the second winning opening on the back side of the gaming board made of the light transmitting material, the scene for the player who visually recognizes the situation where the gaming ball is winning to the second winning opening The effect by the effect member can also be visually recognized at the same time behind the, and the effect accompanying the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening can be effectively performed.

  In this case, since the second winning opening and the effect member are disposed on one side in the width direction of the game area or the other side in the width direction with respect to the first winning opening, the positions of the second winning hole and the effect member Can be lowered downward, and the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display can be lowered accordingly. As a result, even when the effect member is provided, the liquid crystal display device can be made larger.

  That is, disposing the effect member on the back side of the game board at the position corresponding to the second winning opening interferes with the enlargement of the liquid crystal display device because the effect member interferes with the liquid crystal display device. Become. On the other hand, as described above, the first out port and the second out port are disposed on the one side in the width direction and the other side in the width direction with respect to the first winning opening, and thus Not only it is possible to lower the position of the winning opening 1 of 1, but also it is possible to secure the freedom of the arrangement position on the one side in the width direction or the other side of the gaming area of the first winning opening. As a result, according to the gaming machine J2, the layout for arranging the effect member on the back side of the game board at the position corresponding to the second winning hole can be secured. It became possible.

  In the gaming machine J2, a gaming machine J3 characterized in that the second winning opening is disposed substantially in the widthwise center of the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J2, the second winning opening is disposed substantially at the center in the width direction of the gaming area, so the size of the liquid crystal display device can be increased while the gaming area is limited. It is possible to secure a wider space for arranging the effect member by effectively utilizing the space. That is, with such a layout, enlargement of both the liquid crystal display device and the effect member can be efficiently performed. Further, by arranging the second winning opening substantially at the center in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to lengthen the flow-down path of the gaming ball to the second winning opening. As a result, it is possible to enhance the game characteristics for winning the game ball to the second winning opening, and it is possible to enhance the expectation of the effect by the effect member accompanying the winning on the second winning opening.

  The game machine J2 or J3 includes a second effect member disposed on the back side of the game board, and the second effect member is disposed at a position where at least a portion thereof overlaps the effect member in a front view. A game machine J4 characterized by being provided.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J2 or J3, the gaming machine J4 includes a second effect member disposed on the back side of the gaming board, and the second effect member has at least one in front view. Since the unit is disposed at a position overlapping the rendering member, when the game board is formed of a light transmitting material, only the necessary portion of the second rendering member is made visible to the player, and the other portion is rendered The member can shield the player from the player. Thus, the second effect member does not have to be designed on the premise that the whole is viewed by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved.

  In any one of game machines J2 to J4, a game machine J5 characterized in that the effect member is formed in a circular shape rotatable around the second winning opening.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the effect member is formed in a circular shape that can rotate around the second winning opening, and thus surrounds the second winning opening An effect can be performed in the entire area, and the effect of the effect accompanying the winning of the second winning opening can be enhanced.

  In this case, the second winning opening needs to be disposed at a position where a space for letting the game ball flow down both above and below can be secured, and the second winning opening is provided for the second winning opening. Since the first winning opening is disposed at one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction and located below the gaming area, the effect member is formed in a circular shape centered on the second winning opening. Thus, the space which can be secured around the second winning opening can be utilized to the fullest extent, and as a result, the area of the effect member can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  A liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings arranged below the liquid crystal display device, an out port for discharging game balls which have not flowed without winning in the plurality of winning ports, from the game area, and the game area In the gaming machine provided with a partitioning member for partitioning, the partitioning member is a partial region of a circular shape in the gaming region, and a region on one side in the width direction below the liquid crystal display device is outward A gaming machine K1 characterized by being divided into an enlarged shape.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings disposed below the liquid crystal display device, and a gaming ball that has not been won in the plurality of winning openings There is a gaming machine provided with an out port for discharging from (see, for example, JP 2012-143268 A). In recent years, in order to enhance the rendering effect, the enlargement of the liquid crystal display device is required. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device is lowered to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device, it is necessary to lower the position of the winning opening accordingly. At some point, if the position of the winning opening falls too low, it is not possible to secure a space for the game ball to flow downward (lower edge of the game area, for example, to the inner rail) below the winning opening. In other words, it is not possible to discharge the game ball that has flown without being won in the winning opening from the out opening. Therefore, there is a limit in lowering the position of the winning opening, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device can not be made sufficiently large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the partitioning member has a shape in which the gaming area is a part of a circular area and the area in the width direction one side below the liquid crystal display device is expanded outward Thus, the enlarged area can be used as a placement space for the winning opening. Therefore, by arranging at least a part of the plurality of winning openings among the plurality of winning openings in the enlarged area, it is possible to lower the position of each winning opening by that amount. Therefore, the position of the lower side edge portion of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device can be enlarged.

  The gaming machine K1 includes: one side winning opening disposed in the outwardly expanded width direction one side of the gaming area; and a guiding path guiding the gaming ball to the one side winning opening. A game machine K2 characterized in that an opening of the guide path is formed in a direction facing one width direction side of the game area.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, the opening of the guide path for guiding the gaming ball to the one side winning opening is formed in the direction facing the width direction one side of the gaming area. It is not necessary to secure a large space for the game ball to flow down for winning in the side winning opening above the one side winning opening. Accordingly, the position of the lower side edge portion of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered downward, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device can be made larger.

  In addition, at least a part of the opening is formed between the vertical direction facing at least directly above and the horizontal direction orthogonal to it and facing the one width direction when the opening of the guide path is formed in the direction facing the one width direction side It is the meaning sufficient if it is formed. The same applies to the following.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the other side winning opening is provided in the area on the other side in the width direction opposite to the widthwise one side of the gaming area which is enlarged outward, and the other side winning opening is And the lower edge of the gaming area is disposed close to the lower edge of the gaming area or in contact with the lower edge of the gaming area to a position where the passage of gaming balls is disabled. A first out port disposed on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the other side winning opening, and a second side disposed in the width direction other side of the game area with respect to the other side prize opening And an out port of the game machine K3.

  Here, if the position of the other-side winning opening can be lowered downward, one of the lower side edge portions of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered accordingly, so that the liquid crystal display device can be enlarged. However, the area on the other side in the width direction of the game area where the other-side winning opening is disposed (the area below the liquid crystal display device and on the opposite side to the one side in the width direction to be expanded outward) is Because it is not expanded outward, if the position of the other side winning opening is lowered too much, the gaming ball will flow down below the other side of the winning opening (for example, between the lower edge of the game area, eg, the inner rail) Can not secure space. That is, it is not possible to discharge the game ball which has flown down without being won by the other side winning opening from the out opening. Therefore, there is a limit in lowering the position of the other side winning opening, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device can not be made sufficiently large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the out port is a first out port disposed on one side in the width direction of the gaming area with respect to the other side winning port Since the other side winning opening is provided with a second out port disposed on the other side in the width direction of the game area, the other side winning opening does not win and flows to the one side in the width direction than the other side winning opening The game balls that have been made can be discharged from the game area by the first out port, while the game balls that have not been won by the other side winning port and flowed down to the other side in the width direction than the other side winning port are made by the second out port. It can be discharged from the game area. Thus, there is no need to secure a space for the game balls to flow downward (at the lower edge of the game area, for example, to the inner rail) below the other-side winning opening. Therefore, the position of the other side winning opening can be lowered further (that is, to a position that disables passage of the game ball between the lower edge of the game area), and accordingly, the liquid crystal display device It can be enlarged.

  A gaming machine K4 characterized in that the gaming machine K3 includes a guiding path for guiding the gaming ball to the other side winning opening, and the opening of the guiding path is formed in a direction facing one width direction side of the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K3, the opening of the guide path for guiding the gaming ball to the other side winning opening is formed in the direction facing the width direction one side of the gaming area. It is not necessary to secure a large space for the game ball to flow down for winning in the side winning opening above the other side winning opening. Accordingly, the position of the lower side edge portion of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered downward, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device can be made larger. In particular, in the gaming machine K4, the arrangement of the first and second out ports allows the other side winning opening to be disposed lower enough to prevent passage of the ball between the lower edge of the game area and the other. It is effective to make the opening of the guide passage face one side in the width direction of the game area, whereby the flow direction does not flow downward below the liquid crystal display device, but the other side in the width direction from the one side in the width direction It is possible to enable the game ball flowing toward the other to win the other side winning opening disposed on the other side in the width direction.

  In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the gaming board is provided with a second winning opening and an effect member for performing an effect accompanying a winning of the gaming ball to the second winning opening, and a gaming board in which the gaming area is formed on the front side It is made of a light transmitting material, and the effect member is disposed at a position corresponding to the second winning opening on the back side of the game board, and the second winning opening and the effect member are on the one side winning opening And a game machine K5 arranged at a position shifted in the width direction of the game area with respect to the other-side winning opening.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K3 or K4, the effect member on which the effect accompanying the winning of the gaming ball to the second winning opening is performed is the back side of the gaming board made of light transmissive material Is arranged at a position corresponding to the second winning opening, which allows the player who visually recognizes the scene where the game ball is to be won to the second winning opening to also simultaneously view the effect by the effect member behind the scene It is possible to effectively perform an effect accompanying the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening.

  In this case, the second winning opening and the effect member are disposed at positions (one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction) shifted from the one side winning opening and the other side winning opening in the width direction of the game area. The positions of the second winning opening and the effect member can be lowered downward, and the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display can be lowered downward. As a result, even when the effect member is provided, the liquid crystal display device can be made larger.

  That is, disposing the effect member on the back side of the game board at the position corresponding to the second winning opening interferes with the enlargement of the liquid crystal display device because the effect member interferes with the liquid crystal display device. Become. On the other hand, as described above, the one side winning opening is disposed in the widthwise one side of the gaming area which is expanded outward, and the other side winning opening is in the width direction of the gaming area. By arranging the first out port and the second out port at the shifted position, it is possible not only to lower the positions of the one side winning opening and the other side winning opening respectively, but also the one side winning Since the degree of freedom of the arrangement position on the one side or the other side in the width direction of the game area of the mouth and the other side winning opening can be secured, the placement space for the second winning opening and the effect member can be secured accordingly. As a result, according to the gaming machine K5, it becomes possible to arrange the effect member on the back side of the gaming board at the position corresponding to the second winning opening.

  In the game machine K5, a game machine K6 characterized in that the effect member is formed in a circular shape rotatable around the second winning opening.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K5, the effect member is formed in a circular shape rotatable around the second winning opening, so the effect is produced in the entire area surrounding the second winning opening. It is possible to enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the winning of the second winning opening.

  In this case, the second winning opening needs to be disposed at a position where a space can be secured for the game ball to flow down both upward and downward, and is not expanded outward in the game area. Since the other side winning opening is arranged in the area and the distance between the second winning opening and the other winning opening is relatively narrow, the effect member has a circular shape centered on the second winning opening. By being formed, the space which can be secured around the second winning opening can be utilized to the maximum extent effectively, as a result, while securing the distance between the space where the gaming ball is allowed to flow down and the other winning opening, respectively. The area of the effect member can be increased to enhance the effect of the effect.

  Game machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H8, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, K1 to K6, The gaming machine L1 is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  Game machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H8, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, K1 to K6, The gaming machine L2 is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

Game machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H8, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, K1 to K6, A gaming machine L3 characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings disposed below the liquid crystal display device, and a gaming ball that has not been won in the plurality of winning openings are discharged from the gaming area There is a gaming machine provided with an out slot (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-143268).
In recent years, in order to enhance the rendering effect, the enlargement of the liquid crystal display device is required.
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device is lowered to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device, it is necessary to lower the position of the winning opening accordingly. At some point, if the position of the winning opening falls too low, it is impossible to secure a space for the game ball to flow downward to the winning opening. In other words, it is not possible to discharge the game ball that has flown without being won in the winning opening from the out opening. Therefore, there is a limit in lowering the position of the winning opening, and as a result, there is a problem that the liquid crystal display device can not be made large enough.
The present technical concept is made to solve the problems illustrated above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can increase the size of a liquid crystal display device.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 includes a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning prize openings disposed below the liquid crystal display device, and a plurality of winning prize openings without being won An out port for discharging the game ball from the game area, and a dividing member for dividing the game area, wherein the dividing member is a part of the circular shape of the game area, An area on one side in the width direction below the liquid crystal display device is divided into an outwardly expanded shape.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, wherein the one side winning opening disposed in the outwardly expanded width direction one side of the gaming area, and And a guide path for guiding the game ball to the side winning opening, and the opening of the guide path is formed in a direction facing one side in the width direction of the game area.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein an area on the other side in the width direction opposite to the one side in the width direction expanded outward of the gaming area The other side winning opening is arranged, and the other side winning opening is close to the lower edge of the gaming area to the position where the passage of the gaming ball is disabled between the lower edge of the gaming area or the gaming side It is disposed in contact with the lower edge of the area, and the out-port is a first out-port disposed on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the other-side pay-out port and the other-side pay-out port. And a second out port disposed on the other side in the width direction of the game area.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the partitioning member enlarges the gaming area to a part of the circular shape and one widthwise lower area below the liquid crystal display device. Since the area is divided into shapes, such an enlarged area can be used as a placement space for the winning opening. Therefore, by arranging at least a part of the plurality of winning openings among the plurality of winning openings in the enlarged area, it is possible to lower the position of each winning opening by that amount. Therefore, the position of the lower side edge portion of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device can be enlarged.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the opening of the guide path for guiding the game ball to the one side winning opening is one side of the gaming area in the width direction. Since it is formed in the facing direction, it is not necessary to secure a large space where the game balls flow down for winning in the one-side winning opening above the one-side winning opening. Accordingly, the position of the lower side edge portion of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered downward, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device can be made larger.
In addition, at least a part of the opening is formed between the vertical direction facing at least directly above and the horizontal direction orthogonal to it and facing the one width direction when the opening of the guide path is formed in the direction facing the one width direction side It is the meaning sufficient if it is formed. The same applies to the following.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the liquid crystal display device can be enlarged.
Here, if the position of the other-side winning opening can be lowered downward, one of the lower side edge portions of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered accordingly, so that the liquid crystal display device can be enlarged. However, the area on the other side in the width direction of the game area where the other-side winning opening is disposed (the area below the liquid crystal display device and on the opposite side to the one side in the width direction to be expanded outward) is Because it is not expanded outward, if the position of the other side winning opening is lowered too much, the gaming ball will flow down below the other side of the winning opening (for example, between the lower edge of the game area, eg, the inner rail) Can not secure space. That is, it is not possible to discharge the game ball which has flown down without being won by the other side winning opening from the out opening. Therefore, there is a limit in lowering the position of the other side winning opening, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device can not be made sufficiently large.
On the other hand, according to the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the technical idea 1 or 2, the out port is a first out disposed on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the other side winning hole. Since the mouth and the second out port disposed on the other side of the game area in the width direction relative to the other side winning opening, the other side winning opening is not won and the width direction is one side more than the other side winning opening The game ball which has flown down can be discharged from the game area by the first out port, but the second out of the game ball which has not flown to the other side winning port and flowed to the other side in the width direction than the other side winning port It can be discharged from the game area by the mouth. Thus, there is no need to secure a space for the game balls to flow downward (at the lower edge of the game area, for example, to the inner rail) below the other-side winning opening. Therefore, the position of the other side winning opening can be lowered further (that is, to a position that disables passage of the game ball between the lower edge of the game area), and accordingly, the liquid crystal display device It can be enlarged.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 rails inside the game board 61 (partitioning members)
62 Outer rail (partition member)
73 Outer edge member (partition member)
64 1st winning opening (2nd winning opening)
71 First Out (Out)
72 second out port (out port)
74 guide plate member (guide member)
81 3rd Symbol Display (Liquid Crystal Display)
300 rotation unit (effect member)
410 Mounting base (part of the base member)
410a Positioning hole (first base positioning part)
410b Positioning hole (second base positioning part)
421 Back case body (part of base member)
421a Positioning hole (first base positioning part)
421b Positioning hole (second base positioning part)
426 First axis 427 Second axis 430 Drive motor (drive means)
451 Opening and closing first gear (part of transmission means, first transmission member, second transmission member, second drive means side member)
451d Connecting projection (positioning means, projection)
451e Positioning hole (Positioning means, first transmission member positioning part)
452 Opening / closing second gear (part of transmission means, first transmission member, second transmission member, second moving member side member)
452d connecting projection (pin part)
452e Positioning hole (Positioning means, second transmission member positioning part)
461 Rotation first gear (part of transmission means, drive means side member, first transmission member, second transmission member)
461a1 Cylindrical surface (part of non-formed part)
461d connection hole (positioning means, recess)
462 Rotating second gear (part of transmitting means, moving member side member, first transmitting member, second transmitting member)
462a1 Non-formed surface (part of non-formed part)
462d Connecting projection (To-be-fastened part)
462e Positioning hole (Positioning means, second transmission member positioning part)
471 back arm body (first moving member or part of second moving member)
472 Front arm body (part of the first moving member or the second moving member)
481, 7481 Slide rack member (groove arrangement member)
481c Connection groove (connection groove)
9482 Cam leg member (second transmission member)
8483 Second pinion leg member (second transmission member)
491, 492 operating member (moving member, first moving member, second moving member)
510 Substrate member (base member)
511 Guide groove (slide hole)
522 Drive motor (drive means)
524 Crank gear (part of transmission means)
525 Connecting rod (part of transmission means)
526 Coupling shaft (part of transmission means, connection member)
530 Slide mechanism (moving member)
531c Insertion shaft (projected part)
539 First coupling member (part of moving member, third moving member)
539e Lower surface (third contact part, third restriction part)
10539e2 inclined lower surface (third inclined surface)
10539f1 Left and right inner wall (3rd regulation part)
10539f2 back side inner wall surface (third positioning surface)
541 First link member (part of transmission means, first member)
4543 Pinion gear (pinion member)
4544, 6544 rack (rack member)
600 Second combination operation unit (second effect member)
621 Inner link member (part of transmission means)
622 Outer link member (part of transmission means)
630 Second coupling member (part of moving member, first moving member and second moving member)
630a Upper surface (first contact portion, second contact portion, first restricting portion, second restricting portion)
10630a2 Inclined upper surface (first inclined surface, second inclined surface)
630b Opposing surface (abutment surface)
10630c1 Left and right outer wall surfaces (first and second restriction parts)
10630c2 Back side outer wall surface (first positioning surface, second positioning surface)
640 Drive motor (drive means)
640 Second Prize Win (One Side Win)
641 Opening 650a Second specified winning opening (First winning opening, other winning opening)
651 Opening 700 Ring operation unit (second effect member)
710 Intermediate case body (part of base member)
711a Front (facing wall)
713a Front (facing wall)
720 Rear case body (part of base member)
730 Front case body (part of base member)
731a back (facing wall)
732 Column (intersection)
733 Guide rod (extension member, part of guide member)
740 Drive motor (drive means)
761 Pinion gear (part of transmission means, pinion)
762 Rack (part of transmission means)
770 Link member (part of transmission means, connection member)
771 Main body 773 Protruding wall (part of connecting member, tooth forming part)
774 Gear section (second transmission member)
774b Tooth 780 Lifting base (moving member, part of second moving member)
784 Guided part (guiding part, part of guiding member)
790 Ring forming member (moving member)
792 Gear section (first transmission member)
811 Axis (1st Axis)
820 Arm member (moving member)
822a first groove (guide groove)
822b second groove (recess)
830 Drive motor (drive means)
831 Drive shaft (second axis)
832 Drive arm (rotary member)
833 Protruding pins (pin members)

Claims (2)

A liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings arranged below the liquid crystal display device, an out port for discharging game balls which have not flowed without winning in the plurality of winning ports, from the game area, and the game area A gaming machine having a partitioning member for partitioning;
Equipped with a guide member,
The dividing member divides the gaming area into a part of a circular shape, and an area on one side in the width direction below the liquid crystal display device is expanded outward.
The winning opening is disposed in the one side winning opening disposed in the area on the one side in the width direction of the gaming area, and in the area on the other side in the width direction opposite to the one side in the width direction of the gaming area And the other side winning opening,
The other side winning opening is disposed in proximity to the lower edge of the gaming area or in contact with the lower edge of the gaming area to a position where the passage of gaming balls is disabled between the lower edge of the gaming area ,
The one side winning opening is disposed upstream of the other side winning opening in the gaming area,
The out-port is disposed on a first out-port disposed on one side in the width direction of the gaming area with respect to the other-side winning port, and disposed on the other side in the width direction of the gaming area with respect to the other-side winning port And a second out outlet,
The first out port is disposed downstream of the guide member,
The guide member has a plate-like flowing lower surface and is disposed at a position downstream of the one side winning opening and upstream of the other side winning opening, and winning at the one side winning opening It is possible to guide the game ball which has not flowed down toward the other side winning opening,
The guide member has a length capable of guiding a plurality of game balls,
A game machine characterized in that it is possible to guide a game ball which has passed through one width direction side of the liquid crystal display device to the other side winning opening.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a substrate box.

Images